Transmission method, transmission device, reception method and reception device

ABSTRACT

A transmission method includes generating a first precoded signal and a second precoded signal by performing a precoding process on a first baseband signal and a second baseband signal, outputting a third signal by inserting a pilot signal into the first precoded signal, outputting a fourth signal by applying a first phase change to the second precoded signal, outputting a fifth signal by inserting a pilot signal into the fourth signal, and outputting a sixth signal by applying a second phase change to the fifth signal.

TECHNICAL FIELD

The present disclosure relates to transmission devices and receptiondevices, and in particular to transmission devices and reception devicesthat communicate by using multiple antennas.

BACKGROUND ART

In a line of sight (LOS) environment in which a direct wave is dominant,one example of a communications method that uses multiple antennas isthe multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) communications method, and oneexample of a transmission method for achieving favorable receptionquality is the method disclosed in Non-Patent Literature (NPTL) 1.

CITATION LIST Non-Patent Literature

-   NPTL 1: “MIMO for DVB-NGH, the next generation mobile TV    broadcasting,” IEEE Commun. Mag., vol. 57, no. 7, pp. 130-137, July    2013.-   NPTL 2: “Standard conformable antenna diversity techniques for OFDM    and its application to the DVB-T system,” IEEE Globecom 2001, pp.    3100-3105, November 2001.-   NPTL 3: IEEE P802.11n(D3.00) Draft STANDARD for Information    Technology-Telecommunications and information exchange between    systems-Local and metropolitan area networks-Specific    requirements-Part11: Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and    Physical Layer (PHY) specifications, 2007.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

One non-limiting embodiment of the present disclosure provides atransmission device that improves data reception quality in apropagation environment including LOS.

A transmission device according to one aspect of the present disclosureincludes: a weighting synthesizer that generates a first precoded signaland a second precoded signal by performing a precoding process on afirst baseband signal and a second baseband signal; a first pilotinserter that outputs a third signal by inserting a pilot signal intothe first precoded signal; a first phase changer that outputs a fourthsignal by applying a first phase change to the second precoded signal; asecond pilot inserter that outputs a fifth signal by inserting a pilotsignal into the fourth signal; and a second phase changer that outputs asixth signal by applying a second phase change to the fifth signal.

A transmission method according to one aspect of the present disclosureincludes: generating a first precoded signal and a second precodedsignal by performing a precoding process on a first baseband signal anda second baseband signal; outputting a third signal by inserting a pilotsignal into the first precoded signal; outputting a fourth signal byapplying a first phase change to the second precoded signal; outputtinga fifth signal by inserting a pilot signal into the fourth signal; andoutputting a sixth signal by applying a second phase change to the fifthsignal.

General and specific aspects of the above may be implemented as anycombination of a system, device, and/or method.

Accordingly, with the present disclosure, since it is possible toimprove data reception quality in a propagation environment includingLOS, it is possible to provide a high-quality communications service.

Further merits and advantageous effects in one aspect of the presentdisclosure will become apparent from the following description andfigures. The merits and/or advantageous effects are realized bycharacteristics disclosed in the following embodiments, description, andfigures, but there is no requirement to provide all merits and/oradvantageous effects in order to achieve one or more equivalentcharacteristics.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 illustrates one example of a configuration of a transmissiondevice according to this embodiment.

FIG. 2 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 1.

FIG. 3 illustrates one example of a configuration of the radio unitillustrated in FIG. 1.

FIG. 4 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of thetransmission signal illustrated in FIG. 1.

FIG. 5 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of thetransmission signal illustrated in FIG. 1.

FIG. 6 illustrates one example of a configuration of components relevantto control information generation in FIG. 2.

FIG. 7 illustrates one example of a configuration of the antenna unitillustrated in FIG. 1.

FIG. 8 illustrates one example of a configuration of a reception deviceaccording to this embodiment.

FIG. 9 illustrates a relationship between the transmission device andthe reception device.

FIG. 10 illustrates one example of a configuration of the antenna unitillustrated in FIG. 8.

FIG. 11 illustrates part of the frame illustrated in FIG. 5.

FIG. 12 illustrates one example of a modulation scheme used by themapper illustrated in FIG. 1.

FIG. 13 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of thetransmission signal illustrated in FIG. 1.

FIG. 14 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of thetransmission signal illustrated in FIG. 1.

FIG. 15 illustrates one example of a configuration used when CCD isused.

FIG. 16 illustrates one example of a carrier arrangement used when OFDMis used.

FIG. 17 illustrates an example of a configuration of a transmissiondevice based on the DVB-NGH standard.

FIG. 18 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 1.

FIG. 19 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 1.

FIG. 20 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 1.

FIG. 21 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 1.

FIG. 22 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 1.

FIG. 23 illustrates one example of a configuration of a base station.

FIG. 24 illustrates one example of a configuration of a terminal.

FIG. 25 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal.

FIG. 26 illustrates one example of transmission between a base stationand a terminal.

FIG. 27 illustrates one example of transmission between a base stationand a terminal.

FIG. 28 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 1.

FIG. 29 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 1.

FIG. 30 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 1.

FIG. 31 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 1.

FIG. 32 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 1.

FIG. 33 illustrates one example of a configuration of the signalprocessor illustrated in FIG. 1.

FIG. 34 illustrates one example of the system configuration in a statein which transmission is being performed between a base station and aterminal.

FIG. 35 illustrates one example of transmission between a base stationand a terminal.

FIG. 36 illustrates one example of data including a reception capabilitynotification symbol.

FIG. 37 illustrates one example of data including a reception capabilitynotification symbol.

FIG. 38 illustrates one example of data including a reception capabilitynotification symbol.

FIG. 39 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of atransmission signal.

FIG. 40 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of atransmission signal.

FIG. 41 illustrates one example of a configuration of a receptiondevice.

FIG. 42 illustrates one example of a frame configuration that uses amulti-carrier transmission scheme.

FIG. 43 illustrates one example of a frame configuration that uses asingle-carrier transmission scheme.

FIG. 44 illustrates one example of a configuration of a transmissiondevice.

FIG. 45 illustrates one example of a symbol arrangement method withrespect to the time axis.

FIG. 46 illustrates one example of a symbol arrangement method withrespect to the frequency axis.

FIG. 47 illustrates one example of a symbol arrangement method withrespect to the time and frequency axes.

FIG. 48 illustrates one example of a symbol arrangement method withrespect to the time axis.

FIG. 49 illustrates one example of a symbol arrangement method withrespect to the frequency axis.

FIG. 50 illustrates one example of a symbol arrangement method withrespect to the time and frequency axes.

FIG. 51 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal.

FIG. 52 illustrates one example of a frame configuration upon modulatedsignal transmission.

FIG. 53 illustrates one example of a frame configuration upon modulatedsignal transmission.

FIG. 54 illustrates one example of a configuration of a signal processorin a transmission device.

FIG. 55 illustrates one example of a configuration of a radio unit in atransmission device.

FIG. 56 illustrates one example of a configuration of a signal processorin a transmission device.

FIG. 57 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal.

FIG. 58 illustrates one example of a frame configuration upon modulatedsignal transmission.

FIG. 59 illustrates one example of how phase changers are arrangedbefore and after a weighting synthesizer.

FIG. 60 illustrates one example of how phase changers are arrangedbefore and after a weighting synthesizer.

FIG. 61 illustrates one example of how phase changers are arrangedbefore and after a weighting synthesizer.

FIG. 62 illustrates one example of how phase changers are arrangedbefore and after a weighting synthesizer.

FIG. 63 illustrates one example of how phase changers are arrangedbefore and after a weighting synthesizer.

FIG. 64 illustrates one example of how phase changers are arrangedbefore and after a weighting synthesizer.

FIG. 65 illustrates one example of how phase changers are arrangedbefore and after a weighting synthesizer.

FIG. 66 illustrates one example of how phase changers are arrangedbefore and after a weighting synthesizer.

FIG. 67 illustrates one example of how phase changers are arrangedbefore and after a weighting synthesizer.

FIG. 68 illustrates operations performed by a mapper.

FIG. 69 illustrates one example of a signal point arrangement inmapping.

FIG. 70 illustrates one example of a signal point arrangement inmapping.

FIG. 71 illustrates one example of a signal point arrangement inmapping.

FIG. 72 illustrates one example of a signal point arrangement inmapping.

FIG. 73 illustrates one example of a configuration of a transmissiondevice.

FIG. 74 illustrates operations performed by a mapper.

FIG. 75 illustrates operations performed by a mapper.

FIG. 76 illustrates operations performed by a mapper.

FIG. 77 illustrates operations performed by a mapper.

FIG. 78 illustrates operations performed by a mapper.

DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENT(S)

(Communications Method in LOS Environment)

In a LOS environment in which a direct wave is dominant, one example ofa communications method that uses multiple antennas is the MIMOcommunications method, and one example of a transmission method forachieving favorable reception quality is the method disclosed in NPTL 1.

FIG. 17 illustrates one example of a configuration of a transmissiondevice based on the Digital Video Broadcasting-Next Generation Handheld(DVB-NGH) standard, in a case where there are two transmitting antennasand two transmission modulated signals (transmission streams). Thisexample is disclosed in NPTL 1. In the transmission device, data 003encoded by encoder 002 is split into data 005A and data 005B by splitter004. Data 005A is interleaved by interleaver 004A and mapped by mapper006A. Similarly, data 005B is interleaved by interleaver 004B and mappedby mapper 006B. Weighting synthesizers 008A 008B receive inputs ofmapped signals 007A. 007B, and weighting synthesize these signals togenerate weighting synthesized signals 009A, 016B. The phase ofweighting synthesized signal 016B is then changed. Then, radio units010A, 010B perform processing related to orthogonal frequency divisionmultiplexing (OFDM) and processing such as frequency conversion and/oramplification, and transmit transmission signal 011A from antenna 012Aand transmission signal 011B from antenna 012B.

The conventional configuration does not consider transmitting singlestream signals together. In such a case, in particular, it is favorableto implement a new transmission method for improving data receptionquality in the reception device that receives the single stream.

Hereinafter, embodiments according to the present disclosure will bedescribed in detail with reference to the drawings.

Embodiment 1

A transmission method, transmission device, reception method, andreception device according to this embodiment will be described indetail.

FIG. 1 illustrates one example of a configuration of a transmissiondevice according to this embodiment, such as a base station, accesspoint, or broadcast station. Error correction encoder 102 receivesinputs of data 101 and control signal 100, and based on informationrelated to the error correction code included in control signal 100(e.g., error correction code information, code length (block length),encode rate), performs error correction encoding, and outputs encodeddata 103. Note that error correction encoder 102 may include aninterleaver. In such a case, error correction encoder 102 may rearrangethe encoded data before outputting encoded data 103.

Mapper 104 receives inputs of encoded data 103 and control signal 100,and based on information on the modulated signal included in controlsignal 100, performs mapping in accordance with the modulation scheme,and outputs baseband signal 105_1, which is a mapped signal, andbaseband signal 105_2, which is a mapped signal. Note that mapper 104generates mapped signal 105_1 using a first sequence and generatesmapped signal 105_2 using a second sequence. Here, the first sequenceand second sequence are different.

Signal processor 106 receives inputs of mapped signals 105_1 and 105_2,signal group 110, and control signal 100, performs signal processingbased on control signal 100, and outputs processed signals 106_A and106_B. Here, processed signal 106_A is expressed as u1(i), and processedsignal 106_B is expressed as u2(i). i is a symbol number, and, forexample, is an integer that is greater than or equal to 0. Note thatdetails regarding the signal processing will be described with referenceto FIG. 2 later.

Radio unit 107_A receives inputs of processed signal 106_A and controlsignal 100, and based on control signal 100, processes processed signal106_A and outputs transmission signal 108_A. Transmission signal 108_Ais then output as radio waves from antenna unit #A 109_A.

Similarly, radio unit 107_B receives inputs of processed signal 106_Band control signal 100, and based on control signal 100, processesprocessed signal 106_B and outputs transmission signal 108_B.Transmission signal 108_B is then output as radio waves from antennaunit #B 109_B.

Antenna unit #A 109_A receives an input of control signal 100. Here,based on control signal 100, antenna unit #A 109_A processestransmission signal 108_A and outputs the result as radio waves.However, antenna unit #A 109_A may not receive an input of controlsignal 100.

Similarly, antenna unit #B 109_B receives an input of control signal100. Here, based on control signal 100, antenna unit #B 109_B processestransmission signal 108_B and outputs the result as radio waves.However, antenna unit #B 109_B may not receive an input of controlsignal 100.

Note that control signal 100 may be generated based on informationtransmitted by a device that is the communication partner illustrated inFIG. 1, and, alternatively, the device illustrated in FIG. 1 may includean input unit, and control signal 100 may be generated based oninformation input from the input unit.

FIG. 2 illustrates one example of a configuration of signal processor106 illustrated in FIG. 1. Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203 receivesinputs of mapped signal 201A (mapped signal 105_1 in FIG. 1), mappedsignal 201B (mapped signal 105_2 in FIG. 1), and control signal 200(control signal 100 in FIG. 1), performs weighting synthesis (precoding)based on control signal 200, and outputs weighted signal 204A andweighted signal 204B. Here, mapped signal 201A is expressed as s1(t),mapped signal 201B is expressed as s2(t), weighted signal 204A isexpressed as z1(t), and weighted signal 204B is expressed as z2′(t).Note that one example of t is time. s1(t), s2(t), z1(t), and z2′(t) aredefined as complex numbers. Accordingly, they may be actual numbers.

Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203 performs the following calculation.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 1} \right\rbrack & \; \\{\begin{pmatrix}{z\; 1(i)} \\{z\; 2^{\prime}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}a & b \\c & d\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s\; 1(i)} \\{s\; 2(i)}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(1)}\end{matrix}$

In Equation (1), a, b, c, and d are defined as complex numbers. Notethat a, b, c, and d may be actual numbers. Note that i is a symbolnumber.

Phase changer 205B receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204Band control signal 200, applies a phase change to weighting synthesizedsignal 204B based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 206B. Note that phase-changed signal 206B is expressed as z2(t),and z2(t) is defined as a complex number. Accordingly, z2(t) may be anactual number.

Next, specific operations performed by phase changer 205B will bedescribed. In phase changer 205B, for example, a phase change of y(i) isapplied to z2′(i). Accordingly, z2(i) can be expressed asz2(i)=y(i)×z2′(i). Note that i is a symbol number and is an integer thatis greater than or equal to 0.

For example, the phase change value is set as follows. Note that N is aninteger that is greater than or equal to 2, and represents the number ofphase change cycles. When N is set to an odd number greater than orequal to 3, data reception quality may increase.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 2} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\;(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{N}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(2)}\end{matrix}$

j is an imaginary number unit. However, Equation (2) is merely anon-limiting example. Here, phase change value y(i)=e^(j×δ(i)).

Here, z1(i) and z2(i) can be expressed with the following equation.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 3} \right\rbrack & \; \\\begin{matrix}{\begin{pmatrix}{z\; 1(i)} \\{z\; 2(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & {y(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}a & b \\c & d\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s\; 1(i)} \\{s\; 2(i)}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{= {\begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & e^{j \times {\delta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}a & b \\c & d\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s\; 1(i)} \\{s\; 2(i)}\end{pmatrix}}}\end{matrix} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(3)}\end{matrix}$

Note that δ(i) is an actual number. z1(i) and z2(i) are transmitted fromthe transmission device at the same time and using the same frequency(same frequency band).

In Equation (3), the phase change value is not limited to the value usedin Equation (2); for example, a method in which the phase is changedcyclically or regularly is conceivable.

The matrix (precoding matrix) in Equation (1) and Equation (3) is asfollows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 4} \right\rbrack & \; \\{\begin{pmatrix}a & b \\c & d\end{pmatrix} = F} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(4)}\end{matrix}$

For example, using the following matrix for matrix F is conceivable.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 5} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j\; 0}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\; 0}} \\{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\; 0}} & {\beta \times e^{j\;\pi}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(5)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 6} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\; 0} & {\alpha \times e^{j\; 0}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\; 0}} & e^{j\;\pi}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(6)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 7} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j\; 0}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\;\pi}} \\{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\; 0}} & {\beta \times e^{j\; 0}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(7)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 8} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\; 0} & {\alpha \times e^{j\;\pi}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\; 0}} & e^{j\; 0}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(8)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 9} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\; 0}} & {\beta \times e^{j\;\pi}} \\{\beta \times e^{j\; 0}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\; 0}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(9)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 10} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}{\alpha \times e^{j\; 0}} & e^{j\;\pi} \\e^{j\; 0} & {\alpha \times e^{j\; 0}}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(10)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 11} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\; 0}} & {\beta \times e^{j\; 0}} \\{\beta \times e^{j\; 0}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\;\pi}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(11)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 12} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}{\alpha \times e^{j\; 0}} & e^{j\; 0} \\e^{j\; 0} & {\alpha \times e^{j\;\pi}}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(12)}\end{matrix}$

Note that in Equation (5), Equation (6), Equation (7), Equation (8),Equation (9), Equation (10), Equation (11), and Equation (12), α may bean actual number and may be an imaginary number, and β may be an actualnumber and may be an imaginary number. However, α is not 0 (zero). β isalso not 0 (zero).

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 13} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \cos\;\theta} & {\beta \times \sin\;\theta} \\{\beta \times \sin\;\theta} & {{- \beta} \times \cos\;\theta}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(13)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 14} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\cos\;\theta} & {\sin\;\theta} \\{\sin\;\theta} & {{- \cos}\;\theta}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(14)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 15} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \cos\;\theta} & {{- \beta} \times \sin\;\theta} \\{\beta \times \sin\;\theta} & {\beta \times \cos\;\theta}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(15)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 16} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\cos\;\theta} & {{- \sin}\;\theta} \\{\sin\;\theta} & {\cos\;\theta}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(16)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 17} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \sin\;\theta} & {{- \beta} \times \cos\;\theta} \\{\beta \times \cos\;\theta} & {\beta \times \sin\;\theta}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(17)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 18} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\sin\;\theta} & {{- \cos}\;\theta} \\{\cos\;\theta} & {\sin\;\theta}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(18)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 19} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \sin\;\theta} & {\beta \times \cos\;\theta} \\{\beta \times \cos\;\theta} & {{- \beta} \times \sin\;\theta}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(19)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 20} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\sin\;\theta} & {\cos\;\theta} \\{\cos\;\theta} & {{- \sin}\;\theta}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(20)}\end{matrix}$

Note that in Equation (13), Equation (15), Equation (17), and Equation(19), β may be an actual number and may be an imaginary number. However,β is not 0 (zero) (θ is an actual number).

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 21} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j\;{\theta_{11}{(i)}}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\;{({{\theta_{11}{(i)}} + \lambda})}}} \\{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\;{\theta_{21}{(i)}}}} & {\beta \times e^{j{({{\theta_{21}{(i)}} + \lambda + \pi})}}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(21)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 22} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{F(i)} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;{\theta_{11}{(i)}}} & {\alpha \times e^{j\;{({{\theta_{11}{(i)}} + \lambda})}}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\;{\theta_{21}{(i)}}}} & e^{j{({{\theta_{21}{(i)}} + \lambda + \pi})}}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(22)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 23} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\;{\theta_{21}{(i)}}}} & {\beta \times e^{j\;{({{\theta_{21}{(i)}} + \lambda + \pi})}}} \\{\beta \times e^{j\;{\theta_{11}{(i)}}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j{({{\theta_{11}{(i)}} + \lambda})}}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(23)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 24} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{F(i)} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}{\alpha \times e^{j\;{\theta_{21}{(i)}}}} & e^{j\;{({{\theta_{21}{(i)}} + \lambda + \pi})}} \\e^{j\;{\theta_{11}{(i)}}} & {\alpha \times e^{j{({{\theta_{11}{(i)}} + \lambda})}}}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(24)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 25} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j\;\theta_{11}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\;{({\theta_{11} + {\lambda{(i)}}})}}} \\{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\;\theta_{21}}} & {\beta \times e^{j\;{({\theta_{21} + {\lambda{(i)}} + \pi})}}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(25)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 26} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{F(i)} = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j\;{({\theta_{11} + {\lambda{(i)}}})}}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\;\theta_{21}}} & e^{j\;{({\theta_{21} + {\lambda{(i)}} + \pi})}}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(26)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 27} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\;\theta_{21}}} & {\beta \times e^{j\;{({\theta_{21} + {\lambda{(i)}} + \pi})}}} \\{\beta \times e^{j\;\theta_{11}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j{({\theta_{11} + {\lambda{(i)}}})}}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(27)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 28} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}{\alpha \times e^{j\;\theta_{21}}} & e^{j\;{({\theta_{21} + {\lambda{(i)}} + \pi})}} \\e^{j\;\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j{({\theta_{11} + {\lambda{(i)}}})}}}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(28)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 29} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times e^{j\;\theta_{11}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\;{({\theta_{11} + \lambda})}}} \\{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\;\theta_{21}}} & {\beta \times e^{j{({\theta_{21} + \lambda + \pi})}}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(29)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 30} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}e^{j\;\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j\;{({\theta_{11} + \lambda})}}} \\{\alpha \times e^{j\;\theta_{21}}} & e^{j\;{({\theta_{21} + \lambda + \pi})}}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(30)} \\{\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 31} \right\rbrack\;} & \; \\{F = \begin{pmatrix}{\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j\;\theta_{21}}} & {\beta \times e^{j\;{({\theta_{21} + \lambda + \pi})}}} \\{\beta \times e^{j\;\theta_{11}}} & {\beta \times \alpha \times e^{j{({\theta_{11} + \lambda})}}}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(31)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 32} \right\rbrack & \; \\{F = {\frac{1}{\sqrt{\alpha^{2} + 1}}\begin{pmatrix}{\alpha \times e^{j\;\theta_{21}}} & e^{j\;{({\theta_{21} + \lambda + \pi})}} \\e^{j\;\theta_{11}} & {\alpha \times e^{j{({\theta_{11} + \lambda})}}}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(32)}\end{matrix}$

However, θ₁₁(i), θ₂₁(i), and λ(i) are functions of symbol number i, andare actual numbers. λ is, for example, a fixed value and an actualnumber. However, λ need not be a fixed value. α may be an actual number,and, alternatively, may be an imaginary number. β may be an actualnumber, and, alternatively may be an imaginary number. However, α is not0 (zero). β is also not 0 (zero). Moreover, θ₁₁ and θ₂₁ are actualnumbers.

Moreover, in addition to these precoding matrices, each exemplaryembodiment herein can also be carried out by using the followingprecoding matrices.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 33} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & 1\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(33)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 34} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}\beta & 0 \\0 & \beta\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(34)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 35} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}1 & 0 \\0 & {- 1}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(35)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 36} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}\beta & 0 \\0 & {- \beta}\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(36)}\end{matrix}$

Note that in Equation (34) and Equation (36), β may be an actual numberand, alternatively, may be an imaginary number. However, β is not 0(zero).

Inserter 207A receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204A,pilot symbol signal pa(t)251A at time t, preamble signal 252, controlinformation symbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and based oninformation on the frame configuration included in control signal 200,outputs baseband signal 208A based on the frame configuration.

Similarly, inserter 207B receives inputs of phase-changed signal 206B,pilot symbol signal pb(t)251B at time t, preamble signal 252, controlinformation symbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and based oninformation on the frame configuration included in control signal 200,outputs baseband signal 208B based on the frame configuration.

Phase changer 209B receives inputs of baseband signal 208B and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210B. Basebandsignal 208B is a function of symbol number i, and is expressed as x′(i).Then, phase-changed signal x(i) 210B can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i). Here, i is an integer that is greater than orequal to 0, and j is an imaginary number unit.

Although it will be described later, note that the operation performedby phase changer 209B may be cyclic delay diversity (CDD) or cycle shiftdiversity (CSD) disclosed in NPTL 2 and 3. Hereinafter this will bewritten as “CDD/CSD”. Phase changer 209B then applies a phase change toa symbol present along the frequency axis. In other words, phase changer209B applies a phase change to, for example, a data symbol, a pilotsymbol, and/or a control information symbol.

FIG. 3 illustrates one example of a configuration of radio units 107_Aand 107_B illustrated in FIG. 1. Serial-parallel converter 302 receivesinputs of signal 301 and control signal 300 (control signal 100 in FIG.1), applies a serial-parallel conversion based on control signal 300,and outputs serial-parallel converted signal 303.

Inverse Fourier transform unit 304 receives inputs of serial-parallelconverted signal 303 and control signal 300, and based on control signal300, applies, as one example of an inverse Fourier transform, an inversefast Fourier transform (IFFT), and outputs inverse Fourier transformedsignal 305.

Processor 306 receives inputs of inverse Fourier transformed signal 305and control signal 300, applies processing such as frequency conversionand amplification based on control signal 300, and outputs modulatedsignal 307.

For example, when signal 301 is processed signal 106_A illustrated inFIG. 1, modulated signal 307 corresponds to transmission signal 108_A inFIG. 1. Moreover, when signal 301 is processed signal 106_B illustratedin FIG. 1, modulated signal 307 corresponds to transmission signal 108_Bin FIG. 1.

FIG. 4 illustrates a frame configuration of transmission signal 108_Aillustrated in FIG. 1. In FIG. 4, frequency (carriers) is (are)represented on the horizontal axis and time is represented on thevertical axis. Since a multi-carrier transmission scheme such as OFDM isused, symbols are present in the carrier direction. In FIG. 4, allcarrier symbols are shown. Moreover, in FIG. 4, symbols for time $1through time $11 are shown.

In FIG. 4, pilot symbols 401 (pilot signal 251A in FIG. 2), data symbols402, and other symbols 403 are shown. Here, a pilot symbol is, forexample, a phase shift keying (PSK) symbol, and is a symbol for thereception device that receives this frame to perform channel estimation(propagation path fluctuation estimation), frequency offset estimation,and phase fluctuation estimation. For example, the transmission deviceillustrated in FIG. 1 and the reception device that receives the frameillustrated in FIG. 4 may share the transmission method of the pilotsymbol.

Note that mapped signal 201A (mapped signal 105_1 in FIG. 1) is referredto as “stream #1” and mapped signal 201B (mapped signal 105_2 in FIG. 1)is referred to as “stream #2”. Note that this also applied to subsequentdescriptions.

Data symbol 402 is a symbol that corresponds to baseband signal 208Agenerated in the signal processing illustrated in FIG. 2. Accordingly,data symbol 402 satisfies “a symbol including both the symbol “stream#1” and the symbol “stream #2””, “the symbol “stream #1””, or “thesymbol “stream #2””, as determined by the configuration of the precodingmatrix used by weighting synthesizer 203.

Other symbols 403 correspond to preamble symbol 242 and controlinformation symbol signal 253 illustrated in FIG. 2. However, the othersymbols may include symbols other than a preamble or control informationsymbol. Here, a preamble may transmit data (control data), and may beconfigured as, for example, a symbol for signal detection, a signal forperforming frequency and time synchronization, or a symbol forperforming channel estimation (a symbol for performing propagation pathfluctuation estimation). The control information symbol is a symbolincluding control information for the reception device that received theframe in FIG. 4 to demodulate and decode a data symbol.

For example, all carriers from time $1 to time 4 in FIG. 4 are othersymbols 403. Then, at time $5, carrier 1 through carrier 11 are datasymbols 402. Thereafter, carrier 12 is pilot symbol 401, carrier 13through carrier 23 are data symbols 402, carrier 24 is pilot symbol 401,(subsequent recitation is omitted). At time $6, carrier 1 and carrier 2are data symbols 402, carrier 3 is pilot symbol 401, (subsequentrecitation is omitted). Recitation for time $7 through time $10 isomitted. At time $11, recitation for carrier 1 through carrier 29 isomitted, carrier 30 at time $11 is pilot symbol 401, and carrier 31through carrier 36 at time $11 are data symbols 402.

FIG. 5 illustrates a frame configuration of transmission signal 108_Billustrated in FIG. 1. In FIG. 5, frequency (carriers) is (are)represented on the horizontal axis and time is represented on thevertical axis. Since a multi-carrier transmission scheme such as OFDM isused, symbols are present in the carrier direction. In FIG. 5, allcarrier symbols are shown. Moreover, in FIG. 5, symbols for time $1through time $11 are shown.

In FIG. 5, pilot symbols 501 (pilot signal 251B in FIG. 2), data symbols502, and other symbols 503 are shown. Here, a pilot symbol is, forexample, a PSK symbol, and is a symbol for the reception device thatreceives this frame to perform channel estimation (propagation pathfluctuation estimation), frequency offset estimation, and phasefluctuation estimation. For example, the transmission device illustratedin FIG. 1 and the reception device that receives the frame illustratedin FIG. 5 may share the transmission method of the pilot symbol.

Data symbol 502 is a symbol that corresponds to baseband signal 208Bgenerated in the signal processing illustrated in FIG. 2. Accordingly,data symbol 502 satisfies “a symbol including both the symbol “stream#1” and the symbol “stream #2””, “the symbol “stream #1””, or “thesymbol “stream #2””, as determined by the configuration of the precodingmatrix used by weighting synthesizer 203.

Other symbols 503 correspond to preamble signal 252 and controlinformation symbol signal 253 illustrated in FIG. 2. However, the othersymbols may include symbols other than a preamble or control informationsymbol. Here, a preamble may transmit data (for example, control data),and may be configured as, for example, a symbol for signal detection, asignal for performing frequency and time synchronization, or a symbolfor performing channel estimation. The control information symbol is asymbol including control information for the reception device thatreceived the frame in FIG. 5 to demodulate and decode a data symbol.

For example, all carriers from time $1 to time $4 in FIG. 5 are othersymbols 403. Thereafter, at time $5, carrier 1 through carrier 11 aredata symbols 402, carrier 12 is pilot symbol 401, carrier 13 throughcarrier 23 are data symbols 402, carrier 24 is pilot symbol 401.Recitation for the remaining carriers at time $5 is omitted. At time $6,carrier 1 and carrier 2 are data symbols 402, carrier 3 is pilot symbol401, and recitation for the remaining carriers at time $6 is omitted.Recitation for time $7 through time $10 is omitted. At time $11,recitation for carrier 1 through carrier 29 is omitted, carrier 30 ispilot symbol 401, and carrier 31 through carrier 36 are data symbols402.

When a symbol is present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 4 and a symbolis present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 5, the symbol in carrier A attime $B in FIG. 4 and the symbol in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 5 aretransmitted at the same time and same frequency. Note that the frameconfiguration is not limited to the configurations illustrated in FIG. 4and FIG. 5; FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are mere examples of frame configurations.

The other symbols in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are symbols corresponding to“preamble signal 252 and control information symbol signal 253 in FIG.2”. Accordingly, when an other symbol 503 in FIG. 5 at the same time andsame frequency (same carrier) as an other symbol 403 in FIG. 4 transmitscontrol information, it transmits the same data (the same controlinformation).

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 4 and theframe of FIG. 5 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 4 or the frame of FIG. 5 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

FIG. 6 illustrates one example of components relating to controlinformation generation for generating control information symbol signal253 illustrated in FIG. 2.

Control information mapper 602 receives inputs of data 601 related tocontrol information and control signal 600, maps data 601 related tocontrol information in using a modulation scheme based on control signal600, and outputs control information mapped signal 603 Note that controlinformation mapped signal 603 corresponds to control information symbolsignal 253 in FIG. 2.

FIG. 7 illustrates one example of a configuration of antenna unit #A109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B illustrated in FIG. 1. Antenna unit #A109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B are exemplified as including a pluralityof antennas.

Splitter 702 receives an input of transmission signal 701, performssplitting, and outputs transmission signals 703_1, 703_2, 703_3, and703_4.

Multiplier 704_1 receives inputs of transmission signal 703_1 andcontrol signal 700, and based on the multiplication coefficient includedin control signal 700, multiplies a multiplication coefficient withtransmission signal 703_1, and outputs multiplied signal 705_1.Multiplied signal 705_1 is output from antenna 706_1 as radio waves.

When transmission signal 703_1 is expressed as Tx1(t) and themultiplication coefficient is expressed as W1, multiplied signal 705_1can be expressed as Tx1(t)×W1. t indicates time, W1 can be defined as acomplex number, and as such, may be an actual number.

Multiplier 704_2 receives inputs of transmission signal 703_2 andcontrol signal 700, and based on the multiplication coefficient includedin control signal 700, multiplies a multiplication coefficient withtransmission signal 703_2, and outputs multiplied signal 705_2.Multiplied signal 705_2 is output from antenna 706_2 as radio waves.

When transmission signal 703_2 is expressed as Tx2(t) and themultiplication coefficient is expressed as W2, multiplied signal 705_2can be expressed as Tx2(t)×W2. t indicates time, W2 can be defined as acomplex number, and as such, may be an actual number.

Multiplier 704_3 receives inputs of transmission signal 703_3 andcontrol signal 700, and based on the multiplication coefficient includedin control signal 700, multiplies a multiplication coefficient withtransmission signal 703_3, and outputs multiplied signal 705_3.Multiplied signal 705_3 is output from antenna 706_3 as radio waves.

When transmission signal 703_3 is expressed as Tx3(t) and themultiplication coefficient is expressed as W3, multiplied signal 705_3can be expressed as Tx3(t)×W3. W3 can be defined as a complex number,and as such, may be an actual number.

Multiplier 704_4 receives inputs of transmission signal 703_4 andcontrol signal 700, and based on the multiplication coefficient includedin control signal 700, multiplies a multiplication coefficient withtransmission signal 703_4, and outputs multiplied signal 705_4.Multiplied signal 705_4 is output from antenna 706_4 as radio waves.

When transmission signal 703_4 is expressed as Tx4(t) and themultiplication coefficient is expressed as W4, multiplied signal 705_4can be expressed as Tx4(t)×W4. W4 can be defined as a complex number,and as such, may be an actual number.

Note that “the absolute value of W1, the absolute value of W2, theabsolute value of W3, and the absolute value of W4 are equal” may betrue. In this case, this is the equivalent of phase change beingperformed. It goes without saying that the absolute value of W1, theabsolute value of W2, the absolute value of W3, and the absolute valueof W4 may be unequal.

Moreover, in FIG. 7, the antenna unit is exemplified as including fourantennas, but the number of antennas is not limited to four; the antennaunit may include two or more antennas. Note the antenna unit may includefour antenna and four multipliers.

When the configuration of antenna unit #A 109_A in FIG. 1 is asillustrated in FIG. 7, transmission signal 701 corresponds totransmission signal 108_A in FIG. 1. When the configuration of antennaunit #B 109_B in FIG. 1 is as illustrated in FIG. 7, transmission signal701 corresponds to transmission signal 108_B in FIG. 1 and transmissionsignal 108_B in FIG. 1. However, antenna unit #A 109_A and antenna unit#B 109_B need not have the configuration illustrated in FIG. 7; asstated before, the antenna unit may not receive an input of controlsignal 100.

FIG. 8 illustrates one example of a configuration of a reception devicethat receives a modulated signal upon the transmission deviceillustrated in FIG. 1 transmitting, for example, a transmission signalhaving the frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5.

Radio unit 803X receives an input of reception signal 802X received byantenna unit #X 801X, applies processing such as frequency conversionand a Fourier transform, and outputs baseband signal 804X.

Similarly, radio unit 803Y receives an input of reception signal 802Yreceived by antenna unit #Y 801Y, applies processing such as frequencyconversion and a Fourier transform, and outputs baseband signal 804Y.

Note that FIG. 8 illustrates a configuration in which antenna unit #X801X and antenna unit #Y 801Y receive control signal 810 as an input,but antenna unit #X 801X and antenna unit #Y 801Y may be configured tonot receive an input of control signal 810. Operations performed whencontrol signal 810 is present as an input will be described in detaillater.

FIG. 9 illustrates the relationship between the transmission device andthe reception device. Antennas 901_1 and 901_2 in FIG. 9 aretransmitting antennas, and antenna 901_1 in FIG. 9 corresponds toantenna unit #A 109_A in FIG. 1. Antenna 901_2 in FIG. 9 corresponds toantenna unit #B 109_B in FIG. 1.

Antennas 902_1 and 902_2 in FIG. 9 are receiving antennas, and antenna902_1 in FIG. 9 corresponds to antenna unit #X 801X in FIG. 8. Antenna902_2 in FIG. 9 corresponds to antenna unit #Y 801Y in FIG. 8.

As illustrated in FIG. 9, the signal transmitted from transmittingantenna 901_1 is u1(i), the signal transmitted from transmitting antenna901_2 is u2(i), the signal received by receiving antenna 902_1 is r1(i),and the signal received by receiving antenna 902_2 is r2(i). Note that iis a symbol number, and, for example, is an integer that is greater thanor equal to 0.

The propagation coefficient from transmitting antenna 901_1 to receivingantenna 902_1 is h11(i), the propagation coefficient from transmittingantenna 901_1 to receiving antenna 902_2 is h21(i), the propagationcoefficient from transmitting antenna 901_2 to receiving antenna 902_1is h12(i), and the propagation coefficient from transmitting antenna901_2 to receiving antenna 902_2 is h22(i). In this case, the followingrelation equation holds true.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 37} \right\rbrack & \; \\{\begin{pmatrix}{r\; 1(i)} \\{r\; 2(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {{\begin{pmatrix}{h\; 11(i)} & {h\; 12(i)} \\{h\; 21(i)} & {h\; 22(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{u\; 1(i)} \\{u\; 2(i)}\end{pmatrix}} + \begin{pmatrix}{n\; 1(i)} \\{n\; 2(i)}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(37)}\end{matrix}$

Note that n1(i) and n2(i) are noise.

Channel estimation unit 805_1 of modulated signal u1 in FIG. 8 receivesan input of baseband signal 804X, and using the preamble and/or pilotsymbol illustrated in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5, performs channel estimation onmodulated signal u1, that is to say, estimates h11(i) in Equation (37),and outputs channel estimated signal 806_1.

Channel estimation unit 805_2 of modulated signal u2 receives an inputof baseband signal 804X, and using the preamble and/or pilot symbolillustrated in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5, performs channel estimation onmodulated signal u2, that is to say, estimates h12(i) in Equation (37),and outputs channel estimated signal 806_2.

Channel estimation unit 807_1 of modulated signal u1 receives an inputof baseband signal 804Y, and using the preamble and/or pilot symbolillustrated in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5, performs channel estimation onmodulated signal u1, that is to say, estimates h21(i) in Equation (37),and outputs channel estimated signal 808_1.

Channel estimation unit 807_2 of modulated signal u2 receives an inputof baseband signal 804Y, and using the preamble and/or pilot symbolillustrated in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5, performs channel estimation onmodulated signal u2, that is to say, estimates h22(i) in Equation (37),and outputs channel estimated signal 808_2.

Control information decoder 809 receives inputs of baseband signals 804Xand 804Y, demodulates and decodes control information including “othersymbols” in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5, and outputs control signal 810 includingcontrol information.

Signal processor 811 receives inputs of channel estimated signals 806_1,806_2, 808_1, and 808_2, baseband signals 804X and 804Y, and controlsignal 810, performs demodulation and decoding using the relationship inEquation (37) or based on control information (for example, informationon a modulation scheme or a scheme relating to the error correctioncode) in control signal 810, and outputs reception data 812.

Note that control signal 810 need not be generated via the methodillustrated in FIG. 8. For example, control signal 810 in FIG. 8 may begenerated based on information transmitted by a device that is thecommunication partner (FIG. 1) in FIG. 8, and, alternatively, the devicein FIG. 8 may include an input unit, and control signal 810 may begenerated based on information input from the input unit.

FIG. 10 illustrates one example of a configuration of antenna unit #X801X and antenna unit #Y 801Y illustrated in FIG. 8. Antenna unit #X801X and antenna unit #Y 801Y are exemplified as including a pluralityof antennas.

Multiplier 1003_1 receives inputs of reception signal 1002_1 received byantenna 1001_1 and control signal 1000, and based on information on amultiplication coefficient included in control signal 1000, multipliesreception signal 1002_1 with the multiplication coefficient, and outputsmultiplied signal 1004_1.

When reception signal 1002_1 is expressed as Rx1(t) and themultiplication coefficient is expressed as D1, multiplied signal 1004_1can be expressed as Rx1(t)×D1. t indicates time, D1 can be defined as acomplex number, and as such, may be an actual number.

Multiplier 1003_2 receives inputs of reception signal 1002_2 received byantenna 1001_2 and control signal 1000, and based on information on amultiplication coefficient included in control signal 1000, multipliesreception signal 1002_2 with the multiplication coefficient, and outputsmultiplied signal 1004_2.

When reception signal 1002_2 is expressed as Rx2(t) and themultiplication coefficient is expressed as D2, multiplied signal 1004_2can be expressed as Rx2(t)×D2. D2 can be defined as a complex number,and as such, may be an actual number.

Multiplier 1003_3 receives inputs of reception signal 1002_3 received byantenna 1001_3 and control signal 1000, and based on information on amultiplication coefficient included in control signal 1000, multipliesreception signal 1002_3 with the multiplication coefficient, and outputsmultiplied signal 1004_3.

When reception signal 1002_3 is expressed as Rx3(t) and themultiplication coefficient is expressed as D3, multiplied signal 1004_3can be expressed as Rx3(t)×D3. D3 can be defined as a complex number,and as such, may be an actual number.

Multiplier 1003_4 receives inputs of reception signal 1002_4 received byantenna 1001_4 and control signal 1000, and based on information on amultiplication coefficient included in control signal 1000, multipliesreception signal 1002_4 with the multiplication coefficient, and outputsmultiplied signal 1004_4.

When reception signal 1002_4 is expressed as Rx4(t) and themultiplication coefficient is expressed as D4, multiplied signal 1004_4can be expressed as Rx4(t)×D4. D4 can be defined as a complex number,and as such, may be an actual number.

Synthesizer 1005 receives inputs of multiplied signals 1004_1, 1004_2,1004_3, and 1004_4, synthesizes multiplied signals 1004_1, 1004_2,1004_3, and 1004_4, and outputs synthesized signal 1006. Note thatsynthesized signal 1006 is expressed asRx1(t)×D1+Rx2(t)×D2+Rx3(t)×D3+Rx4(t)×D4.

In FIG. 10, the antenna unit is exemplified as including four antennas,but the number of antennas is not limited to four; the antenna unit mayinclude two or more antennas. Note the antenna unit may include fourantenna and four multipliers.

When the configuration of antenna unit #X 801X in FIG. 8 is asillustrated in FIG. 10, reception signal 802X corresponds to synthesizedsignal 1006 in FIG. 10, and control signal 710 corresponds to controlsignal 1000 in FIG. 10. When the configuration of antenna unit #Y 801Yin FIG. 8 is as illustrated in FIG. 10, reception signal 802Ycorresponds to synthesized signal 1006 in FIG. 10, and control signal710 corresponds to control signal 1000 in FIG. 10. However, antenna unit#X 801X and antenna unit #Y 801Y need not have the configurationillustrated in FIG. 10; as stated before, the antenna unit may notreceive an input of control signal 710.

Note that control signal 800 may be generated based on informationtransmitted by a device that is the communication partner, and,alternatively, the device may include an input unit, and control signal800 may be generated based on information input from the input unit.

Next, signal processor 106 in the transmission device illustrated inFIG. 1 is inserted as phase changer 205B and phase changer 209B, asillustrated in FIG. 2. The characteristics and advantageous effects ofthis configuration will be described.

As described with reference to FIG. 4 and FIG. 5, phase changer 205Bapplies precoding (weighted synthesis) to mapped signal s1(i) 201Aobtained via mapping using the first sequence and mapped signal s2(i)201B obtained via mapping using the second sequence, and applies a phasechange to one of the obtained weighting synthesized signals 204A and204B. Note that i is a symbol number and is an integer that is greaterthan or equal to 0.

Weighting synthesized signal 204A and phase-changed signal 206B are thentransmitted at the same frequency and at the same time. Accordingly, inFIG. 4 and FIG. 5, a phase change is applied to data symbol 502 in FIG.5.

In the case of FIG. 2, since phase changer 205B applies this toweighting synthesized signal 204B, a phase change is applied to datasymbol 502 in FIG. 5. When a phase change is applied to weightingsynthesized signal 204A, a phase change is applied to data symbol 402 inFIG. 4. This will be described later.

For example, FIG. 11 illustrates an extraction of carrier 1 throughcarrier 5 and time $4 through time $6 from the frame illustrated in FIG.5. Note that in FIG. 11, similar to FIG. 5, pilot symbol 501, datasymbols 502, and other symbols 503 are shown.

As described above, among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11, phasechanger 205B applies a phase change to the data symbols located at(carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5),(carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6).

Accordingly, the phase change values for the data symbols illustrated inFIG. 11 can be expressed as “e^(i×δ15(i)”) for (carrier 1, time $5),“e^(j×δ25(i))” for (carrier 2, time $5), “e^(j×δ(i))” for (carrier 3,time $5), “e^(j×δ45(i))” for (carrier 4, time $5), “e^(j×δ55(i))” for(carrier 5, time $5), “e^(j×δ16(i))” for (carrier 1, time $6),“e^(j×δ26(i))” for (carrier 2, time $6), “e^(j×δ46(i))” for (carrier 4,time $6), and “e^(j×δ56(i))” for (carrier 5, time $6).

Among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11, the other symbols located at(carrier 1, time $4), (carrier 2, time $4), (carrier 3, time $4),(carrier 4, time $4), and (carrier 5, time $4), and the pilot symbollocated at (carrier 3, time $6) are not subject to phase change by phasechanger 205B.

This point is a characteristic of phase changer 205B. Note that, asillustrated in FIG. 4, data carriers are arranged at “the same carriersand the same times” as the symbols subject to phase change in FIG. 11,which are the data symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2,time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time$5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6),and (carrier 5, time $6).

In other words, in FIG. 4, the symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5),(carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5),(carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6),(carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6) are data symbols.

In other words, data symbols that perform MIMO transmission are subjectto phase change by phase changer 205B. “MIMO transmission” meanstransmission of a plurality of streams.

One example of the phase change that phase changer 205B applies to thedata symbols is the method given in Equation (2) in which phase changeis applied to the data symbols regularly, such as at each cycle N.However, the method of applying the phase change to the data symbols isnot limited to this example.

With this, when the environment is one in which the direct waves aredominant, such as in an LOS environment, it is possible to achieveimproved data reception quality in the reception device with respect tothe data symbols that perform MIMO transmission. Next, the advantageouseffects of this will be described.

For example, the modulation scheme used by mapper 104 in FIG. 1 isquadrature phase shift keying (QPSK). Mapped signal 201A in FIG. 2 is aQPSK signal, and mapped signal 201B is a QPSK signal. In other words,two QPSK streams are transmitted. Accordingly, for example, usingchannel estimated signals 806_1 and 806_2, 16 candidate signal pointsare obtained by signal processor 811 illustrated in FIG. 8. 2-bittransmission is possible with QPSK. Accordingly, since there are twostreams, 4-bit transmission is achieved. Thus, there are 2⁴=16 candidatesignal points. Note that 16 other candidate signal points are obtainedfrom using channel estimated signals 808_1 and 808_2 as well, but sincedescription thereof is the same as described above, the followingdescription will focus on the 16 candidate signal points obtained byusing channel estimated signals 806_1 and 806_2.

FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B each illustrate an example of the state resultingfrom such a case. In FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B, in-phase I is represented onthe horizontal axis and orthogonal Q is represented on the verticalaxis. 16 candidate signal points are present in the illustrated in-phaseI-orthogonal Q planes. Among the 16 candidate signal points, one is asignal point that is transmitted by the transmission device. This is whythese are referred to as “16 candidate signal points”.

When the environment is one in which the direct waves are dominant, suchas in an LOS environment, a first conceivable case is “when phasechanger 205B is omitted from the configuration illustrated in FIG. 2, inother words, when phase change is not applied by phase changer 205B inFIG. 2”.

In the first case, since phase change is not applied, there is apossibility that the state illustrated in FIG. 12A will be realized.When the state falls into the state illustrated in FIG. 12A, asillustrated by “signal points 1201, 1202”, “signal points 1203, 1204,1205, 1206”, and “signal points 1207, 1208”, the signal points becomedense, that is to say, the distances between some signal points shorten.Accordingly, in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8, datareception quality may decrease.

In order to remedy this phenomenon, in FIG. 2, phase changer 205B isinserted. When phase changer 205B is inserted, due to symbol number i,there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal points are dense, such asin FIG. 12A, and symbol numbers whose “distance between signal points islong”, such as in FIG. 12B. With respect to this state, since errorcorrection code is introduced, high error correction performance isachieved, and in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8, high datareception quality is achieved.

Note that in FIG. 2, a phase change is not applied by phase changer 205Bin FIG. 2 to “pilot symbols, preamble” for demodulating (wave detectionof) data symbols, such as pilot symbols and a preamble, and for channelestimation. With this, among data symbols, “due to symbol number i,there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal points are dense, such asin FIG. 12A, and symbol numbers whose “distance between signal points islong”, such as in FIG. 12B” can be realized.

However, even if a phase change is applied by phase changer 205B in FIG.2 to “pilot symbols, preamble” for demodulating (wave detection of) datasymbols, such as pilot symbols and a preamble, and for channelestimation, the following is possible: “among data symbols, “due tosymbol number i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal pointsare dense, such as in FIG. 12A, and symbol numbers whose “distancebetween signal points is long”, such as in FIG. 12B“can be realized.”

In such a case, a phase change is applied to pilot symbols and/or apreamble under some condition. For example, one conceivable method is toimplement a rule which is separate from the rule for applying a phasechange to a data symbol, and “applying a phase change to a pilot symboland/or a preamble”. Another example is a method of regularly applying aphase change to a data symbol in a cycle N, and regularly applying aphase change to a pilot symbol and/or a preamble in a cycle M. N and Mare integers that are greater than or equal to 2.

As described above, phase changer 209B receives inputs of basebandsignal 208B and control signal 200, applies a phase change to basebandsignal 208B based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 210B. Baseband signal 208B is a function of symbol number i, andis expressed as x′(i). Then, phase-changed signal 210B (x(i)) can beexpressed as x(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i). Here, i is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0, and j is an imaginary number unit.

Note that the operation performed by phase changer 209B may be CDD/CSDdisclosed in NPTL 2 and 3. One characteristic of phase changer 209B isthat it applies a phase change to a symbol present along the frequencyaxis (i.e., applies a phase change to, for example, a data symbol, apilot symbol, and/or a control information symbol).

Accordingly, in such a case, symbols subject to symbol number i includedata symbols, pilot symbols, control information symbols, and preambles(other symbols).

In the case of FIG. 2, since phase changer 209B applies a phase changeto baseband signal 208B, a phase change is applied to each symbol inFIG. 5. When a phase change is applied to baseband signal 208A in FIG.2, a phase change is applied to each symbol in FIG. 4. This will bedescribed later.

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 5, phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 2 applies a phase change to all symbols (othersymbols 503) for all carriers at time $1.

Similarly, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 2 applies a phasechange to the following symbols: “all symbols (other symbols 503) forall carriers at time $2”, “all symbols (other symbols 503) for allcarriers at time $3”, “all symbols (other symbols 503) for all carriersat time $4”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) forall carriers at time $5”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or datasymbols 502) for all carriers at time $6”, “all symbols (pilot symbols501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers at time $7”, “all symbols(pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers at time $8”,“all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers attime $9”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for allcarriers at time $10”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols502) for all carriers at time $11”. Recitation for other subsequenttimes and carriers is omitted.

FIG. 13 illustrates a frame configuration different from the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 4 of transmission signal 108_Aillustrated in FIG. 1. In FIG. 13, objects that operate the same as inFIG. 4 share like reference marks. In FIG. 13, frequency (carriers) is(are) represented on the horizontal axis and time is represented on thevertical axis. Similar to FIG. 4, since a multi-carrier transmissionscheme such as OFDM is used, symbols are present in the carrierdirection. Similar to FIG. 4, in FIG. 13 as well, all carrier symbolsare shown. Moreover, similar to FIG. 4, in FIG. 13 as well, symbols fortime $1 through time $11 are shown.

In FIG. 13, in addition to pilot symbols 401 (pilot signal 251A in FIG.2), data symbols 402, and other symbols 403, null symbols 1301 are alsoshown.

Null symbol 1301 has an in-phase component I of zero (0) and anorthogonal component Q of zero (0). Note that this symbol is referred toas a “null symbol” here, but this symbol may be referred to as somethingelse.

In FIG. 13, null symbols are inserted in carrier 19. Note that themethod in which the null symbols are inserted is not limited to theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 13. For example, a null symbol may beinserted at some certain time, a null symbol may be inserted at somecertain frequency and time region, a null symbol may be insertedcontinuously at a time and frequency region, and a null symbol may beinserted discretely at a time and frequency region.

FIG. 14 illustrates a frame configuration different from the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 5 of transmission signal 108_Billustrated in FIG. 1. In FIG. 14, objects that operate the same as inFIG. 5 share like reference marks. In FIG. 14, frequency (carriers) is(are) represented on the horizontal axis and time is represented on thevertical axis. Similar to FIG. 5, since a multi-carrier transmissionscheme such as OFDM is used, symbols are present in the carrierdirection. Similar to FIG. 5, in FIG. 14 as well, all carrier symbolsare shown. Moreover, similar to FIG. 5, in FIG. 14 as well, symbols fortime $1 through time $11 are shown.

In FIG. 14, in addition to pilot symbols 501 (pilot signal 251B in FIG.2), data symbols 502, and other symbols 503, null symbols 1301 are alsoshown.

Null symbol 1301 has an in-phase component I of zero (0) and anorthogonal component Q of zero (0). Note that this symbol is referred toas a “null symbol” here, but this symbol may be referred to as somethingelse.

In FIG. 14, null symbols are inserted in carrier 19. Note that themethod in which the null symbols are inserted is not limited to theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 14. For example, a null symbol may beinserted at some certain time, a null symbol may be inserted at somecertain frequency and time region, a null symbol may be insertedcontinuously at a time and frequency region, and a null symbol may beinserted discretely at a time and frequency region.

When a symbol is present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 13 and a symbolis present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 14, the symbol in carrier Aat time $B in FIG. 13 and the symbol in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 14are transmitted at the same time and same frequency. Note that the frameconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are merely examples.

The other symbols in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are symbols corresponding to“preamble signal 252 and control information symbol signal 253 in FIG.2”. Accordingly, when an other symbol 403 in FIG. 13 at the same timeand same frequency (same carrier) as an other symbol 503 in FIG. 14transmits control information, it transmits the same data (the samecontrol information).

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 13 and theframe of FIG. 14 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 13 or the frame of FIG. 14 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

Phase changer 209B receives inputs of baseband signal 208B and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210B. Basebandsignal 208B is a function of symbol symbol number i, and is expressed asx′(i). Then, phase-changed signal 210B (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i). Here, i is an integer that is greater than orequal to 0, and j is an imaginary number unit. Note that the operationperformed by phase changer 209B may be CDD or CSD disclosed in NPTL 2and 3.

Phase changer 209B then applies a phase change to a symbol present alongthe frequency axis. In other words, phase changer 209B applies a phasechange to, for example, a data symbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a controlinformation symbol. Here, a null symbol may be considered as a targetfor application of a phase change. Accordingly, symbols subject tosymbol number i include, for example, data symbols, pilot symbols,control information symbols, preambles (other symbols), and nullsymbols.

However, since the in-phase component I is zero (0) and the orthogonalcomponent Q is zero (0), even if a phase change is applied to a nullsymbol, the signals before and after the phase change are the same.Accordingly, it is possible to construe a null symbol as not a targetfor a phase change. In the case of FIG. 2, since phase changer 209Bapplies a phase change to baseband signal 208B, a phase change isapplied to each symbol in FIG. 14. When a phase change is applied tobaseband signal 208A in FIG. 2, a phase change is applied to each symbolin FIG. 13. This will be described later.

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 14, phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 2 applies a phase change to all symbols (othersymbols 503) for all carriers at time $1. However, the handling of thephase change with respect to null symbol 1301 is as previouslydescribed.

Similarly, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 2 applies a phasechange to the following symbols: “all symbols (other symbols 503) forall carriers at time $2”, “all symbols (other symbols 503) for allcarriers at time $3”, “all symbols (other symbols 503) for all carriersat time $4”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) forall carriers at time $5”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or datasymbols 502) for all carriers at time $6”, “all symbols (pilot symbols501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers at time $7”, “all symbols(pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers at time $8”,“all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers attime $9”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for allcarriers at time $10”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols502) for all carriers at time $11”. However, the handling of the phasechange with respect to null symbols 1301 is as previously described.Subsequent recitation is omitted.

The phase change value of phase changer 209B is expressed as Ω(i).Baseband signal 208B is x′(i) and phase-changed signal 210B is x(i).Accordingly, x(i)=Ω(i)×x′(i) holds true.

For example, the phase change value is set as follows. Q is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 2, and represents the number of phasechange cycles.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 38} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{\Omega(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{Q}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(38)}\end{matrix}$j is an imaginary number unit. However, Equation (38) is merely anon-limiting example.

For example, Ω(i) may be set so as to implement a phase change thatyields a cycle Q.

Moreover, for example, in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14, the same phase changevalue is applied to the same carriers, and the phase change value may beset on a per carrier basis. For example, the following may beimplemented.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as follows for carrier1 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14.[MATH. 39]e ^(j×0×π)  Equation (39)

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as follows for carrier2 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 40} \right\rbrack & \; \\e^{j\frac{1 \times \pi}{6}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(40)}\end{matrix}$

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as follows for carrier3 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 41} \right\rbrack & \; \\e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi}{6}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(41)}\end{matrix}$

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as follows for carrier4 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 42} \right\rbrack & \; \\e^{j\frac{3 \times \pi}{6}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(42)}\end{matrix}$Subsequent recitation is omitted.

This concludes the operational example of phase changer 209B illustratedin FIG. 2.

Next, the advantageous effects obtained by phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 2 will be described.

The other symbols 403, 503 in “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5” or “theframes of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14” may include a control information symbol.As previously described, when an other symbol 503 in FIG. 5 at the sametime and same frequency (in the same carrier) as an other symbol 403transmits control information, it transmits the same data (same controlinformation).

However, the following circumstance is conceivable.

Case 2: transmitting a control information symbol using either antennaunit #A 109_A or antenna unit #B 109_B illustrated in FIG. 1.

When transmission according to “case 2” is performed, since only oneantenna is used to transmit the control information symbol, compared towhen “transmitting a control information symbol using both antenna unit#A 109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B” is performed, spatial diversity gainis less. Accordingly, in “case 2”, data reception quality decreases evenwhen received by the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8.Accordingly, from the perspective of improving data reception quality“transmitting a control information symbol using both antenna unit #A109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B” is more beneficial.

Case 3: transmitting a control information symbol using both antennaunit #A 109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B illustrated in FIG. 1. However,phase change by is not performed by phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 2.

When transmission according to “case 3” is performed, since themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #A 109_A and themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #B 109_B are the same orexhibit a specific phase shift, depending on the radio wave propagationenvironment, the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 may receive aninferior reception signal, and both modulated signal may be subjected tothe same multipath effect. Accordingly, in the reception deviceillustrated in FIG. 8, data reception quality decreases.

In order to remedy this phenomenon, in FIG. 2, phase changer 209B isinserted. Since this changes the phase along the time or frequency axis,in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8, it is possible to reducethe probability of reception of an inferior reception signal. Moreover,since there is a high probability that there will be a difference in themultipath effect that the modulated signal transmitted from antenna unit#A 109_A is subjected to with respect to the multipath effect that themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #B 109_B is subjected to,there is a high probability that diversity gain will result, andaccordingly, that data reception quality in the reception deviceillustrated in FIG. 8 will improve.

For these reasons, in FIG. 2, phase changer 209B is provided and phasechange is implemented.

Other symbols 403 and other symbols 503 include, in addition to controlinformation symbols, for example, symbols for signal detection, symbolsfor performing frequency and time synchronization, and symbols forperforming channel estimation (a symbol for performing propagation pathfluctuation estimation), for demodulating and decoding controlinformation symbols. Moreover, “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5” or “theframes of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14” include pilot symbols 401, 501, and byusing these, it is possible to perform demodulation and decoding withhigh precision via control information symbols.

Moreover, “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5” or “the frames of FIG. 13and FIG. 14” transmit a plurality of streams at the same time and usingthe same frequency (frequency band) via data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502, that is to say, perform MIMO transmission. In order todemodulate these data symbols, symbols for signal detection, symbols forfrequency and time synchronization, and symbols for channel estimation,which are included in other symbols 403 and other symbols 503, are used.

Here, “symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequency and timesynchronization, and symbols for channel estimation, which are includedin other symbols 403 and other symbols 503” are applied with a phasechange by phase changer 209B, as described above.

Under these circumstances, when this processing is not performed on datasymbols 402 and data symbols 502 (and data symbols 502 in the exampleabove), in the reception device, when data symbols 402 and data symbols502 are demodulated and decoded, there is a need to perform thedemodulation and decoding in which the processing for the phase changeby phase changer 209B was performed, and there is a probability thatthis processing will be complicated. This is because “symbols for signaldetection, symbols for frequency and time synchronization, and symbolsfor channel estimation, which are included in other symbols 403 andother symbols 503” are applied with a phase change by phase changer209B.

However, as illustrated in FIG. 2, in phase changer 209B, when a phasechange is applied to data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 (and datasymbols 502 in the example above), in the reception device, there is theadvantage that data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 can simply bedemodulated and decoded using the channel estimation signal (propagationpath fluctuation signal) estimated by using “symbols for signaldetection, symbols for frequency and time synchronization, and symbolsfor channel estimation, which are included in other symbols 403 andother symbols 503”.

Additionally as illustrated in FIG. 2, in phase changer 209B, when aphase change is applied to data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 (anddata symbols 502 in the example above), in multipath environments, it ispossible to reduce the influence of sharp drops in electric fieldintensity along the frequency axis. Accordingly, it is possible toobtain the advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality of data symbols 402 and data symbols 502.

In this way, the point that “symbols that are targets for implementationof a phase change by phase changer 205B” and “symbols that are targetsfor implementation of a phase change by phase changer 209B” aredifferent is a characteristic point.

As described above, by applying a phase change using phase changer 205Billustrated in FIG. 2, it is possible to achieve the advantageous effectof an improvement in data reception quality of data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502 in the reception device in, for example, LOS environments,and by applying a phase change using phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 2, for example, it is possible to achieve the advantageous effectof an improvement in data reception quality in the reception device ofthe control information symbols included in “the frames of FIG. 4 andFIG. 5” or “the frames of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14” and the advantageouseffect that operations of demodulation and decoding of data symbols 402and data symbols 502 become simple.

Note that the advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality in the reception device of data symbols 402 and data symbols 502in, for example, LOS environments, is achieved as a result of the phasechange implemented by phase changer 205B illustrated in FIG. 2, andfurthermore, the reception quality of data symbols 402 and data symbols502 is improved by applying a phase change to data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502 using phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 2.

Note that FIG. 2 illustrates an example of a configuration in whichphase changer 209B is arranged after inserter 207B and phase changer209B applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B, but a configurationfor achieving both the above-described advantageous effects of the phasechange by phase changer 205B and the phase change by phase changer 209Bis not limited to the example illustrated in FIG. 2.

One example of an acceptable variation is one in which phase changer209B is removed from the configuration illustrated in FIG. 2, basebandsignal 208B output from inserter 207B becomes processed signal 106_B,phase changer 209A that performs the same operations as phase changer209B is inserted after inserter 207A, and phase-changed signal 210A,which is generated by phase changer 209A implementing a phase change onbaseband signal 208A, becomes processed signal 106_A.

Even with such a configuration, similar to the example illustrated inFIG. 2 and described above, the advantageous effect of an improvement indata reception quality in the reception device of data symbols 402 anddata symbols 502 in, for example, LOS environments, is achieved as aresult of the phase change implemented by phase changer 205B illustratedin FIG. 2, and furthermore, the reception quality of data symbols 402and data symbols 502 is improved by applying a phase change to datasymbols 402 and data symbols 502 using phase changer 209A.

Furthermore, it is possible to achieve the advantageous effect of animprovement in data reception quality in the reception device of thecontrol information symbols included in “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG.5” or “the frames of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14”.

(Supplemental Information 1)

In, for example, Embodiment 1, it is described that the operationperformed by “phase changer B” may be CDD/CSD disclosed in NPTL 2 and 3.Next, supplemental information regarding this point will be given.

FIG. 15 illustrates a configuration in the case that CDD/CSD is used.Modulated signal 1501 is a signal when no cyclic delay is implemented,and is expressed as X[n].

Cyclic delayer 1502_1 receives an input of modulated signal 1501,applies a cyclic delay, and outputs a cyclic-delayed signal 1503_1. Whencyclic-delayed signal 1503_1 is expressed as X1[n], X1[n] is appliedwith the following equation.[MATH. 43]X1[n]=X[(n−δ1)mod N]  Equation (43)

Note that δ1 is the cyclic delay amount (61 is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0), and X[n] is configured as N symbols (N isan integer that is greater than or equal to 2). Accordingly, n is aninteger that is greater than or equal to 0 and less than or equal toN−1. Moreover, “mod” represents “modulo”, and “A mod B” means “remainderwhen A is divided by B”.

. . .

Cyclic delayer 1502_M receives an input of modulated signal 1501,applies a cyclic delay, and outputs a cyclic-delayed signal 1503_M. Whencyclic-delayed signal 1503_M is expressed as XM[n], XM[n] is appliedwith the following equation.[MATH. 44]XM[n]=X[(n−δM)mod N]  Equation (44)

Note that δM is the cyclic delay amount (δM is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0), and X[n] is configured as N symbols (N isan integer that is greater than or equal to 2). Accordingly, n is aninteger that is greater than or equal to 0 and less than or equal toN−1.

Cyclic delayer 1502_i receives an input of modulated signal 1501,applies a cyclic delay, and outputs a cyclic-delayed signal 1503_i. Whencyclic-delayed signal 1503_i is expressed as Xi[n], Xi[n] is appliedwith the following equation. Note that i is an integer that is greaterthan or equal to 1 and less than or equal to M, and M is an integer thatis greater than or equal to 1.[MATH. 45]Xi[n]=X[(n−δi)mod N]  Equation (45)

Note that δi is the cyclic delay amount (δi is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0), and X[n] is configured as N symbols (N isan integer that is greater than or equal to 2). Accordingly, n is aninteger that is greater than or equal to 0 and less than or equal toN−1.

Cyclic-delayed signal 1503_i is transmitted from antenna i. Accordingly,cyclic-delayed signal 1503_1, . . . , and cyclic-delayed signal 1503_Mare each transmitted from different antennas. Note that in the abovedescription, the signals are exemplified as discrete signals, but thesame processing may be performed on continuous signals.

This makes it possible to achieve the diversity effect via cyclic delay,and, for example, reduce the adverse effects of delayed radio waves, andin the reception device, achieve an advantageous effect of improved datareception quality.

For example, phase changer 209B in FIG. 2 may be replaced with thecyclic delayer illustrated in FIG. 15, and may perform the sameoperations performed by phase changer 209B.

Accordingly, in phase changer 209B in FIG. 2, the cyclic delay amount δ(δ is an integer that is greater than or equal to 0) is applied, and theinput signal for phase changer 209B is expressed as Y[n]. When theoutput signal for phase changer 209B is expressed as Z[n], Z[n] isapplied with the following equation.[MATH. 46]Z[n]=Y[(n−δ)mod N]  Equation (46)

Note that Y[n] is configured as N symbols (N is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 2). Accordingly, n is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0 and less than or equal to N−1.

Next, the relationship between cyclic delay amount and phase change willbe described.

For example, consider a case in which CDD/CSD is applied to OFDM. Notethat the carrier arrangement when OFDM is used is as illustrated in FIG.16.

In FIG. 16, 1601 is a symbol, frequency (carriers) is (are) representedon the horizontal axis, with increasing frequency from left to right andcarriers arranged in ascending order. Accordingly, the carrier of thelowest frequency is “carrier 1”, and subsequent carriers are “carrier2”, “carrier 3”, “carrier 4”, . . . .

For example, in phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 2, a cyclic delayamount τ is applied. In such as case, phase change value Ω[i] in“carrier i” is expressed as follows.[MATH. 47]Ω[i]=e ^(j×μ×i)  Equation (47)

Note that μ is a value capable of being calculated from cyclic delayamount and/or the size of the fast Fourier transform (FFT).

When the baseband signal for “carrier i”, time t before being appliedwith a phase change (before cyclic delay processing) is expressed asv′[i][t], the signal v[i][t] for “carrier i”, time t after being appliedwith a phase change can be expressed as v[i][t]=Ω[i]×v′[i][t].

(Supplemental Information 2)

As a matter of course, the present disclosure may be carried out bycombining a plurality of the exemplary embodiments and other contentsdescribed herein.

Moreover, each exemplary embodiment and the other contents are onlyexamples. For example, while “a modulation scheme, an error correctionencoding method (an error correction code, a code length, an encode rateand the like to be used), control information and the like” areexemplified, it is possible to carry out the present disclosure with thesame configuration even when other types of “a modulation scheme, anerror correction encoding method (an error correction code, a codelength, an encode rate and the like to be used), control information andthe like” are applied.

Regarding the modulation scheme, even when a modulation scheme otherthan the modulation schemes described herein is used, it is possible tocarry out the embodiments and the other subject matter described herein.For example, amplitude phase shift keying (APSK) (such as 16APSK,64APSK, 128APSK, 256APSK, 1024APSK and 4096APSK), pulse amplitudemodulation (PAM) (such as 4PAM, 8PAM, 16PAM, 64PAM, 128PAM, 256PAM,1024PAM and 4096PAM), phase shift keying (PSK) (such as BPSK, QPSK,8PSK, 16PSK, 64PSK, 128PSK, 256PSK, 1024PSK and 4096PSK), and quadratureamplitude modulation (QAM) (such as 4QAM, 8QAM, 16QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM,256QAM, 1024QAM and 4096QAM) may be applied, or in each modulationscheme, uniform mapping or non-uniform mapping may be performed.

Moreover, a method for arranging 2, 4, 8, 16, 64, 128, 256, 1024, etc.,signal points on an I-Q plane (a modulation scheme having 2, 4, 8, 16,64, 128, 256, 1024, etc., signal points) is not limited to a signalpoint arrangement method of the modulation schemes described herein.Hence, a function of outputting an in-phase component and an orthogonalcomponent based on a plurality of bits is a function in a mapper, andperforming precoding and phase-change thereafter is one effectivefunction of the present disclosure.

In the present disclosure, when “∀” and/or “∃” is present, “∀”represents a universal quantifier, and “∃” represents an existentialquantifier.

Moreover, in the present disclosure, when there is a complex plane, thephase unit such as an argument is “radian”.

When the complex plane is used, display in a polar form can be made asdisplay by polar coordinates of a complex number. When point (a, b) onthe complex plane is associated with complex number z=a+jb (a and b areboth actual numbers, and j is a unit of an imaginary number), and whenthis point is expressed by [r, θ] in polar coordinates, a=r×cos θ andb=r×sin θ,[MATH. 48]r=√{square root over (a ² +b ²)}  Equation (48)holds true, r is an absolute value of z (r=|z|), and θ is an argument.Then, z=a+jb is expressed by r×e^(jθ).

In the present disclosure, the reception device and the antennas in theterminal may be configured as separate devices. For example, thereception device includes an interface that receives an input, via acable, of a signal received by an antenna or a signal generated byapplying a signal received by an antenna with a frequency conversion,and the reception device performs subsequent processing.

Moreover, data/information obtained by the reception device issubsequently converted into a video or audio, and a display (monitor)displays the video or a speaker outputs the audio. Further, thedata/information obtained by the reception device may be subjected tosignal processing related to a video or audio, and may be output from anRCA terminal (a video terminal or an audio terminal), a Universal SerialBus (USB), or a High-Definition Multimedia Interface (registeredtrademark) (HDMI) of the reception device. Note that the advantageouseffects according the present disclosure can still be produced even ifsignal processing related to a video or audio is not performed.

In the present disclosure, it can be considered that the apparatus whichincludes the transmission device is a communications and broadcastapparatus, such as a broadcast station, a base station, an access point,a terminal or a mobile phone. In such a case, it can be considered thatthe apparatus that includes the reception device is a communicationapparatus such as a television, a radio, a terminal, a personalcomputer, a mobile phone, an access point, or a base station. Moreover,it can also be considered that the transmission device and receptiondevice according to the present disclosure are each a device havingcommunication functions that is formed so as to be connectable via someinterface to an apparatus for executing an application in, for example,a television, a radio, a personal computer or a mobile phone.

Moreover, in this embodiment, symbols other than data symbols, such aspilot symbols (preamble, unique word, post-amble, reference symbol,etc.) or symbols for control information, may be arranged in any way ina frame. Here, the terms “pilot symbol” and “control information” areused, but the naming of such symbols is not important; the functionsthat they perform are.

A pilot symbol may be a known symbol that is modulated using PSKmodulation in a transceiver, and the receiver detects, for example,frequency synchronization, time synchronization, and a channelestimation (Channel State Information (CSI)) symbol (of each modulatedsignal) by using the symbol. Note that a pilot symbol transmitted by atransmitter can be known by a receiver by the receiver beingsynchronous.

Moreover, the symbol for control information is a symbol fortransmitting information required to be transmitted to a communicationpartner in order to establish communication pertaining to anything otherthan data (such as application data). This information is, for example,the modulation scheme, error correction encoding method, or encode rateof the error correction encoding method used in the communication, orsettings information in an upper layer.

Note that the present disclosure is not limited to each exemplaryembodiment, and can be carried out with various modifications. Forexample, in each embodiment, the present disclosure is described asbeing performed as a communications device. However, the presentdisclosure is not limited to this case, and this communications methodcan also be used as software.

Moreover, in the above description, precoding switching methods in amethod for transmitting two modulated signals from two antennas aredescribed, but these examples are not limiting. A precoding switchingmethod in which precoding weight (precoding matrix) is changed similarlyin a method in which precoding is performed on four mapped signals togenerate four modulated signals and transmitted from four antennas, thatis to say a method in which precoding is performed on N mapped signalsto generate N modulated signals and transmitted from N antennas, canalso be applied.

The terms “precoding” and “precoding weight” are used in the writtendescription. The terms used to refer to such signal processing are notimportant per-se; the signal processing itself is what is important tothe present disclosure.

Streams s1(t) and s2(t) may transmit different data, and may transmitthe same data.

The transmitting antenna in the transmission device, the receivingantenna in the reception device, and each signal antenna illustrated inthe drawings may be configured of a plurality of antennas.

The transmission device notifies the reception device of thetransmission method (MIMO, SISO, temporal-spatial block code,interleaving method), modulation scheme, and/or error correctionencoding method; this information is present in the frame transmitted bythe transmission device. The reception device changes operations uponreceiving this information.

Note that a program for executing the above-described communicationsmethod may be stored in Read Only Memory (ROM) in advance to cause aCentral Processing Unit (CPU) to operate this program.

Moreover, the program for executing the communications method may bestored in a computer-readable storage medium, the program stored in therecording medium may be recorded in Random Access Memory (RAM) in acomputer, and the computer may be caused to operate according to thisprogram.

Each configuration of each of the above-described embodiments, etc., maybe realized as a large scale integration (LSI) circuit, which istypically an integrated circuit. These integrated circuits may be formedas separate chips, or may be formed as one chip so as to include theentire configuration or part of the configuration of each embodiment.

LSI is described here, but the integrated circuit may also be referredto as an integrated circuit (IC), a system LSI circuit, a super LSIcircuit or an ultra LSI circuit depending on the degree of integration.Moreover, the circuit integration technique is not limited to LSI, andmay be realized by a dedicated circuit or a general purpose processor.After manufacturing of the LSI circuit, a programmable fieldprogrammable gate array (FPGA) or a reconfigurable processor which isreconfigurable in connection or settings of circuit cells inside the LSIcircuit may be used.

Further, when development of a semiconductor technology or anotherderived technology provides a circuit integration technology whichreplaces LSI, as a matter of course, functional blocks may be integratedby using this technology. Adaption of biotechnology, for example, is apossibility.

The present disclosure can be widely applied to radio systems thattransmit different modulated signals from different antennas. Moreover,the present disclosure can also be applied when MIMO transmission isused in a wired communications system including a plurality oftransmission points (for example, a power line communication (PLC)system, an optical transmission system, a digital subscriber line (DSL)system).

Embodiment 2

In this embodiment, an implementation method will be described that isdifferent from the configuration illustrated in FIG. 2 and described inEmbodiment 1.

FIG. 1 illustrates one example of a configuration of a transmissiondevice according to this embodiment, such as a base station, accesspoint, or broadcast station. As FIG. 1 is described in detail inEmbodiment 1, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

Signal processor 106 receives inputs of mapped signals 105_1 and 105_2,signal group 110, and control signal 100, performs signal processingbased on control signal 100, and outputs processed signals 106_A and106_B. Here, processed signal 106_A is expressed as u1(i), and processedsignal 106_B is expressed as u2(i). i is a symbol number, and, forexample, is an integer that is greater than or equal to 0. Note thatdetails regarding the signal processing will be described with referenceto FIG. 18 later.

FIG. 18 illustrates one example of a configuration of signal processor106 illustrated in FIG. 1. Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203 receivesinputs of mapped signal 201A (mapped signal 105_1 in FIG. 1), mappedsignal 201B (mapped signal 105_2 in FIG. 1), and control signal 200(control signal 100 in FIG. 1), performs weighting synthesis (precoding)based on control signal 200, and outputs weighted signal 204A andweighted signal 204B. Here, mapped signal 201A is expressed as s1(t),mapped signal 201B is expressed as s2(t), weighted signal 204A isexpressed as z1(t), and weighted signal 204B is expressed as z2′(t).Note that one example of t is time. s1(t), s2(t), z1(t), and z2′(t) aredefined as complex numbers, and as such, may be actual numbers.

Here, these are given as functions of time, but may be functions of a“frequency (carrier number)”, and may be functions of “time andfrequency”. These may also be a function of a “symbol number”. Note thatthis also applies to Embodiment 1.

Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203 performs the calculations indicatedin Equation (1).

Phase changer 205B receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204Band control signal 200, applies a phase change to weighting synthesizedsignal 204B based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 206B. Note that phase-changed signal 206B is expressed as z2(t).z2(t) is defined as a complex number and may be an actual number.

Next, specific operations performed by phase changer 205B will bedescribed. In phase changer 205B, for example, a phase change of y(i) isapplied to z2′(i). Accordingly, z2(i) can be expressed asz2(i)=y(i)×z2′(i). Note that i is a symbol number and is an integer thatis greater than or equal to 0.

For example, the phase change value is set as indicated in Equation (2).Note that N is an integer that is greater than or equal to 2, andrepresents the number of phase change cycles. When N is set to an oddnumber greater than or equal to 3, data reception quality may increase.However, Equation (2) is merely a non-limiting example. Here, phasechange value y(i)=e^(j×δ(i)).

Here, z1(i) and z2(i) can be expressed with Equation (3). Note that δ(i)is an actual number. z1(i) and z2(i) are transmitted from thetransmission device at the same time and using the same frequency (samefrequency band). In Equation (3), the phase change value is not limitedto the value used in Equation (2); for example, a method in which thephase is changed cyclically or regularly is conceivable.

As described in Embodiment 1, conceivable examples of the (precoding)matrix inserted in Equation (1) and Equation (3) are illustrated inEquation (5) through Equation (36). However, the precoding matrix is notlimited to these examples. The same applies to Embodiment 1.

Inserter 207A receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204A,pilot symbol signal pa(t)251A preamble signal 252, control informationsymbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and based on information onthe frame configuration included in control signal 200, outputs basebandsignal 208A based on the frame configuration. Note that t indicatestime.

Similarly, inserter 207B receives inputs of phase-changed signal 206B,pilot symbol signal pb(t)251B, preamble signal 252, control informationsymbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and based on information onthe frame configuration included in control signal 200, outputs basebandsignal 208B based on the frame configuration.

Phase changer 209A receives inputs of baseband signal 208A and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208A based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210A. Basebandsignal 208A is a function of symbol number i, and is expressed as x′(i).Then, phase-changed signal 210A (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i). Here, i is an integer that is greater than orequal to 0, and j is an imaginary number unit.

Note that the operation performed by phase changer 209A may be CDD/CSDdisclosed in NPTL 2 and 3, as described in Embodiment 1. Phase changer209A then applies a phase change to a symbol present along the frequencyaxis. In other words, phase changer 209A applies a phase change to, forexample, a data symbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a control informationsymbol.

FIG. 3 illustrates one example of a configuration of radio units 107_Aand 107_B illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 4 illustrates a frameconfiguration of transmission signal 108_A illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 5illustrates a frame configuration of transmission signal 108_Billustrated in FIG. 1. Description of these is given in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

When a symbol is present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 4 and a symbolis present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 5, the symbol in carrier A attime $B in FIG. 4 and the symbol in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 5 aretransmitted at the same time and same frequency. Note that the frameconfiguration is not limited to the configurations illustrated in FIG. 4and FIG. 5; FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are mere examples of frame configurations.

The other symbols in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are symbols corresponding to“preamble signal 252 and control information symbol signal 253 in FIG.2”. Accordingly, when an other symbol 503 in FIG. 5 at the same time andsame frequency (same carrier) as an other symbol 403 in FIG. 4 transmitscontrol information, it transmits the same data (the same controlinformation).

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 4 and theframe of FIG. 5 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 4 or the frame of FIG. 5 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

FIG. 6 illustrates one example of components relating to controlinformation generation for generating control information symbol signal253 illustrated in FIG. 2. FIG. 6 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 7 illustrates one example of a configuration of antenna unit #A109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 7illustrates an example in which antenna unit #A 109_A and antenna unit#B 109_B include a plurality of antennas. FIG. 7 is described inEmbodiment 1. Accordingly, description will be omitted from thisembodiment.

FIG. 8 illustrates one example of a configuration of a reception devicethat receives a modulated signal upon the transmission deviceillustrated in FIG. 1 transmitting, for example, a transmission signalhaving the frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5. FIG. 8is described in Embodiment 1. Accordingly, description will be omittedfrom this embodiment.

FIG. 10 illustrates one example of a configuration of antenna unit #X801X and antenna unit #Y 801Y illustrated in FIG. 8. FIG. 10 illustratesan example in which antenna unit #X 801X and antenna unit #Y 801Yinclude a plurality of antennas. FIG. 10 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

Next, signal processor 106 in the transmission device illustrated inFIG. 1 is inserted as phase changer 205B and phase changer 209A, asillustrated in FIG. 18. The characteristics and advantageous effects ofthis configuration will be described.

As described with reference to FIG. 4 and FIG. 5, phase changer 205Bapplies precoding (weighted synthesis) to mapped signal s1(i) 201Aobtained via mapping using the first sequence and mapped signal s2(i)201B obtained via mapping using the second sequence, and applies a phasechange to one of the obtained weighting synthesized signals 204A and204B. Note that i is a symbol number and is an integer that is greaterthan or equal to 0.

Weighting synthesized signal 204A and phase-changed signal 206B are thentransmitted at the same frequency and at the same time. Accordingly inFIG. 4 and FIG. 5, a phase change is applied to data symbol 502 in FIG.5. In the case of FIG. 18, since phase changer 205 applies this toweighting synthesized signal 204B, a phase change is applied to datasymbol 502 in FIG. 5. When a phase change is applied to weightingsynthesized signal 204A, a phase change is applied to data symbol 402 inFIG. 4. This will be described later.

For example, FIG. 11 illustrates an extraction of carrier 1 throughcarrier 5 and time $4 through time $6 from the frame illustrated in FIG.5. Note that in FIG. 11, similar to FIG. 5, pilot symbol 501, datasymbols 502, and other symbols 503 are shown.

As described above, among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11, phasechanger 205B applies a phase change to the data symbols located at(carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5),(carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6).

Accordingly, the phase change values for the data symbols illustrated inFIG. 11 can be expressed as “e^(j×δ15(i))” for (carrier 1, time $5),“e^(j×δ25(i))” for (carrier 2, time $5), “e^(j×δ35(i))” for (carrier 3,time $5), “e^(j×δ45(i))” for (carrier 4, time $5), “e^(j×δ55(i))”(carrier 5, time $5), “e^(j×δ16(i))” for (carrier 1, time $6),“e^(j×δ26(i))” for (carrier 2, time $6), “e^(j×δ46(i))” for (carrier 4,time $6), and “e^(j×δ56(i))” for (carrier 5, time $6).

Among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11, the other symbols located at(carrier 1, time $4), (carrier 2, time $4), (carrier 3, time $4),(carrier 4, time $4), and (carrier 5, time $4), and the pilot symbollocated at (carrier 3, time $6) are not subject to phase change by phasechanger 205B.

This point is a characteristic of phase changer 205B. Note that, asillustrated in FIG. 4, data carriers are arranged at “the same carriersand the same times” as the symbols subject to phase change in FIG. 11,which are the data symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2,time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time$5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6),and (carrier 5, time $6).

In other words, in FIG. 4, the symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5),(carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5),(carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6),(carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6) are data symbols.

In other words, data symbols that perform MIMO transmission, that is tosay, transmit a plurality of streams, are subject to phase change byphase changer 205B.

One example of the phase change that phase changer 205B applies to thedata symbols is the method given in Equation (2) in which phase changeis applied to the data symbols regularly, such as at each cycle N.However, the method of applying the phase change to the data symbols isnot limited to this example.

With this, when the environment is one in which the direct waves aredominant, such as in an LOS environment, it is possible to achieve anadvantageous effect of improved data reception quality in the receptiondevice with respect to the data symbols that perform MIMO transmission,that is to say, that transmit a plurality of streams. Next, theadvantageous effects of this will be described.

For example, the modulation scheme used by mapper 104 in FIG. 1 is QPSK.Mapped signal 201A in FIG. 18 is a QPSK signal, and mapped signal 201Bis a QPSK signal. In other words, two QPSK streams are transmitted.

Accordingly, for example, using channel estimated signals 806_1 and806_2, 16 candidate signal points are obtained by signal processor 811illustrated in FIG. 8. 2-bit transmission is possible with QPSK.Accordingly, since there are two streams, 4-bit transmission isachieved. Thus, there are 2⁴=16 candidate signal points. Note that 16other candidate signal points are obtained from using channel estimatedsignals 808_1 and 808_2 as well, but since description thereof is thesame as described above, the following description will focus on the 16candidate signal points obtained by using channel estimated signals806_1 and 806_2.

FIG. 12 illustrates an example of the state resulting from such a case.In FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B, in-phase I is represented on the horizontalaxis and orthogonal Q is represented on the vertical axis. 16 candidatesignal points are present in the illustrated in-phase I-orthogonal Qplanes. Among the 16 candidate signal points, one is a signal point thatis transmitted by the transmission device. This is why these arereferred to as “16 candidate signal points”.

When the environment is one in which the direct waves are dominant, suchas in an LOS environment, a first conceivable case is “when phasechanger 205B is omitted from the configuration illustrated in FIG. 18,in other words, when phase change is not applied by phase changer 205Bin FIG. 18”.

In the first case, since phase change is not applied, there is apossibility that the state illustrated in FIG. 12A will be realized.When the state falls into the state illustrated in FIG. 12A, asillustrated by “signal points 1201 and 1202”, “signal points 1203, 1204,1205, and 1206”, and “signal points 1207, 1208”, the signal pointsbecome dense, that is to say, the distances between some signal pointsshorten. Accordingly, in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8,data reception quality may decrease.

In order to remedy this phenomenon, in FIG. 18, phase changer 205B isinserted. When phase changer 205B is inserted, due to symbol number i,there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal points are dense, such asin FIG. 12A, and symbol numbers whose “distance between signal points islong”, such as in FIG. 12B. With respect to this state, since errorcorrection code is introduced, high error correction performance isachieved, and in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8, high datareception quality is achieved.

Note that in FIG. 18, a phase change is not applied by phase changer205B in FIG. 18 to “pilot symbols, preamble” for demodulating (wavedetection of) data symbols, such as pilot symbols and a preamble, andfor channel estimation. With this, among data symbols, “due to symbolnumber i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal points aredense, such as in FIG. 12A, and symbol numbers whose “distance betweensignal points is long”, such as in FIG. 12B” can be realized.

However, even if a phase change is applied by phase changer 205B in FIG.18 to “pilot symbols, preamble” for demodulating (wave detection of)data symbols, such as pilot symbols and a preamble, and for channelestimation, the following is possible: “among data symbols, “due tosymbol number i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal pointsare dense, such as in FIG. 12A, and symbol numbers whose “distancebetween signal points is long”, such as in FIG. 12B“can be realized.”

In such a case, a phase change must be applied to pilot symbols and/or apreamble under some condition. For example, one conceivable method is toimplement a rule which is separate from the rule for applying a phasechange to a data symbol, and “applying a phase change to a pilot symboland/or a preamble”. Another example is a method of regularly applying aphase change to a data symbol in a cycle N, and regularly applying aphase change to a pilot symbol and/or a preamble in a cycle M. N and Mare integers that are greater than or equal to 2.

As described above, phase changer 209A receives inputs of basebandsignal 208A and control signal 200, applies a phase change to basebandsignal 208A based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 210A. Baseband signal 208A is a function of symbol number i, andis expressed as x′(i). Then, phase-changed signal 210A (x(i)) can beexpressed as x(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i). Here, i is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0, and j is an imaginary number unit.

Note that the operation performed by phase changer 209A may be CDD/CSDdisclosed in NPTL 2 and 3. Phase changer 209A then applies a phasechange to a symbol present along the frequency axis. In other words,phase changer 209A applies a phase change to, for example, a datasymbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a control information symbol.Accordingly, in such a case, symbols subject to symbol number i includedata symbols, pilot symbols, control information symbols, and preambles(other symbols).

In the case of FIG. 18, since phase changer 209A applies a phase changeto baseband signal 208A, a phase change is applied to each symbol inFIG. 4.

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 4, phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 18 applies a phase change to all symbols (othersymbols 403) for all carriers at time $1.

Similarly, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 18 applies a phasechange to the following symbols: “all symbols (other symbols 403) forall carriers at time $2”, “all symbols (other symbols 403) for allcarriers at time $3”, “all symbols (other symbols 403) for all carriersat time $4”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) forall carriers at time $5”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or datasymbols 402) for all carriers at time $6”, “all symbols (pilot symbols401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers at time $7”, “all symbols(pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers at time $8”,“all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers attime $9”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for allcarriers at time $10”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols402) for all carriers at time $11”. Subsequent recitation is omitted.

FIG. 13 illustrates a frame configuration different from the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 4 of transmission signal 108_Aillustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 13 is described in Embodiment 1. Accordinglydescription will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 14 illustrates a frame configuration different from the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 5 of transmission signal 108_Billustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 14 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

When a symbol is present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 13 and a symbolis present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 14, the symbol in carrier Aat time $B in FIG. 13 and the symbol in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 14are transmitted at the same time and same frequency. Note that the frameconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are merely examples.

The other symbols in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are symbols corresponding to“preamble signal 252 and control information symbol signal 253 in FIG.18”. Accordingly, when an other symbol 403 in FIG. 13 at the same timeand same frequency (same carrier) as an other symbol 503 in FIG. 14transmits control information, it transmits the same data (the samecontrol information).

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 13 and theframe of FIG. 14 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 13 or the frame of FIG. 14 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

Phase changer 209A receives inputs of baseband signal 208A and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208A based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210A. Basebandsignal 208A is a function of symbol symbol number i, and is expressed asx′(i). Note that i is an integer that is greater than or equal to 0.

Then, phase-changed signal 210A (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e>e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i) (j is an imaginary number unit). Note that theoperation performed by phase changer 209A may be CDD/CSD disclosed inNPTL 2 and 3. Phase changer 209A then applies a phase change to a symbolpresent along the frequency axis. In other words, phase changer 209Aapplies a phase change to, for example, a data symbol, a pilot symbol,and/or a control information symbol.

Here, a null symbol may be considered as a target for application of aphase change. Accordingly, symbols subject to symbol number i include,for example, data symbols, pilot symbols, control information symbols,preambles (other symbols), and null symbols.

However, since the in-phase component I is zero (0) and the orthogonalcomponent Q is zero (0), even if a phase change is applied to a nullsymbol, the signals before and after the phase change are the same.Accordingly, it is possible to construe a null symbol as not a targetfor a phase change. In the case of FIG. 18, since phase changer 209Aapplies a phase change to baseband signal 208A, a phase change isapplied to each symbol in FIG. 13.

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 13, phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 18 applies a phase change to all symbols (othersymbols 403) for all carriers at time $1. However, the handling of thephase change with respect to null symbol 1301 is as previouslydescribed.

Similarly, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 18 applies a phasechange to the following symbols: “all symbols (other symbols 403) forall carriers at time $2”, “all symbols (other symbols 403) for allcarriers at time $3”, “all symbols (other symbols 403) for all carriersat time $4”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) forall carriers at time $5”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or datasymbols 402) for all carriers at time $6”, “all symbols (pilot symbols401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers at time $7”, “all symbols(pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers at time $8”,“all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers attime $9”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for allcarriers at time $10”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols402) for all carriers at time $11”. Recitation for subsequent times isomitted.

However, the handling of the phase change with respect to null symbol1301 is as previously described. Recitation for other times and carriersis omitted.

The phase change value of phase changer 209A is expressed as Ω(i).Baseband signal 208A is x′(i) and phase-changed signal 210A is x(i).Accordingly, x(i)=Ω(i)×x′(i) holds true.

For example, the phase change value is set as in Equation (38). Q is aninteger that is greater than or equal to 2, and represents the number ofphase change cycles. j is an imaginary number unit. However, Equation(38) is merely a non-limiting example.

For example, Ω(i) may be set so as to implement a phase change thatyields a cycle Q.

Moreover, for example, in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13, the same phase changevalue is applied to the same carriers, and the phase change value may beset on a per carrier basis. For example, the following may beimplemented.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (39)for carrier 1 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (40)for carrier 2 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (41)for carrier 3 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (42)for carrier 4 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13. Recitation for data carriers midwayis omitted.

This concludes the operational example of phase changer 209A illustratedin FIG. 18.

Next, the advantageous effects obtained by phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 18 will be described.

The other symbols 403, 503 in “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5” or “theframes of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14” may include a control information symbol.As previously described, when an other symbol 503 in FIG. 5 at the sametime and same frequency (in the same carrier) as an other symbol 403transmits control information, it transmits the same data (same controlinformation).

As case 2, “transmitting a control information symbol using eitherantenna unit #A 109_A or antenna unit #B 109_B illustrated in FIG. 1” isconceivable.

When transmission according to “case 2” is performed, since only oneantenna is used to transmit the control information symbol, compared towhen “transmitting a control information symbol using both antenna unit#A 109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B” is performed, spatial diversity gainis less. Accordingly, in “case 2”, data reception quality decreases evenwhen received by the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8.Accordingly, from the perspective of improving data reception quality,“transmitting a control information symbol using both antenna unit #A109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B” is more beneficial.

As case 3, “transmitting a control information symbol using both antennaunit #A 109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B illustrated in FIG. 1. However,phase change is not implemented by phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 18” is conceivable.

When transmission according to “case 3” is performed, since themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #A 109_A and themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #B 109_B are the same orexhibit a specific phase shift, depending on the radio wave propagationenvironment, the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 may receive aninferior reception signal, and both modulated signal may be subjected tothe same multipath effect. Accordingly, in the reception deviceillustrated in FIG. 8, data reception quality decreases.

In order to remedy this phenomenon, in FIG. 18, phase changer 209A isinserted. Since this changes the phase along the time or frequency axis,in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8, it is possible to reducethe probability of reception of an inferior reception signal. Moreover,since there is a high probability that there will be a difference in themultipath effect that the modulated signal transmitted from antenna unit#A 109_A is subjected to with respect to the multipath effect that themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #B 109_B is subjected to,there is a high probability that diversity gain will result, andaccordingly, that data reception quality in the reception deviceillustrated in FIG. 8 will improve.

For these reasons, in FIG. 18, phase changer 209A is provided and phasechange is implemented.

Other symbols 403 and other symbols 503 include, in addition to controlinformation symbols, for example, symbols for signal detection, symbolsfor performing frequency and time synchronization, and symbols forperforming channel estimation (a symbol for performing propagation pathfluctuation estimation), for demodulating and decoding controlinformation symbols. Moreover, “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5” or “theframes of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14” include pilot symbols 401, 501, and byusing these, it is possible to perform demodulation and decoding withhigh precision via control information symbols.

Moreover, “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5” or “the frames of FIG. 13and FIG. 14” transmit a plurality of streams at the same time and usingthe same frequency (frequency band) via data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502, that is to say, perform MIMO transmission. In order todemodulate these data symbols, symbols for signal detection, symbols forfrequency and time synchronization, and symbols for channel estimation,which are included in other symbols 403 and other symbols 503, are used.

Here, “symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequency and timesynchronization, and symbols for channel estimation, which are includedin other symbols 403 and other symbols 503” are applied with a phasechange by phase changer 209A, as described above.

Under these circumstances, when this processing is not performed on datasymbols 402 and data symbols 502 (and data symbols 402 in the exampleabove), in the reception device, when data symbols 402 and data symbols502 are demodulated and decoded, there is a need to perform thedemodulation and decoding in which the processing for the phase changeby phase changer 209A was performed, and there is a probability thatthis processing will be complicated.

This is because “symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequency andtime synchronization, and symbols for channel estimation, which areincluded in other symbols 403 and other symbols 503” are applied with aphase change by phase changer 209A.

However, as illustrated in FIG. 18, in phase changer 209A, when a phasechange is applied to data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 (and datasymbols 402 in the example above), in the reception device, there is theadvantage that data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 can simply bedemodulated and decoded using the channel estimation signal (propagationpath fluctuation signal) estimated by using “symbols for signaldetection, symbols for frequency and time synchronization, and symbolsfor channel estimation, which are included in other symbols 403 andother symbols 503”.

Additionally as illustrated in FIG. 18, in phase changer 209A, when aphase change is applied to data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 (anddata symbols 402 in the example above), in multipath environments, it ispossible to reduce the influence of sharp drops in electric fieldintensity along the frequency axis. Accordingly, it is possible toobtain the advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality of data symbols 402 and data symbols 502.

In this way, the point that “symbols that are targets for implementationof a phase change by phase changer 205B” and “symbols that are targetsfor implementation of a phase change by phase changer 209A” aredifferent is a characteristic point.

As described above, by applying a phase change using phase changer 205Billustrated in FIG. 18, it is possible to achieve the advantageouseffect of an improvement in data reception quality of data symbols 402and data symbols 502 in the reception device in, for example, LOSenvironments, and by applying a phase change using phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 18, for example, it is possible to achieve theadvantageous effect of an improvement in data reception quality in thereception device of the control information symbols included in “theframes of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5” or “the frames of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14” andthe advantageous effect that operations of demodulation and decoding ofdata symbols 402 and data symbols 502 become simple.

Note that the advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality in the reception device of data symbols 402 and data symbols 502in, for example, LOS environments, is achieved as a result of the phasechange implemented by phase changer 205B illustrated in FIG. 18, andfurthermore, the reception quality of data symbols 402 and data symbols502 is improved by applying a phase change to data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502 using phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 18.

Note that Q in Equation (38) may be an integer of −2 or less. In such acase, the value for the phase change cycle is the absolute value of Q.This feature is applicable to other embodiments as well.

Embodiment 3

In this embodiment, an implementation method will be described that isdifferent from the configuration illustrated in FIG. 2 and described inEmbodiment 1.

FIG. 1 illustrates one example of a configuration of a transmissiondevice according to this embodiment, such as a base station, accesspoint, or broadcast station. As FIG. 1 is described in detail inEmbodiment 1, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

Signal processor 106 receives inputs of mapped signals 105_1 and 105_2,signal group 110, and control signal 100, performs signal processingbased on control signal 100, and outputs processed signals 106_A and106_B. Here, processed signal 106_A is expressed as u1(i), and processedsignal 106_B is expressed as u2(i). i is a symbol number, and, forexample, is an integer that is greater than or equal to 0. Note thatdetails regarding the signal processing will be described with referenceto FIG. 19 later.

FIG. 19 illustrates one example of a configuration of signal processor106 illustrated in FIG. 1. Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203 receivesinputs of mapped signal 201A (mapped signal 105_1 in FIG. 1), mappedsignal 201B (mapped signal 105_2 in FIG. 1), and control signal 200(control signal 100 in FIG. 1), performs weighting synthesis (precoding)based on control signal 200, and outputs weighted signal 204A andweighted signal 204B.

Here, mapped signal 201A is expressed as s1(t), mapped signal 201B isexpressed as s2(t), weighted signal 204A is expressed as z1(t), andweighted signal 204B is expressed as z2′(t). Note that one example of tis time. s1(t), s2(t), z1(t), and z2′(t) are defined as complex numbers,and as such, may be actual numbers.

Here, these are given as functions of time, but may be functions of a“frequency (carrier number)”, and may be functions of “time andfrequency”. These may also be a function of a “symbol number”. Note thatthis also applies to Embodiment 1.

Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203 performs the calculations indicatedin Equation (1).

Phase changer 205B receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204Band control signal 200, applies a phase change to weighting synthesizedsignal 204B based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 206B. Note that phase-changed signal 206B is expressed as z2(t).z2(t) is defined as a complex number and may be an actual number.

Next, specific operations performed by phase changer 205B will bedescribed. In phase changer 205B, for example, a phase change of y(i) isapplied to z2′(i). Accordingly, z2(i) can be expressed asz2(i)=y(i)×z2′(i). Note that i is a symbol number and is an integer thatis greater than or equal to 0.

For example, the phase change value is set as indicated in Equation (2).Note that N is an integer that is greater than or equal to 2, andrepresents the number of phase change cycles. When N is set to an oddnumber greater than or equal to 3, data reception quality may increase.However, Equation (2) is merely a non-limiting example. Here, phasechange value y(i)=e^(j×δ(i)).

Here, z1(i) and z2(i) can be expressed with Equation (3). Note that δ(i)is an actual number. z1(i) and z2(i) are transmitted from thetransmission device at the same time and using the same frequency (samefrequency band). In Equation (3), the phase change value is not limitedto the value used in Equation (2); for example, a method in which thephase is changed cyclically or regularly is conceivable.

As described in Embodiment 1, conceivable examples of the (precoding)matrix inserted in Equation (1) and Equation (3) are illustrated inEquation (5) through Equation (36). However, the precoding matrix is notlimited to these examples. The same applies to Embodiment 1.

Inserter 207A receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204A,pilot symbol signal pa(t)251A, preamble signal 252, control informationsymbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and based on information onthe frame configuration included in control signal 200, outputs basebandsignal 208A based on the frame configuration. Note that t indicatestime.

Similarly, inserter 207B receives inputs of phase-changed signal 206B,pilot symbol signal pb(t)251B, preamble signal 252, control informationsymbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and based on information onthe frame configuration included in control signal 200, outputs basebandsignal 208B based on the frame configuration.

Phase changer 209A receives inputs of baseband signal 208A and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208A based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210A. Basebandsignal 208A is a function of symbol number i, and is expressed as x′(i).Then, phase-changed signal 210A (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i). Here, i is an integer that is greater than orequal to 0, and j is an imaginary number unit.

Note that the operation performed by phase changer 209A may be CDD/CSDdisclosed in NPTL 2 and 3, as described in Embodiment 1. Phase changer209A then applies a phase change to a symbol present along the frequencyaxis. In other words, phase changer 209A applies a phase change to, forexample, a data symbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a control informationsymbol.

Phase changer 209B receives inputs of baseband signal 208B and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210B. Basebandsignal 208B is a function of symbol number i, and is expressed as y′(i).Then, phase-changed signal 210B (y(i)) is expressed asy(i)=e^(j×τ(i))×y′(i). Here, i is an integer that is greater than orequal to 0, and j is an imaginary number unit.

Note that the operation performed by phase changer 209B may be CDD/CSDdisclosed in NPTL 2 and 3, as described in Embodiment 1. Phase changer209B then applies a phase change to a symbol present along the frequencyaxis. In other words, phase changer 209B applies a phase change to, forexample, a data symbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a control informationsymbol.

The characteristic feature here is that the phase changing method viaε(i) and the phase changing method via τ(i) are different. Anothercharacteristic feature is that the CDD/CSD cyclic delay amount value setin phase changer 209A and the CDD/CSD cyclic delay amount value set inphase changer 209B are different.

FIG. 3 illustrates one example of a configuration of radio units 107_Aand 107_B illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 3 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment

FIG. 4 illustrates a frame configuration of transmission signal 108_Aillustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 4 is described in Embodiment 1. Accordingly,description will be omitted from this embodiment

FIG. 5 illustrates a frame configuration of transmission signal 108_Billustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 5 is described in Embodiment 1. Accordingly,description will be omitted from this embodiment

When a symbol is present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 4 and a symbolis present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 5, the symbol in carrier A attime $B in FIG. 4 and the symbol in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 5 aretransmitted at the same time and same frequency. Note that the frameconfiguration is not limited to the configurations illustrated in FIG. 4and FIG. 5; FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are mere examples of frame configurations.

The other symbols in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are symbols corresponding to“preamble signal 252 and control information symbol signal 253 in FIG.2”. Accordingly, when an other symbol 503 in FIG. 5 at the same time andsame frequency (same carrier) as an other symbol 403 in FIG. 4 transmitscontrol information, it transmits the same data (the same controlinformation).

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 4 and theframe of FIG. 5 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 4 or the frame of FIG. 5 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

FIG. 6 illustrates one example of components relating to controlinformation generation for generating control information symbol signal253 illustrated in FIG. 2. FIG. 6 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 7 illustrates one example of a configuration of antenna unit #A109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B illustrated in FIG. 1. In this example,antenna unit #A 109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B include a plurality ofantennas. FIG. 7 is described in Embodiment 1. Accordingly, descriptionwill be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 8 illustrates one example of a configuration of a reception devicethat receives a modulated signal upon the transmission deviceillustrated in FIG. 1 transmitting, for example, a transmission signalhaving the frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5. FIG. 8is described in Embodiment 1. Accordingly, description will be omittedfrom this embodiment.

FIG. 10 illustrates one example of a configuration of antenna unit #X801X and antenna unit #Y 801Y illustrated in FIG. 8. In FIG. 10, antennaunit #X 801X and antenna unit #Y 801Y are exemplified as including aplurality of antennas. FIG. 10 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

Next, signal processor 106 in the transmission device illustrated inFIG. 1 is inserted as phase changer 205B and phase changers 209A and209B, as illustrated in FIG. 19. The characteristics and advantageouseffects of this configuration will be described.

As described with reference to FIG. 4 and FIG. 5, phase changer 205Bapplies precoding (weighted synthesis) to mapped signal s1(i) 201Aobtained via mapping using the first sequence and mapped signal s2(i)201B obtained via mapping using the second sequence, and applies a phasechange to one of the obtained weighting synthesized signals 204A and204B. Note that i is a symbol number and is an integer that is greaterthan or equal to 0.

Weighting synthesized signal 204A and phase-changed signal 206B are thentransmitted at the same frequency and at the same time. Accordingly, inFIG. 4 and FIG. 5, a phase change is applied to data symbol 502 in FIG.5. In the case of FIG. 19, since phase changer 205 applies this toweighting synthesized signal 204B, a phase change is applied to datasymbol 502 in FIG. 5. When a phase change is applied to weightingsynthesized signal 204A, a phase change is applied to data symbol 402 inFIG. 4. This will be described later.

For example, FIG. 11 illustrates an extraction of carrier 1 throughcarrier 5 and time $4 through time $6 from the frame illustrated in FIG.5. Note that in FIG. 11, similar to FIG. 5, pilot symbol 501, datasymbols 502, and other symbols 503 are shown.

As described above, among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11, phasechanger 205B applies a phase change to the data symbols located at(carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5),(carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6).

Accordingly, the phase change values for the data symbols illustrated inFIG. 11 can be expressed as “e^(j×δ15(i))” for (carrier 1, time $5),“e^(j×δ25(i))” for (carrier 2, time $5), “e^(j×δ35(i))” for (carrier 3,time $5), “e^(j×δ45(i))” for (carrier 4, time $5), “e^(j×δ55(i))”(carrier 5, time $5), “e^(j×δ16(i))” for (carrier 1, time $6),“e^(j×δ26(i))” for (carrier 2, time $6), “e^(j×δ46(i))” for (carrier 4,time $6), and “e^(j×δ56(i))” for (carrier 5, time $6).

Among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11, the other symbols located at(carrier 1, time $4), (carrier 2, time $4), (carrier 3, time $4),(carrier 4, time $4), and (carrier 5, time $4), and the pilot symbollocated at (carrier 3, time $6) are not subject to phase change by phasechanger 205B.

This point is a characteristic of phase changer 205B. Note that, asillustrated in FIG. 4, data carriers are arranged at “the same carriersand the same times” as the symbols subject to phase change in FIG. 11,which are the data symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2,time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time$5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6),and (carrier 5, time $6).

In other words, in FIG. 4, the symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5),(carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5),(carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6),(carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6) are data symbols.

In other words, data symbols that perform MIMO transmission, that is tosay, transmit a plurality of streams, are subject to phase change byphase changer 205B.

One example of the phase change that phase changer 205B applies to thedata symbols is the method given in Equation (2) in which phase changeis applied to the data symbols regularly, such as at each cycle N.However, the method of applying the phase change to the data symbols isnot limited to this example.

With this, when the environment is one in which the direct waves aredominant, such as in an LOS environment, it is possible to achieveimproved data reception quality in the reception device with respect tothe data symbols that perform MIMO transmission, that is to say thattransmit a plurality of streams. Next, the advantageous effects of thiswill be described.

For example, the modulation scheme used by mapper 104 in FIG. 1 is QPSK.Mapped signal 201A in FIG. 19 is a QPSK signal, and mapped signal 201Bis a QPSK signal. In other words, two QPSK streams are transmitted.

Accordingly, for example, using channel estimated signals 806_1 and806_2, 16 candidate signal points are obtained by signal processor 811illustrated in FIG. 8. 2-bit transmission is possible with QPSK.Accordingly, since there are two streams, 4-bit transmission isachieved. Thus, there are 2⁴=16 candidate signal points.

Note that 16 other candidate signal points are obtained from usingchannel estimated signals 808_1 and 808_2 as well, but since descriptionthereof is the same as described above, the following description willfocus on the 16 candidate signal points obtained by using channelestimated signals 806_1 and 806_2.

FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B each illustrate an example of the state resultingfrom such a case. In FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B, in-phase I is represented onthe horizontal axis and orthogonal Q is represented on the verticalaxis. 16 candidate signal points are present in the illustrated in-phaseI-orthogonal Q planes. Among the 16 candidate signal points, one is asignal point that is transmitted by the transmission device. This is whythese are referred to as “16 candidate signal points”.

When the environment is one in which the direct waves are dominant, suchas in an LOS environment, a first conceivable case is “when phasechanger 205B is omitted from the configuration illustrated in FIG. 19,in other words, when phase change is not applied by phase changer 205Bin FIG. 19”.

In the first case, since phase change is not applied, there is apossibility that the state illustrated in FIG. 12A will be realized.When the state falls into the state illustrated in FIG. 12A, asillustrated by “signal points 1201 and 1202”, “signal points 1203, 1204,1205, and 1206”, and “signal points 1207, 1208”, the signal pointsbecome dense, that is to say, the distances between some signal pointsshorten. Accordingly, in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8,data reception quality may decrease.

In order to remedy this phenomenon, in FIG. 19, phase changer 205B isinserted. When phase changer 205B is inserted, due to symbol number i,there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal points are dense, such asin FIG. 12A, and symbol numbers whose “distance between signal points islong”, such as in FIG. 12B. With respect to this state, since errorcorrection code is introduced, high error correction performance isachieved, and in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8, high datareception quality is achieved.

Note that in FIG. 19, a phase change is not applied by phase changer205B in FIG. 19 to “pilot symbols, preamble” for demodulating (wavedetection of) data symbols, such as pilot symbols and a preamble, andfor channel estimation. With this, among data symbols, “due to symbolnumber i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal points aredense, such as in FIG. 12A, and symbol numbers whose “distance betweensignal points is long”, such as in FIG. 12B” can be realized.

However, even if a phase change is applied by phase changer 205B in FIG.19 to “pilot symbols, preamble” for demodulating (wave detection of)data symbols, such as pilot symbols and a preamble, and for channelestimation, the following is possible: “among data symbols, “due tosymbol number i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal pointsare dense, such as in FIG. 12A, and symbol numbers whose “distancebetween signal points is long”, such as in FIG. 12B“can be realized.”

In such a case, a phase change must be applied to pilot symbols and/or apreamble under some condition. For example, one conceivable method is toimplement a rule which is separate from the rule for applying a phasechange to a data symbol, and “applying a phase change to a pilot symboland/or a preamble”. Another example is a method of regularly applying aphase change to a data symbol in a cycle N, and regularly applying aphase change to a pilot symbol and/or a preamble in a cycle M. N and Mare integers that are greater than or equal to 2.

As described above, phase changer 209A receives inputs of basebandsignal 208A and control signal 200, applies a phase change to basebandsignal 208A based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 210A. Baseband signal 208A is a function of symbol number i, andis expressed as x′(i). Then, phase-changed signal 210A (x(i)) can beexpressed as x(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i). Here, i is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0, and j is an imaginary number unit.

Note that the operation performed by phase changer 209A may be CDD/CSDdisclosed in NPTL 2 and 3. Phase changer 209A then applies a phasechange to a symbol present along the frequency axis. In other words,phase changer 209A applies a phase change to, for example, a datasymbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a control information symbol.Accordingly, in such a case, symbols subject to symbol number i includedata symbols, pilot symbols, control information symbols, and preambles(other symbols).

In the case of FIG. 19, since phase changer 209A applies a phase changeto baseband signal 208A, a phase change is applied to each symbol inFIG. 4.

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 4, phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (othersymbols 403) for all carriers at time $1.

Similarly phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phasechange to the following symbols: “all symbols (other symbols 403) forall carriers at time $2”, “all symbols (other symbols 403) for allcarriers at time $3”, “all symbols (other symbols 403) for all carriersat time $4”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) forall carriers at time $5”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or datasymbols 402) for all carriers at time $6”, “all symbols (pilot symbols401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers at time $7”, “all symbols(pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers at time $8”,“all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers attime $9”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for allcarriers at time $10”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols402) for all carriers at time $11”. Recitation for other times andcarriers is omitted.

As described above, phase changer 209B receives inputs of basebandsignal 208B and control signal 200, applies a phase change to basebandsignal 208B based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 210B. Baseband signal 208B is a function of symbol number i, andis expressed as y′(i). Then, phase-changed signal y(i)210B can beexpressed as y(i)=e^(j×τ(i))×y′(i). Here, i is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0, and j is an imaginary number unit.

Note that the operation performed by phase changer 209B may be CDD/CSDdisclosed in NPTL 2 and 3. Phase changer 209B then applies a phasechange to a symbol present along the frequency axis. In other words,phase changer 209B applies a phase change to, for example, a datasymbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a control information symbol.

Accordingly, in such a case, symbols subject to symbol number i includedata symbols, pilot symbols, control information symbols, and preambles(other symbols). In the case of FIG. 19, since phase changer 209Bapplies a phase change to baseband signal 208B, a phase change isapplied to each symbol in FIG. 5.

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 5, phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (othersymbols 503) for all carriers at time $1.

Similarly, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phasechange to the following symbols: “all symbols (other symbols 503) forall carriers at time $2”, “all symbols (other symbols 503) for allcarriers at time $3”, “all symbols (other symbols 503) for all carriersat time $4”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) forall carriers at time $5”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or datasymbols 502) for all carriers at time $6”, “all symbols (pilot symbols501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers at time $7”, “all symbols(pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers at time $8”,“all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers attime $9”. “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for allcarriers at time $10”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols502) for all carriers at time $11”. Recitation for other times andcarriers is omitted.

FIG. 13 illustrates a frame configuration different from the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 4 of transmission signal 108_Aillustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 13 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 14 illustrates a frame configuration different from the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 5 of transmission signal 108_Billustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 14 is described in Embodiment 1. Accordinglydescription will be omitted from this embodiment.

When a symbol is present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 13 and a symbolis present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 14, the symbol in carrier Aat time $B in FIG. 13 and the symbol in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 14are transmitted at the same time and same frequency. Note that the frameconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are merely examples.

The other symbols in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are symbols corresponding to“preamble signal 252 and control information symbol signal 253 in FIG.19”. Accordingly, when an other symbol 403 in FIG. 13 at the same timeand same frequency (same carrier) as an other symbol 503 in FIG. 14transmits control information, it transmits the same data (the samecontrol information).

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 13 and theframe of FIG. 14 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 13 or the frame of FIG. 14 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

Phase changer 209A receives inputs of baseband signal 208A and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208A based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210A. Basebandsignal 208A is a function of symbol symbol number i, and is expressed asx′(i). Then, phase-changed signal 210A (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i). Here, i is an integer that is greater than orequal to 0, and j is an imaginary number unit.

Note that the operation performed by phase changer 209A may be CDD/CSDdisclosed in NPTL 2 and 3. Phase changer 209A then applies a phasechange to a symbol present along the frequency axis. In other words,phase changer 209A applies a phase change to, for example, a datasymbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a control information symbol. Here, anull symbol may be considered as a target for application of a phasechange. Accordingly symbols subject to symbol number i include, forexample, data symbols, pilot symbols, control information symbols,preambles (other symbols), and null symbols.

However, even if a phase change is applied to a null symbol, the signalsbefore and after the phase change are the same. This is because a nullsymbol has an in-phase component I of zero (0) and an orthogonalcomponent Q of zero (0). Accordingly, it is possible to construe a nullsymbol as not a target for a phase change.

In the case of FIG. 19, since phase changer 209A applies a phase changeto baseband signal 208A, a phase change is applied to each symbol inFIG. 13.

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 13, phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (othersymbols 403) for all carriers at time $1. However, the handling of thephase change with respect to null symbol 1301 is as previouslydescribed.

Similarly, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phasechange to the following symbols: “all symbols (other symbols 403) forall carriers at time $2”, “all symbols (other symbols 403) for allcarriers at time $3”, “all symbols (other symbols 403) for all carriersat time $4”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) forall carriers at time $5”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or datasymbols 402) for all carriers at time $6”, “all symbols (pilot symbols401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers at time $7”, “all symbols(pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers at time $8”,“all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers attime $9”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for allcarriers at time $10”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols402) for all carriers at time $11”. However, the handling of the phasechange with respect to null symbol 1301 for all carriers at all times isas previously described. Recitation for other times and carriers isomitted.

The phase change value of phase changer 209A is expressed as Ω(i).Baseband signal 208A is x′(i) and phase-changed signal 210A is x(i).Accordingly, x(i)=Ω(i)×x′(i) holds true.

For example, the phase change value is set as in Equation (38). Q is aninteger that is greater than or equal to 2, and represents the number ofphase change cycles. j is an imaginary number unit. However, Equation(38) is merely a non-limiting example.

For example, Ω(i) may be set so as to implement a phase change thatyields a cycle Q.

Moreover, for example, in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13, the same phase changevalue is applied to the same carriers, and the phase change value may beset on a per carrier basis. For example, the following may beimplemented.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (39)for carrier 1 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (40)for carrier 2 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (41)for carrier 3 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (42)for carrier 4 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13. Recitation for other times andcarriers is omitted.

This concludes the operational example of phase changer 209A illustratedin FIG. 19.

Phase changer 209B receives inputs of baseband signal 208B and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210B. Basebandsignal 208B is a function of symbol symbol number i, and is expressed asy′(i). Then, phase-changed signal 210B (y(i)) can be expressed asy(i)=e^(j×τ(i))×y′(i). Here, i is an integer that is greater than orequal to 0, and j is an imaginary number unit.

Note that the operation performed by phase changer 209B may be CDD/CSDdisclosed in NPTL 2 and 3. Phase changer 209B then applies a phasechange to a symbol present along the frequency axis. In other words,phase changer 209B applies a phase change to, for example, a datasymbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a control information symbol. Here, anull symbol may be considered as a target for application of a phasechange.

Accordingly, symbols subject to symbol number i include, for example,data symbols, pilot symbols, control information symbols, preambles(other symbols), and null symbols.

However, since the in-phase component I is zero (0) and the orthogonalcomponent Q is zero (0), even if a phase change is applied to a nullsymbol, the signals before and after the phase change are the same.Accordingly, it is possible to construe a null symbol as not a targetfor a phase change.

In the case of FIG. 19, since phase changer 209B applies a phase changeto baseband signal 208B, a phase change is applied to each symbol inFIG. 14.

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 14, phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phase change to all symbols (othersymbols 503) for all carriers at time $1. However, the handling of thephase change with respect to null symbol 1301 is as previouslydescribed.

Similarly, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 19 applies a phasechange to the following symbols: “all symbols (other symbols 503) forall carriers at time $2”, “all symbols (other symbols 503) for allcarriers at time $3”, “all symbols (other symbols 503) for all carriersat time $4”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) forall carriers at time $5”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or datasymbols 502) for all carriers at time $6”, “all symbols (pilot symbols501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers at time $7”, “all symbols(pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers at time $8”,“all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers attime $9”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for allcarriers at time $10”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols502) for all carriers at time $11”. However, the handling of the phasechange with respect to null symbols 1301 is as previously described.Recitation for other times and carriers is omitted.

The phase change value of phase changer 209B is expressed as Ω(i).Baseband signal 208B is y′(i) and phase-changed signal 210B is y(i).Accordingly, y(i)=Δ(i)×y′(i) holds true.

For example, the phase change value is set as in the following equation.R is an integer that is greater than or equal to 2, and represents thenumber of phase change cycles. Note that the values for Q and R inEquation (38) may be different values.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 49} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{\Delta(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{R}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(49)}\end{matrix}$j is an imaginary number unit. However, Equation (49) is merely anon-limiting example.

For example, Δ(i) may be set so as to implement a phase change thatyields a cycle R.

Note that the phase changing methods used by phase changer 209A andphase changer 209B may be different. For example, the cycle may be thesame and, alternatively, may be different.

Moreover, for example, in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14, the same phase changevalue is applied to the same carriers, and the phase change value may beset on a per carrier basis. For example, the following may beimplemented.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (39)for carrier 1 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (40)for carrier 2 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (41)for carrier 3 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (42)for carrier 4 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14. Recitation for other carriers isomitted.

Although the phase change value is described as Equation (39), (40),(41), and (42), the phase changing methods of phase changer 209A andphase changer 209B are different.

This concludes the operational example of phase changer 209B illustratedin FIG. 19.

Next, the advantageous effects obtained by phase changers 209A, 209Billustrated in FIG. 19 will be described.

The other symbols 403, 503 in “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5” or “theframes of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14” may include a control information symbol.As previously described, when an other symbol 503 in FIG. 5 at the sametime and same frequency (in the same carrier) as an other symbol 403transmits control information, it transmits the same data (same controlinformation).

As case 2, “transmitting a control information symbol using eitherantenna unit #A 109_A or antenna unit #B 109_B illustrated in FIG. 1” isconceivable.

When transmission according to “case 2” is performed, since only oneantenna is used to transmit the control information symbol, compared towhen “transmitting a control information symbol using both antenna unit#A 109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B” is performed, spatial diversity gainis less. Accordingly, in “case 2”, data reception quality decreases evenwhen received by the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8.Accordingly, from the perspective of improving data reception quality,“transmitting a control information symbol using both antenna unit #A109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B” is more beneficial.

As case 3, “transmitting a control information symbol using both antennaunit #A 109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B illustrated in FIG. 1. However,phase change is not implemented by phase changers 209A, 209B illustratedin FIG. 19” is conceivable.

When transmission according to “case 3” is performed, since themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #A 109_A and themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #B 109_B are the same orexhibit a specific phase shift, depending on the radio wave propagationenvironment, the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 may receive aninferior reception signal, and both modulated signal may be subjected tothe same multipath effect. Accordingly, in the reception deviceillustrated in FIG. 8, data reception quality decreases.

In order to remedy this phenomenon, in FIG. 19, phase changers 209A,209B are inserted. Since this changes the phase along the time orfrequency axis, in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8, it ispossible to reduce the probability of reception of an inferior receptionsignal. Moreover, since there is a high probability that there will be adifference in the multipath effect that the modulated signal transmittedfrom antenna unit #A 109_A is subjected to with respect to the multipatheffect that the modulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #B 109_Bis subjected to, there is a high probability that diversity gain willresult, and accordingly, that data reception quality in the receptiondevice illustrated in FIG. 8 will improve.

For these reasons, in FIG. 19, phase changers 209A, 209B are providedand phase change is implemented.

Other symbols 403 and other symbols 503 include, in addition to controlinformation symbols, for example, symbols for signal detection, symbolsfor performing frequency and time synchronization, and symbols forperforming channel estimation (a symbol for performing propagation pathfluctuation estimation), for demodulating and decoding controlinformation symbols. Moreover. “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5” or “theframes of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14” include pilot symbols 401, 501, and byusing these, it is possible to perform demodulation and decoding withhigh precision via control information symbols.

Moreover, “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5” or “the frames of FIG. 13and FIG. 14” transmit a plurality of streams at the same time and usingthe same frequency (frequency band) via data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502, that is to say, perform MIMO transmission. In order todemodulate these data symbols, symbols for signal detection, symbols forfrequency and time synchronization, and symbols for channel estimation,which are included in other symbols 403 and other symbols 503, are used.

Here, “symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequency and timesynchronization, and symbols for channel estimation, which are includedin other symbols 403 and other symbols 503” are applied with a phasechange by phase changers 209A, 209B, as described above.

Under these circumstances, when this processing is not performed on datasymbols 402 and data symbols 502, in the reception device, when datasymbols 402 and data symbols 502 are demodulated and decoded, there is aneed to perform the demodulation and decoding in which the processingfor the phase change by phase changers 209A, 209B was performed, andthere is a probability that this processing will be complicated. This isbecause “symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequency and timesynchronization, and symbols for channel estimation, which are includedin other symbols 403 and other symbols 503” are applied with a phasechange by phase changers 209A, 209B.

However, as illustrated in FIG. 19, in phase changers 209A, 209B, when aphase change is applied to data symbols 402 and data symbols 502, in thereception device, there is the advantage that data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502 can simply be demodulated and decoded using the channelestimation signal (propagation path fluctuation signal) estimated byusing “symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequency and timesynchronization, and symbols for channel estimation, which are includedin other symbols 403 and other symbols 503”.

Additionally as illustrated in FIG. 19, in phase changers 209A. 209B,when a phase change is applied to data symbols 402 and data symbols 502,in multipath environments, it is possible to reduce the influence ofsharp drops in electric field intensity along the frequency axis.Accordingly, it is possible to obtain the advantageous effect of animprovement in data reception quality of data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502.

In this way, the point that “symbols that are targets for implementationof a phase change by phase changer 205B” and “symbols that are targetsfor implementation of a phase change by phase changers 209A, 209B” aredifferent is a characteristic point.

As described above, by applying a phase change using phase changer 205Billustrated in FIG. 19, it is possible to achieve the advantageouseffect of an improvement in data reception quality of data symbols 402and data symbols 502 in the reception device in, for example, LOSenvironments, and by applying a phase change using phase changers 209A,209B illustrated in FIG. 19, for example, it is possible to achieve theadvantageous effect of an improvement in data reception quality in thereception device of the control information symbols included in “theframes of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5” or “the frames of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14” andthe advantageous effect that operations of demodulation and decoding ofdata symbols 402 and data symbols 502 become simple.

Note that the advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality in the reception device of data symbols 402 and data symbols 502in, for example, LOS environments, is achieved as a result of the phasechange implemented by phase changer 205B illustrated in FIG. 19 andfurthermore, the reception quality of data symbols 402 and data symbols502 is improved by applying a phase change to data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502 using phase changers 209A, 209B illustrated in FIG. 19.

Note that Q in Equation (38) may be an integer of −2 or less. In such acase, the value for the phase change cycle is the absolute value of Q.This feature is applicable to Embodiment 1 as well.

Note that R in Equation (49) may be an integer of −2 or less. In such acase, the value for the phase change cycle is the absolute value of R.

Moreover, taking into consideration the descriptions provided inSupplemental Information 1, the cyclic delay amount set in phase changer209A and the cyclic delay amount set in phase changer 209B may bedifferent values.

Embodiment 4

In this embodiment, an implementation method will be described that isdifferent from the configuration illustrated in FIG. 2 and described inEmbodiment 1.

FIG. 1 illustrates one example of a configuration of a transmissiondevice according to this embodiment, such as a base station, accesspoint, or broadcast station. As FIG. 1 is described in detail inEmbodiment 1, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

Signal processor 106 receives inputs of mapped signals 105_1 and 105_2,signal group 110, and control signal 100, performs signal processingbased on control signal 100, and outputs processed signals 106_A and106_B. Here, processed signal 106_A is expressed as u1(i), and processedsignal 106_B is expressed as u2(i). i is a symbol number, and, forexample, is an integer that is greater than or equal to 0. Note thatdetails regarding the signal processing will be described with referenceto FIG. 20 later.

FIG. 20 illustrates one example of a configuration of signal processor106 illustrated in FIG. 1. Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203 receivesinputs of mapped signal 201A (mapped signal 105_1 in FIG. 1), mappedsignal 201B (mapped signal 105_2 in FIG. 1), and control signal 200(control signal 100 in FIG. 1), performs weighting synthesis (precoding)based on control signal 200, and outputs weighted signal 204A andweighted signal 204B.

Here, mapped signal 201A is expressed as s1(t), mapped signal 201B isexpressed as s2(t), weighted signal 204A is expressed as z1′(t), andweighted signal 204B is expressed as z2′(t). Note that one example of tis time. s1(t), s2(t), z1′(t), and z2′(t) are defined as complexnumbers, and as such, may be actual numbers.

Here, these are given as functions of time, but may be functions of a“frequency (carrier number)”, and may be functions of “time andfrequency”. These may also be a function of a “symbol number”. Note thatthis also applies to Embodiment 1.

Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203 performs the following calculation.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.\mspace{14mu} 50} \right\rbrack & \; \\{\begin{pmatrix}{z\; 1^{\prime}(i)} \\{z\; 2^{\prime}(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}a & b \\c & d\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s\; 1(i)} \\{s\; 2(i)}\end{pmatrix}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(50)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205A receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204Aand control signal 200, applies a phase change to weighting synthesizedsignal 204A based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 206A. Note that phase-changed signal 206A is expressed as z1(t).z1(t) is defined as a complex number and may be an actual number.

Next, specific operations performed by phase changer 205A will bedescribed. In phase changer 205A, for example, a phase change of w(i) isapplied to z1′(i). Accordingly, z1(i) can be expressed asz1(i)=w(i)×z1′(i). Note that i is a symbol number and is an integer thatis greater than or equal to 0.

For example, the phase change value is set as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 51} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{w(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{M}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(51)}\end{matrix}$

M is an integer that is greater than or equal to 2, and represents thenumber of phase change cycles. When M is set to an odd number greaterthan or equal to 3, data reception quality may increase. However,Equation (51) is merely a non-limiting example. Here, phase change valuew(i)=e^(j×λ(i)).

Phase changer 205B receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204Band control signal 200, applies a phase change to weighting synthesizedsignal 204B based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 206B. Note that phase-changed signal 206B is expressed as z2(t).z2(t) is defined as a complex number and may be an actual number.

Next, specific operations performed by phase changer 205B will bedescribed. In phase changer 205B, for example, a phase change of y(i) isapplied to z2′(i). Accordingly, z2(i) can be expressed asz2(i)=y(i)×z2′(i). Note that i is a symbol number and is an integer thatis greater than or equal to 0.

For example, the phase change value is set as indicated in Equation (2).Note that N is an integer that is greater than or equal to 2, andrepresents the number of phase change cycles. N≠M is satisfied. When Nis set to an odd number greater than or equal to 3, data receptionquality may increase. However, Equation (2) is merely a non-limitingexample. Here, phase change value y(i)=e^(j×δ(i)).

Here, z1(i) and z2(i) are expressed with the following equation.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 52} \right\rbrack & \; \\\begin{matrix}{\begin{pmatrix}{z\; 1(i)} \\{z\; 2(i)}\end{pmatrix} = {\begin{pmatrix}{w(i)} & 0 \\0 & {y(i)}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}a & b \\c & d\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s\; 1(i)} \\{s\; 2(i)}\end{pmatrix}}} \\{= {\begin{pmatrix}e^{j \times {\lambda{(i)}}} & 0 \\0 & e^{j \times {\delta{(i)}}}\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}a & b \\c & d\end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix}{s\; 1(i)} \\{s\; 2(i)}\end{pmatrix}}}\end{matrix} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(52)}\end{matrix}$

Note that δ(i) and λ(i) are actual numbers. z1(i) and z2(i) aretransmitted from the transmission device at the same time and using thesame frequency (same frequency band). In Equation (52), the phase changevalue is not limited to the value used in Equations (2) and (52); forexample, a method in which the phase is changed cyclically or regularlyis conceivable.

As described in Embodiment 1, conceivable examples of the (precoding)matrix inserted in Equation (50) and Equation (52) are illustrated inEquation (5) through Equation (36). However, the precoding matrix is notlimited to these examples. The same applies to Embodiment 1.

Inserter 207A receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204A,pilot symbol signal pa(t)251A, preamble signal 252, control informationsymbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and based on information onthe frame configuration included in control signal 200, outputs basebandsignal 208A based on the frame configuration. Note that t indicatestime.

Similarly, inserter 207B receives inputs of phase-changed signal 206B,pilot symbol signal pb(t)251B, preamble signal 252, control informationsymbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and based on information onthe frame configuration included in control signal 200, outputs basebandsignal 208B based on the frame configuration.

Phase changer 209B receives inputs of baseband signal 208B and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210B. Basebandsignal 208B is a function of symbol number i, and is expressed as x′(i).Then, phase-changed signal x(i)210B can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i). Here, i is an integer that is greater than orequal to 0, and j is an imaginary number unit.

Note that the operation performed by phase changer 209B may be CDD/CSDdisclosed in NPTL 2 and 3, as described in Embodiment 1. Phase changer209B then applies a phase change to a symbol present along the frequencyaxis. In other words, phase changer 209B applies a phase change to, forexample, a data symbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a control informationsymbol.

FIG. 3 illustrates one example of a configuration of radio units 107_Aand 107_B illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 3 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 4 illustrates a frame configuration of transmission signal 108_Aillustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 4 is described in Embodiment 1. Accordingly,description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 5 illustrates a frame configuration of transmission signal 108_Billustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 5 is described in Embodiment 1. Accordingly,description will be omitted from this embodiment.

When a symbol is present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 4 and a symbolis present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 5, the symbol in carrier A attime $B in FIG. 4 and the symbol in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 5 aretransmitted at the same time and same frequency. Note that the frameconfiguration is not limited to the configurations illustrated in FIG. 4and FIG. 5; FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are mere examples of frame configurations.

The other symbols in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are symbols corresponding to“preamble signal 252 and control information symbol signal 253 in FIG.2”. Accordingly, when an other symbol 503 in FIG. 5 at the same time andsame frequency (same carrier) as an other symbol 403 in FIG. 4 transmitscontrol information, it transmits the same data (the same controlinformation).

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 4 and theframe of FIG. 5 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 4 or the frame of FIG. 5 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

FIG. 6 illustrates one example of components relating to controlinformation generation for generating control information symbol signal253 illustrated in FIG. 2. FIG. 6 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 7 illustrates one example of a configuration of antenna unit #A109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B illustrated in FIG. 1. In this example,antenna unit #A 109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B include a plurality ofantennas. FIG. 7 is described in Embodiment 1. Accordingly, descriptionwill be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 8 illustrates one example of a configuration of a reception devicethat receives a modulated signal upon the transmission deviceillustrated in FIG. 1 transmitting, for example, a transmission signalhaving the frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5. FIG. 8is described in Embodiment 1. Accordingly, description will be omittedfrom this embodiment.

FIG. 10 illustrates one example of a configuration of antenna unit #X801X and antenna unit #Y 801Y illustrated in FIG. 8. In this example,antenna unit #X 801X and antenna unit #Y 801Y include a plurality ofantennas. FIG. 10 is described in Embodiment 1. Accordingly, descriptionwill be omitted from this embodiment.

Next, signal processor 106 in the transmission device illustrated inFIG. 1 is inserted as phase changers 205A, 205B and phase changer 209A,as illustrated in FIG. 20. The characteristics and advantageous effectsof this configuration will be described.

As described with reference to FIG. 4 and FIG. 5, phase changers 205A,205B apply precoding (weighted synthesis) to mapped signal s1(i) 201Aobtained via mapping using the first sequence and mapped signal s2(i)201B obtained via mapping using the second sequence, and apply a phasechange to the obtained weighting synthesized signals 204A and 204B.Phase-changed signal 206A and phase-changed signal 206B are thentransmitted at the same frequency and at the same time. Accordingly, inFIG. 4 and FIG. 5, a phase change is applied to data symbol 402 in FIG.4 and data symbol 502 in FIG. 5. Note that i is a symbol number and isan integer that is greater than or equal to 0.

For example, FIG. 11 illustrates an extraction of carrier 1 throughcarrier 5 and time $4 through time $6 from the frame illustrated in FIG.4. Note that in FIG. 11, similar to FIG. 4, pilot symbol 401, datasymbols 402, and other symbols 403 are shown.

As described above, among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11, phasechanger 205A applies a phase change to the data symbols located at(carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5),(carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6).

Accordingly, the phase change values for the data symbols illustrated inFIG. 11 can be expressed as “e^(j×λ15(i))” for (carrier 1, time $5),“e^(j×λ25(i))” for (carrier 2, time $5), “e^(j×λ35(i))” for (carrier 3,time $5), “e^(j×λ45(i))” for (carrier 4, time $5), “e^(j×λ55(i))”(carrier 5, time $5), “e^(j×λ16(i))” for (carrier 1, time $6),“e^(j×λ26(i))” for (carrier 2, time $6), “e^(j×λ46(i))” for (carrier 4,time $6), and “e^(j×λ56(i))” for (carrier 5, time $6).

Among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11, the other symbols located at(carrier 1, time $4), (carrier 2, time $4), (carrier 3, time $4),(carrier 4, time $4), and (carrier 5, time $4), and the pilot symbollocated at (carrier 3, time $6) are not subject to phase change by phasechanger 205A.

This point is a characteristic of phase changer 205A. Note that, asillustrated in FIG. 4, data carriers are arranged at “the same carriersand the same times” as the symbols subject to phase change in FIG. 11,which are the data symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2,time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time$5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6),and (carrier 5, time $6).

In other words, in FIG. 4, the symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5),(carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5),(carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6),(carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6) are data symbols.

In other words, data symbols that perform MIMO transmission or transmita plurality of streams are subject to phase change by phase changer205A.

One example of the phase change that phase changer 205A applies to thedata symbols is the method given in Equation (50) in which phase changeis applied to the data symbols regularly, such as at each cycle N.However, the method of applying the phase change to the data symbols isnot limited to this example.

For example, FIG. 11 illustrates an extraction of carrier 1 throughcarrier 5 and time $4 through time $6 from the frame illustrated in FIG.5. Note that In FIG. 11, similar to FIG. 5, pilot symbol 501, datasymbols 502, and other symbols 503 are shown.

As described above, among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11, phasechanger 205B applies a phase change to the data symbols located at(carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5),(carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6).

Accordingly, the phase change values for the data symbols illustrated inFIG. 11 can be expressed as “e^(j×δ15(i))” for (carrier 1, time $5),“e^(j×δ25(i))” for (carrier 2, time $5), “e^(j×δ35(i))” for (carrier 3,time $5), “e^(j×δ45(i))” for (carrier 4, time $5), “e^(j×δ55(i))”(carrier 5, time $5), “e^(j×δ16(i))” for (carrier 1, time $6),“e^(j×δ26(i))” for (carrier 2, time $6), “e^(j×δ46(i))” for (carrier 4,time $6), and “e^(j×δ56(i))” for (carrier 5, time $6).

Among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11, the other symbols located at(carrier 1, time $4), (carrier 2, time $4), (carrier 3, time $4),(carrier 4, time $4), and (carrier 5, time $4), and the pilot symbollocated at (carrier 3, time $6) are not subject to phase change by phasechanger 205B.

This point is a characteristic of phase changer 205B. Note that, asillustrated in FIG. 4, data carriers are arranged at “the same carriersand the same times” as the symbols subject to phase change in FIG. 11,which are the data symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2,time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time$5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6),and (carrier 5, time $6).

In other words, in FIG. 4, the symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5),(carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5),(carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6),(carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6) are data symbols.

In other words, data symbols that perform MIMO transmission or transmita plurality of streams are subject to phase change by phase changer205B.

One example of the phase change that phase changer 205B applies to thedata symbols is the method given in Equation (2) in which phase changeis applied to the data symbols regularly, such as at each cycle N.However, the method of applying the phase change to the data symbols isnot limited to this example.

With this, when the environment is one in which the direct waves aredominant, such as in an LOS environment, it is possible to achieveimproved data reception quality in the reception device with respect tothe data symbols that perform MIMO transmission or transmit a pluralityof streams. Next, the advantageous effects of this will be described.

For example, the modulation scheme used by mapper 104 in FIG. 1 is QPSK.Mapped signal 201A in FIG. 18 is a QPSK signal, and mapped signal 201Bis a QPSK signal. In other words, two QPSK streams are transmitted.

Accordingly, for example, using channel estimated signals 806_1 and806_2, 16 candidate signal points are obtained by signal processor 811illustrated in FIG. 8. 2-bit transmission is possible with QPSK.Accordingly, since there are two streams, 4-bit transmission isachieved. Thus, there are 2⁴=16 candidate signal points.

Note that 16 other candidate signal points are obtained from usingchannel estimated signals 808_1 and 808_2 as well, but since descriptionthereof is the same as described above, the following description willfocus on the 16 candidate signal points obtained by using channelestimated signals 806_1 and 806_2.

FIG. 12 illustrates an example of the state resulting from such a case.In FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B, in-phase I is represented on the horizontalaxis and orthogonal Q is represented on the vertical axis. 16 candidatesignal points are present in the illustrated in-phase I-orthogonal Qplanes. Among the 16 candidate signal points, one is a signal point thatis transmitted by the transmission device. This is why these arereferred to as “16 candidate signal points”.

When the environment is one in which the direct waves are dominant, suchas in an LOS environment, a first conceivable case is “when phasechangers 205A, 205B are omitted from the configuration illustrated inFIG. 20, in other words, when phase change is not applied by phasechangers 205A, 205B in FIG. 20”.

In the first case, since phase change is not applied, there is apossibility that the state illustrated in FIG. 12A will be realized.When the state falls into the state illustrated in FIG. 12A, asillustrated by “signal points 1201 and 1202”, “signal points 1203, 1204,1205, and 1206”, and “signal points 1207, 1208”, the signal pointsbecome dense, that is to say, the distances between some signal pointsshorten. Accordingly, in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8,data reception quality may decrease.

In order to remedy this phenomenon, in FIG. 20, phase changers 205A,205B are inserted. When phase changers 205A. 205B are inserted, due tosymbol number i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal pointsare dense, such as in FIG. 12A and symbol numbers whose “distancebetween signal points is long”, such as in FIG. 12B. With respect tothis state, since error correction code is introduced, high errorcorrection performance is achieved, and in the reception deviceillustrated in FIG. 8, high data reception quality is achieved.

Note that in FIG. 20, a phase change is not applied by phase changers205A, 205B in FIG. 20 to “pilot symbols, preamble” for demodulating(wave detection of) data symbols, such as pilot symbols and a preamble,and for channel estimation. With this, among data symbols, “due tosymbol number i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal pointsare dense, such as in FIG. 12A, and symbol numbers whose “distancebetween signal points is long”, such as in FIG. 12B” can be realized.

However, even if a phase change is applied by phase changers 205A, 205Bin FIG. 20 to “pilot symbols, preamble” for demodulating (wave detectionof) data symbols, such as pilot symbols and a preamble, and for channelestimation, the following is possible: “among data symbols, “due tosymbol number i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal pointsare dense, such as in FIG. 12A, and symbol numbers whose “distancebetween signal points is long”, such as in FIG. 12B” can be realized.

In such a case, a phase change must be applied to pilot symbols and/or apreamble under some condition. For example, one conceivable method is toimplement a rule which is separate from the rule for applying a phasechange to a data symbol, and “applying a phase change to a pilot symboland/or a preamble”. Another example is a method of regularly applying aphase change to a data symbol in a cycle N, and regularly applying aphase change to a pilot symbol and/or a preamble in a cycle M. N and Mare integers that are greater than or equal to 2.

As described above, phase changer 209B receives inputs of basebandsignal 208B and control signal 200, applies a phase change to basebandsignal 208B based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 210B. Baseband signal 208B is a function of symbol number i, andis expressed as x′(i). Then, phase-changed signal 210B (x(i)) can beexpressed as x(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i). Here, i is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0, and j is an imaginary number unit.

Note that the operation performed by phase changer 209B may be CDD/CSDdisclosed in NPTL 2 and 3. Phase changer 209B then applies a phasechange to a symbol present along the frequency axis. Phase changer 209Bapplies a phase change to, for example, a data symbol, a pilot symbol,and/or a control information symbol. Accordingly, in such a case,symbols subject to symbol number i include data symbols, pilot symbols,control information symbols, and preambles (other symbols).

In the case of FIG. 20, since phase changer 209B applies a phase changeto baseband signal 208B, a phase change is applied to each symbol inFIG. 5.

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 5, phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 20 applies a phase change to all symbols (othersymbols 503) for all carriers at time $1.

Similarly, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 20 applies a phasechange to the following symbols: “all symbols (other symbols 503) forall carriers at time $2”, “all symbols (other symbols 503) for allcarriers at time $3”, “all symbols (other symbols 503) for all carriersat time $4”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) forall carriers at time $5”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or datasymbols 502) for all carriers at time $6”, “all symbols (pilot symbols501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers at time $7”, “all symbols(pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers at time $8”,“all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers attime $9”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for allcarriers at time $10”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols502) for all carriers at time $11”. Recitation for other times andcarriers is omitted.

FIG. 13 illustrates a frame configuration different from the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 4 of transmission signal 108_Aillustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 13 is described in Embodiment 1. Accordinglydescription will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 14 illustrates a frame configuration different from the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 5 of transmission signal 108_Billustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 14 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

When a symbol is present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 13 and a symbolis present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 14, the symbol in carrier Aat time $B in FIG. 13 and the symbol in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 14are transmitted at the same time and same frequency. Note that the frameconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are merely examples.

The other symbols in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are symbols corresponding to“preamble signal 252 and control information symbol signal 253 in FIG.20”. Accordingly, when an other symbol 403 in FIG. 13 at the same timeand same frequency (same carrier) as an other symbol 503 in FIG. 14transmits control information, it transmits the same data (the samecontrol information).

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 13 and theframe of FIG. 14 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 13 or the frame of FIG. 14 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

Phase changer 209B receives inputs of baseband signal 208B and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210B. Basebandsignal 208B is a function of symbol symbol number i, and is expressed asx′(i).

Then, phase-changed signal 210B (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i). Here, i is an integer that is greater than orequal to 0, and j is an imaginary number unit. Note that the operationperformed by phase changer 209B may be CDD/CSD disclosed in NPTL 2 and3.

Phase changer 209B then applies a phase change to a symbol present alongthe frequency axis. Phase changer 209B applies a phase change to, forexample, a data symbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a control informationsymbol. Here, a null symbol may be considered as a target forapplication of a phase change. Accordingly symbols subject to symbolnumber i include, for example, data symbols, pilot symbols, controlinformation symbols, preambles (other symbols), and null symbols.

However, since the in-phase component I is zero (0) and the orthogonalcomponent Q is zero (0), even if a phase change is applied to a nullsymbol, the signals before and after the phase change are the same.Accordingly, it is possible to construe a null symbol as not a targetfor a phase change. In the case of FIG. 20, since phase changer 209Bapplies a phase change to baseband signal 208B, a phase change isapplied to each symbol in FIG. 14.

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 14, phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 20 applies a phase change to all symbols (othersymbols 503) for all carriers at time $1. However, the handling of thephase change with respect to null symbol 1301 is as previouslydescribed.

Similarly, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 20 applies a phasechange to the following symbols: “all symbols (other symbols 503) forall carriers at time $2”, “all symbols (other symbols 503) for allcarriers at time $3”, “all symbols (other symbols 503) for all carriersat time $4”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) forall carriers at time $5”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or datasymbols 502) for all carriers at time $6”, “all symbols (pilot symbols501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers at time $7”, “all symbols(pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers at time $8”,“all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers attime $9”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for allcarriers at time $10”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols502) for all carriers at time $11”. However, the handling of the phasechange with respect to null symbol 1301 is as previously described.Recitation for other times and carriers is omitted.

The phase change value of phase changer 209B is expressed as Ω(i).Baseband signal 208B is x′(i) and phase-changed signal 210B is x(i).Accordingly, x(i)=Ω(i)×x′(i) holds true.

For example, the phase change value is set as in Equation (38). Q is aninteger that is greater than or equal to 2, and represents the number ofphase change cycles. j is an imaginary number unit. However, Equation(38) is merely a non-limiting example.

For example, Ω(i) may be set so as to implement a phase change thatyields a cycle Q.

Moreover, for example, in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14, the same phase changevalue is applied to the same carriers, and the phase change value may beset on a per carrier basis. For example, the following may beimplemented.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (39)for carrier 1 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (40)for carrier 2 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (41)for carrier 3 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (42)for carrier 4 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14. Recitation for other times andcarriers is omitted.

This concludes the operational example of phase changer 209B illustratedin FIG. 20.

Next, the advantageous effects obtained by phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 20 will be described.

The other symbols 403, 503 in “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5” or “theframes of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14” may include a control information symbol.As previously described, when an other symbol 503 in FIG. 5 at the sametime and same frequency (in the same carrier) as an other symbol 403transmits control information, it transmits the same data (same controlinformation).

As case 2, “transmitting a control information symbol using eitherantenna unit #A 109_A or antenna unit #B 109_B illustrated in FIG. 1” isconceivable.

When transmission according to “case 2” is performed, since only oneantenna is used to transmit the control information symbol, compared towhen “transmitting a control information symbol using both antenna unit#A 109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B” is performed, spatial diversity gainis less. Accordingly, in “case 2”, data reception quality decreases evenwhen received by the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8.Accordingly, from the perspective of improving data reception quality,“transmitting a control information symbol using both antenna unit #A109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B” is more beneficial.

As case 3, “transmitting a control information symbol using both antennaunit #A 109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B illustrated in FIG. 1. However,phase change is not implemented by phase changer 209B illustrated inFIG. 20” is conceivable.

When transmission according to “case 3” is performed, since themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #A 109_A and themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #B 109_B are the same orexhibit a specific phase shift, depending on the radio wave propagationenvironment, the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 may receive aninferior reception signal, and both modulated signal may be subjected tothe same multipath effect. Accordingly in the reception deviceillustrated in FIG. 8, data reception quality decreases.

In order to remedy this phenomenon, in FIG. 20, phase changer 209B isinserted. Since this changes the phase along the time or frequency axis,in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8, it is possible to reducethe probability of reception of an inferior reception signal. Moreover,since there is a high probability that there will be a difference in themultipath effect that the modulated signal transmitted from antenna unit#A 109_A is subjected to with respect to the multipath effect that themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #B 109_B is subjected to,there is a high probability that diversity gain will result, andaccordingly, that data reception quality in the reception deviceillustrated in FIG. 8 will improve.

For these reasons, in FIG. 20, phase changer 209B is provided and phasechange is implemented.

Other symbols 403 and other symbols 503 include, in addition to controlinformation symbols, for example, symbols for signal detection, symbolsfor performing frequency and time synchronization, and symbols forperforming channel estimation (a symbol for performing propagation pathfluctuation estimation), for demodulating and decoding controlinformation symbols. Moreover, “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5” or “theframes of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14” include pilot symbols 401, 501, and byusing these, it is possible to perform demodulation and decoding withhigh precision via control information symbols.

Moreover, “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5” or “the frames of FIG. 13and FIG. 14” transmit a plurality of streams or perform MIMOtransmission at the same time and using the same frequency (frequencyband) via data symbols 402 and data symbols 502.

In order to demodulate these data symbols, symbols for signal detection,symbols for frequency and time synchronization, and symbols for channelestimation, which are included in other symbols 403 and other symbols503, are used.

Here, “symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequency and timesynchronization, and symbols for channel estimation, which are includedin other symbols 403 and other symbols 503” are applied with a phasechange by phase changer 209B, as described above.

Under these circumstances, when this processing is not performed “ondata symbols 402 and data symbols 502” or “on data symbols 502 in theexample above”, in the reception device, when data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502 are demodulated and decoded, there is a need to perform thedemodulation and decoding in which the processing for the phase changeby phase changer 209B was performed, and there is a probability thatthis processing will be complicated.

This is because “symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequency andtime synchronization, and symbols for channel estimation, which areincluded in other symbols 403 and other symbols 503” are applied with aphase change by phase changer 209B.

However, as illustrated in FIG. 20, in phase changer 209B, when a phasechange is applied “to data symbols 402 and data symbols 502” or “to datasymbols 502 in the example above”, in the reception device, there is theadvantage that data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 can simply bedemodulated and decoded using the channel estimation signal (propagationpath fluctuation signal) estimated by using “symbols for signaldetection, symbols for frequency and time synchronization, and symbolsfor channel estimation, which are included in other symbols 403 andother symbols 503”.

Additionally, as illustrated in FIG. 20, in phase changer 209B, when aphase change is applied “to data symbols 402 and data symbols 502” or“to data symbols 502 in the example above”, in multipath environments,it is possible to reduce the influence of sharp drops in electric fieldintensity along the frequency axis. Accordingly it is possible to obtainthe advantageous effect of an improvement in data reception quality ofdata symbols 402 and data symbols 502.

In this way, the point that “symbols that are targets for implementationof a phase change by phase changers 205A, 205B” and “symbols that aretargets for implementation of a phase change by phase changer 209B” aredifferent is a characteristic point.

As described above, by applying a phase change using phase changers205A, 205B illustrated in FIG. 20, it is possible to achieve theadvantageous effect of an improvement in data reception quality of datasymbols 402 and data symbols 502 in the reception device in, forexample, LOS environments, and by applying a phase change using phasechanger 209B illustrated in FIG. 20, for example, it is possible toachieve the advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality in the reception device of the control information symbolsincluded in “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5” or “the frames of FIG. 13and FIG. 14” and the advantageous effect that operations of demodulationand decoding of data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 become simple.

Note that the advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality in the reception device of data symbols 402 and data symbols 502in, for example, LOS environments, is achieved as a result of the phasechange implemented by phase changers 205A, 205B illustrated in FIG. 20,and furthermore, the reception quality of data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502 is improved by applying a phase change to data symbols 402and data symbols 502 using phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 20.

Note that Q in Equation (38) may be an integer of −2 or less. In such acase, the value for the phase change cycle is the absolute value of Q.This feature is applicable to Embodiment 1 as well.

Embodiment 5

In this embodiment, an implementation method will be described that isdifferent from the configuration illustrated in FIG. 2 and described inEmbodiment 1.

FIG. 1 illustrates one example of a configuration of a transmissiondevice according to this embodiment, such as a base station, accesspoint, or broadcast station. As FIG. 1 is described in detail inEmbodiment 1, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

Signal processor 106 receives inputs of mapped signals 105_1 and 105_2,signal group 110, and control signal 100, performs signal processingbased on control signal 100, and outputs processed signals 106_A and106_B. Here, processed signal 106_A is expressed as u1(i), and processedsignal 106_B is expressed as u2(i). i is a symbol number, and, forexample, is an integer that is greater than or equal to 0. Note thatdetails regarding the signal processing will be described with referenceto FIG. 21 later.

FIG. 21 illustrates one example of a configuration of signal processor106 illustrated in FIG. 1. Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203 receivesinputs of mapped signal 201A (mapped signal 105_1 in FIG. 1), mappedsignal 201B (mapped signal 105_2 in FIG. 1), and control signal 200(control signal 100 in FIG. 1), performs weighting synthesis (precoding)based on control signal 200, and outputs weighted signal 204A andweighted signal 204B.

Here, mapped signal 201A is expressed as s1(t), mapped signal 201B isexpressed as s2(t), weighted signal 204A is expressed as z1′(t), andweighted signal 204B is expressed as z2′(t). Note that one example of tis time. s1(t), s2(t), z1′(t), and z2′(t) are defined as complexnumbers, and as such, may be actual numbers.

Here, these are given as functions of time, but may be functions of a“frequency (carrier number)”, and may be functions of “time andfrequency”. These may also be a function of a “symbol number”. Note thatthis also applies to Embodiment 1.

Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203 performs the calculations indicatedin Equation (49).

Phase changer 205A receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204Aand control signal 200, applies a phase change to weighting synthesizedsignal 204A based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 206A. Note that phase-changed signal 206A is expressed as z1(t).z1(t) is defined as a complex number and may be an actual number.

Next, specific operations performed by phase changer 205A will bedescribed. In phase changer 205A, for example, a phase change of w(i) isapplied to z1′(i). Accordingly, z1(i) can be expressed asz1(i)=w(i)×z1′(i). Note that i is a symbol number and is an integer thatis greater than or equal to 0.

For example, the phase change value is set as indicated in Equation(50).

M is an integer that is greater than or equal to 2, and represents thenumber of phase change cycles. When M is set to an odd number greaterthan or equal to 3, data reception quality may increase. However,Equation (50) is merely a non-limiting example. Here, phase change valuew(i)=e^(j×λ(i)).

Phase changer 205B receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204Band control signal 200, applies a phase change to weighting synthesizedsignal 204B based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 206B. Note that phase-changed signal 206B is expressed as z2(t).z2(t) is defined as a complex number and may be an actual number.

Next, specific operations performed by phase changer 205B will bedescribed. In phase changer 205B, for example, a phase change of y(i) isapplied to z2′(i). Accordingly, z2(i) can be expressed asz2(i)=y(i)×z2′(i). Note that i is a symbol number and is an integer thatis greater than or equal to 0.

For example, the phase change value is set as indicated in Equation (2).Note that N is an integer that is greater than or equal to 2, andrepresents the number of phase change cycles. N≠M is satisfied. When Nis set to an odd number greater than or equal to 3, data receptionquality may increase. However, Equation (2) is merely a non-limitingexample. Here, phase change value y(i)=e^(j×δ(i)).

Here, z1(i) and z2(i) can be expressed with Equation (51).

Note that δ(i) and λ(i) are actual numbers. z1(i) and z2(i) aretransmitted from the transmission device at the same time and using thesame frequency (same frequency band). In Equation (51), the phase changevalue is not limited to the value used in Equations (2) and (51); forexample, a method in which the phase is changed cyclically or regularlyis conceivable.

As described in Embodiment 1, conceivable examples of the (precoding)matrix inserted in Equation (49) and Equation (51) are illustrated inEquation (5) through Equation (36). However, the precoding matrix is notlimited to these examples. The same applies to Embodiment 1.

Inserter 207A receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204A,pilot symbol signal pa(t)251A, preamble signal 252, control informationsymbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and based on information onthe frame configuration included in control signal 200, outputs basebandsignal 208A based on the frame configuration. Note that t indicatestime.

Similarly, inserter 207B receives inputs of phase-changed signal 206B,pilot symbol signal pb(t)251B, preamble signal 252, control informationsymbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and based on information onthe frame configuration included in control signal 200, outputs basebandsignal 208B based on the frame configuration.

Phase changer 209B receives inputs of baseband signal 208B and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210B. Basebandsignal 208B is a function of symbol number i, and is expressed as x′(i).Then, phase-changed signal x(i)210B can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i). Here, i is an integer that is greater than orequal to 0, and j is an imaginary number unit.

Note that the operation performed by phase changer 209B may be CDD/CSDdisclosed in NPTL 2 and 3, as described in Embodiment 1. Phase changer209B then applies a phase change to a symbol present along the frequencyaxis. Phase changer 209B applies a phase change to, for example, a datasymbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a control information symbol.

FIG. 3 illustrates one example of a configuration of radio units 107_Aand 107_B illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 4 illustrates a frameconfiguration of transmission signal 108_A illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 5illustrates a frame configuration of transmission signal 108_Billustrated in FIG. 1. Description of these is given in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

When a symbol is present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 4 and a symbolis present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 5, the symbol in carrier A attime $B in FIG. 4 and the symbol in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 5 aretransmitted at the same time and same frequency. Note that the frameconfiguration is not limited to the configurations illustrated in FIG. 4and FIG. 5; FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are mere examples of frame configurations.

The other symbols in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are symbols corresponding to“preamble signal 252 and control information symbol signal 253 in FIG.2”. Accordingly, when an other symbol 503 in FIG. 5 at the same time andsame frequency (same carrier) as an other symbol 403 in FIG. 4 transmitscontrol information, it transmits the same data (the same controlinformation).

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 4 and theframe of FIG. 5 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 4 or the frame of FIG. 5 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

FIG. 6 illustrates one example of components relating to controlinformation generation for generating control information symbol signal253 illustrated in FIG. 2. FIG. 6 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 7 illustrates one example of a configuration of antenna unit #A109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B illustrated in FIG. 1. In this example,antenna unit #A 109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B include a plurality ofantennas. FIG. 7 is described in Embodiment 1. Accordingly, descriptionwill be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 8 illustrates one example of a configuration of a reception devicethat receives a modulated signal upon the transmission deviceillustrated in FIG. 1 transmitting, for example, a transmission signalhaving the frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5. FIG. 8is described in Embodiment 1. Accordingly, description will be omittedfrom this embodiment.

FIG. 10 illustrates one example of a configuration of antenna unit #X801X and antenna unit #Y 801Y illustrated in FIG. 8. In this example,antenna unit #X 801X and antenna unit #Y 801Y include a plurality ofantennas. FIG. 10 is described in Embodiment 1. Accordingly, descriptionwill be omitted from this embodiment.

Next, signal processor 106 in the transmission device illustrated inFIG. 1 is inserted as phase changers 205A, 205B and phase changer 209B,as illustrated in FIG. 21. The characteristics and advantageous effectsof this configuration will be described.

As described with reference to FIG. 4 and FIG. 5, phase changers 205A,205B apply precoding (weighted synthesis) to mapped signal s1(i) 201Aobtained via mapping using the first sequence and mapped signal s2(i)(201B) obtained via mapping using the second sequence, and apply a phasechange to the obtained weighting synthesized signals 204A and 204B. Notethat i is a symbol number and is an integer that is greater than orequal to 0.

Phase-changed signal 206A and phase-changed signal 206B are thentransmitted at the same frequency and at the same time. Accordingly, inFIG. 4 and FIG. 5, a phase change is applied to data symbol 402 in FIG.4 and data symbol 502 in FIG. 5.

For example, FIG. 11 illustrates an extraction of carrier 1 throughcarrier 5 and time $4 through time $6 from the frame illustrated in FIG.4. Note that in FIG. 11, similar to FIG. 4, pilot symbol 401, datasymbols 402, and other symbols 403 are shown.

As described above, among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11, phasechanger 205A applies a phase change to the data symbols located at(carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5),(carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6).

Accordingly, the phase change values for the data symbols illustrated inFIG. 11 can be expressed as “e^(j×λ15(i))” for (carrier 1, time $5),“e^(j×λ25(i))” for (carrier 2, time $5), “e^(j×λ35(i))” for (carrier 3,time $5), “e^(j×λ45(i))” for (carrier 4, time $5), “e^(j×λ55(i))”(carrier 5, time $5), “e^(j×λ16(i))” for (carrier 1, time $6),“e^(j×λ26(i))” for (carrier 2, time $6), “e^(j×λ46(i))” for (carrier 4,time $6), and “e^(j×λ56(i))” for (carrier 5, time $6).

Among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11, the other symbols located at(carrier 1, time $4), (carrier 2, time $4), (carrier 3, time $4),(carrier 4, time $4), and (carrier 5, time $4), and the pilot symbollocated at (carrier 3, time $6) are not subject to phase change by phasechanger 205A.

This point is a characteristic of phase changer 205A. Note that, asillustrated in FIG. 4, data carriers are arranged at “the same carriersand the same times” as the symbols subject to phase change in FIG. 11,which are the data symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2,time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time$5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6),and (carrier 5, time $6).

In other words, in FIG. 4, the symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5),(carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5),(carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6),(carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6) are data symbols.

In other words, data symbols that perform MIMO transmission or transmita plurality of streams are subject to phase change by phase changer205A.

One example of the phase change that phase changer 205A applies to thedata symbols is the method given in Equation (50) in which phase changeis applied to the data symbols regularly such as at each cycle N.However, the method of applying the phase change to the data symbols isnot limited to this example.

For example, FIG. 11 illustrates an extraction of carrier 1 throughcarrier 5 and time $4 through time $6 from the frame illustrated in FIG.5. Note that in FIG. 11, similar to FIG. 5, pilot symbol 501, datasymbols 502, and other symbols 503 are shown.

As described above, among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11, phasechanger 205B applies a phase change to the data symbols located at(carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5),(carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6).

Accordingly, the phase change values for the data symbols illustrated inFIG. 11 can be expressed as “e^(j×δ15(i))” for (carrier 1, time $5),“e^(j×δ25(i))” for (carrier 2, time $5), “e^(j×δ35(i))” for (carrier 3,time $5), “e^(j×δ45(i))” for (carrier 4, time $5), “e^(j×δ55(i))”(carrier 5, time $5), “e^(j×δ16(i))” for (carrier 1, time $6),“e^(j×δ26(i))” for (carrier 2, time $6), “e^(j×δ46(i))” for (carrier 4,time $6), and “e^(j×δ56(i))” for (carrier 5, time $6).

Among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11, the other symbols located at(carrier 1, time $4), (carrier 2, time $4), (carrier 3, time $4),(carrier 4, time $4), and (carrier 5, time $4), and the pilot symbollocated at (carrier 3, time $6) are not subject to phase change by phasechanger 205B.

Note that, as illustrated in FIG. 4, data carriers are arranged at “thesame carriers and the same times” as the symbols subject to phase changein FIG. 11, which are the data symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5),(carrier 2, time $5). (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5),(carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6),(carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6).

In other words, in FIG. 4, the symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5),(carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5),(carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6),(carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6) are data symbols.

In other words, data symbols that perform MIMO transmission or transmita plurality of streams are subject to phase change by phase changer205B.

One example of the phase change that phase changer 205B applies to thedata symbols is the method given in Equation (2) in which phase changeis applied to the data symbols regularly, such as at each cycle N.However, the method of applying the phase change to the data symbols isnot limited to this example.

With this, when the environment is one in which the direct waves aredominant, such as in an LOS environment, it is possible to achieveimproved data reception quality in the reception device with respect tothe data symbols that perform MIMO transmission or transmit a pluralityof streams. Next, the advantageous effects of this will be described.

For example, the modulation scheme used by mapper 104 in FIG. 1 is QPSK.Mapped signal 201A in FIG. 18 is a QPSK signal, and mapped signal 201Bis a QPSK signal. In other words, two QPSK streams are transmitted.

Accordingly, for example, using channel estimated signals 806_1 and806_2, 16 candidate signal points are obtained by signal processor 811illustrated in FIG. 8. 2-bit transmission is possible with QPSK.Accordingly, since there are two streams, 4-bit transmission isachieved. Thus, there are 2⁴=16 candidate signal points.

Note that 16 other candidate signal points are obtained from usingchannel estimated signals 808_1 and 808_2 as well, but since descriptionthereof is the same as described above, the following description willfocus on the 16 candidate signal points obtained by using channelestimated signals 806_1 and 806_2.

FIG. 12 illustrates an example of the state resulting from such a case.In FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B, in-phase I is represented on the horizontalaxis and orthogonal Q is represented on the vertical axis. 16 candidatesignal points are present in the illustrated in-phase I-orthogonal Qplanes. Among the 16 candidate signal points, one is a signal point thatis transmitted by the transmission device. This is why these arereferred to as “16 candidate signal points”.

When the environment is one in which the direct waves are dominant, suchas in an LOS environment, a first conceivable case is “when phasechangers 205A 205B are omitted from the configuration illustrated inFIG. 21, in other words, when phase change is not applied by phasechangers 205A, 205B in FIG. 21”.

In the first case, since phase change is not applied, there is apossibility that the state illustrated in FIG. 12A will be realized.When the state falls into the state illustrated in FIG. 12A, asillustrated by “signal points 1201 and 1202”, “signal points 1203, 1204,1205, and 1206”, and “signal points 1207, 1208”, the signal pointsbecome dense, that is to say, the distances between some signal pointsshorten. Accordingly, in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8,data reception quality may decrease.

In order to remedy this phenomenon, in FIG. 21, phase changers 205A,205B are inserted. When phase changers 205A, 205B are inserted, due tosymbol number i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal pointsare dense, such as in FIG. 12A, and symbol numbers whose “distancebetween signal points is long”, such as in FIG. 12B. With respect tothis state, since error correction code is introduced, high errorcorrection performance is achieved, and in the reception deviceillustrated in FIG. 8, high data reception quality is achieved.

Note that in FIG. 21, a phase change is not applied by phase changers205A, 205B in FIG. 21 to “pilot symbols, preamble” for demodulating(wave detection of) data symbols, such as pilot symbols and a preamble,and for channel estimation. With this, among data symbols, “due tosymbol number i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal pointsare dense, such as in FIG. 12A, and symbol numbers whose “distancebetween signal points is long”, such as in FIG. 12B” can be realized.

However, even if a phase change is applied by phase changers 205A, 205Bin FIG. 21 to “pilot symbols, preamble” for demodulating (wave detectionof) data symbols, such as pilot symbols and a preamble, and for channelestimation, the following is possible: “among data symbols, “due tosymbol number i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal pointsare dense, such as in FIG. 12A, and symbol numbers whose “distancebetween signal points is long”, such as in FIG. 12B” can be realized.

In such a case, a phase change must be applied to pilot symbols and/or apreamble under some condition. For example, one conceivable method is toimplement a rule which is separate from the rule for applying a phasechange to a data symbol, and “applying a phase change to a pilot symboland/or a preamble”. Another example is a method of regularly applying aphase change to a data symbol in a cycle N, and regularly applying aphase change to a pilot symbol and/or a preamble in a cycle M. N and Mare integers that are greater than or equal to 2.

As described above, phase changer 209A receives inputs of basebandsignal 208A and control signal 200, applies a phase change to basebandsignal 208A based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 210A. Baseband signal 208A is a function of symbol number i, andis expressed as x′(i). Then, phase-changed signal 210A (x(i)) can beexpressed as x(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i). Here, i is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0, and j is an imaginary number unit.

Note that the operation performed by phase changer 209A may be CDD/CSDdisclosed in NPTL 2 and 3. Phase changer 209A then applies a phasechange to a symbol present along the frequency axis. In other words,phase changer 209A applies a phase change to, for example, a datasymbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a control information symbol.Accordingly, in such a case, symbols subject to symbol number i includedata symbols, pilot symbols, control information symbols, and preambles(other symbols).

In the case of FIG. 21, since phase changer 209A applies a phase changeto baseband signal 208A, a phase change is applied to each symbol inFIG. 4.

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 4, phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 21 applies a phase change to all symbols (othersymbols 403) for all carriers at time $1.

Similarly, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 21 applies a phasechange to the following symbols: “all symbols (other symbols 403) forall carriers at time $2”, “all symbols (other symbols 403) for allcarriers at time $3”, “all symbols (other symbols 403) for all carriersat time $4”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) forall carriers at time $5”. “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or datasymbols 402) for all carriers at time $6”, “all symbols (pilot symbols401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers at time $7”, “all symbols(pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers at time $8”,“all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers attime $9”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for allcarriers at time $10”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols402) for all carriers at time $11”. Recitation for other times andcarriers is omitted.

FIG. 13 illustrates a frame configuration different from the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 4 of transmission signal 108_Aillustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 13 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 14 illustrates a frame configuration different from the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 5 of transmission signal 108_Billustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 14 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

When a symbol is present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 13 and a symbolis present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 14, the symbol in carrier Aat time $B in FIG. 13 and the symbol in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 14are transmitted at the same time and same frequency. Note that the frameconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are merely examples.

The other symbols in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are symbols corresponding to“preamble signal 252 and control information symbol signal 253 in FIG.21”. Accordingly, when an other symbol 403 in FIG. 13 at the same timeand same frequency (same carrier) as an other symbol 503 in FIG. 14transmits control information, it transmits the same data (the samecontrol information).

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 13 and theframe of FIG. 14 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 13 or the frame of FIG. 14 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

Phase changer 209A receives inputs of baseband signal 208A and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208A based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210A. Basebandsignal 208A is a function of symbol symbol number i, and is expressed asx′(i). Then, phase-changed signal x(i)210A can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i). Here, i is an integer that is greater than orequal to 0, and j is an imaginary number unit.

Note that the operation performed by phase changer 209A may be CDD/CSDdisclosed in NPTL 2 and 3. Phase changer 209A then applies a phasechange to a symbol present along the frequency axis. In other words,phase changer 209A applies a phase change to, for example, a datasymbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a control information symbol. Here, anull symbol may be considered as a target for application of a phasechange.

Accordingly, symbols subject to symbol number i include, for example,data symbols, pilot symbols, control information symbols, preambles(other symbols), and null symbols.

However, since the in-phase component I is zero (0) and the orthogonalcomponent Q is zero (0), even if a phase change is applied to a nullsymbol, the signals before and after the phase change are the same.Accordingly, it is possible to construe a null symbol as not a targetfor a phase change. In the case of FIG. 21, since phase changer 209Aapplies a phase change to baseband signal 208A, a phase change isapplied to each symbol in FIG. 13.

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 13, phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 21 applies a phase change to all symbols (othersymbols 403) for all carriers at time $1. However, the handling of thephase change with respect to null symbol 1301 is as previouslydescribed.

Similarly, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 21 applies a phasechange to the following symbols: “all symbols (other symbols 403) forall carriers at time $2”, “all symbols (other symbols 403) for allcarriers at time $3”, “all symbols (other symbols 403) for all carriersat time $4”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) forall carriers at time $5”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or datasymbols 402) for all carriers at time $6”, “all symbols (pilot symbols401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers at time $7”, “all symbols(pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers at time $8”,“all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers attime $9”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for allcarriers at time $10”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols402) for all carriers at time $11”. However, the handling of the phasechange with respect to null symbol 1301 for all carriers at all times isas previously described. Recitation for other times and carriers isomitted.

The phase change value of phase changer 209A is expressed as Ω(i).Baseband signal 208A is x′(i) and phase-changed signal 210A is x(i).Accordingly x(i)=Ω(i)×x′(i) holds true.

For example, the phase change value is set as in Equation (38). Q is aninteger that is greater than or equal to 2, and represents the number ofphase change cycles. j is an imaginary number unit. However, Equation(38) is merely a non-limiting example.

For example, Ω(i) may be set so as to implement a phase change thatyields a cycle Q.

Moreover, for example, in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13, the same phase changevalue is applied to the same carriers, and the phase change value may beset on a per carrier basis. For example, the following may beimplemented.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (39)for carrier 1 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (40)for carrier 2 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (41)for carrier 3 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (42)for carrier 4 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13. Recitation for other carriers isomitted.

This concludes the operational example of phase changer 209A illustratedin FIG. 21.

Next, the advantageous effects obtained by phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 21 will be described.

The other symbols 403, 503 in “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5” or “theframes of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14” may include a control information symbol.As previously described, when an other symbol 503 in FIG. 5 at the sametime and same frequency (in the same carrier) as an other symbol 403transmits control information, it transmits the same data (same controlinformation).

As case 2, “transmitting a control information symbol using eitherantenna unit #A 109_A or antenna unit #B 109_B illustrated in FIG. 1” isconceivable.

When transmission according to “case 2” is performed, since only oneantenna is used to transmit the control information symbol, compared towhen “transmitting a control information symbol using both antenna unit#A 109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B” is performed, spatial diversity gainis less. Accordingly, in “case 2”, data reception quality decreases evenwhen received by the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8.Accordingly, from the perspective of improving data reception quality,“transmitting a control information symbol using both antenna unit #A109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B” is more beneficial.

As case 3, “transmitting a control information symbol using both antennaunit #A 109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B illustrated in FIG. 1. However,phase change is not implemented by phase changer 209A illustrated inFIG. 21” is conceivable.

When transmission according to “case 3” is performed, since themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #A 109_A and themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #B 109_B are the same orexhibit a specific phase shift, depending on the radio wave propagationenvironment, the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 may receive aninferior reception signal, and both modulated signal may be subjected tothe same multipath effect. Accordingly, in the reception deviceillustrated in FIG. 8, data reception quality decreases.

In order to remedy this phenomenon, in FIG. 21, phase changer 209A isinserted. Since this changes the phase along the time or frequency axis,in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8, it is possible to reducethe probability of reception of an inferior reception signal. Moreover,since there is a high probability that there will be a difference in themultipath effect that the modulated signal transmitted from antenna unit#A 109_A is subjected to with respect to the multipath effect that themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #B 109_B is subjected to,there is a high probability that diversity gain will result, andaccordingly, that data reception quality in the reception deviceillustrated in FIG. 8 will improve.

For these reasons, in FIG. 21, phase changer 209A is provided and phasechange is implemented.

Other symbols 403 and other symbols 503 include, in addition to controlinformation symbols, for example, symbols for signal detection, symbolsfor performing frequency and time synchronization, and symbols forperforming channel estimation (a symbol for performing propagation pathfluctuation estimation), for demodulating and decoding controlinformation symbols. Moreover, “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5” or “theframes of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14” include pilot symbols 401, 501, and byusing these, it is possible to perform demodulation and decoding withhigh precision via control information symbols.

Moreover, “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5” or “the frames of FIG. 13and FIG. 14” transmit a plurality of streams or perform MIMOtransmission at the same time and using the same frequency (frequencyband) via data symbols 402 and data symbols 502. In order to demodulatethese data symbols, symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequencyand time synchronization, and symbols for channel estimation, which areincluded in other symbols 403 and other symbols 503, are used.

Here, “symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequency and timesynchronization, and symbols for channel estimation, which are includedin other symbols 403 and other symbols 503” are applied with a phasechange by phase changer 209A, as described above.

Under these circumstances, when this processing is not performed “ondata symbols 402 and data symbols 502” or “on data symbols 402 in theexample above”, in the reception device, when data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502 are demodulated and decoded, there is a need to perform thedemodulation and decoding in which the processing for the phase changeby phase changer 209A was performed, and there is a probability thatthis processing will be complicated.

This is because “symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequency andtime synchronization, and symbols for channel estimation, which areincluded in other symbols 403 and other symbols 503” are applied with aphase change by phase changer 209A.

However, as illustrated in FIG. 21, in phase changer 209A, when a phasechange is applied to data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 (to datasymbols 402 in the example above), in the reception device, there is theadvantage that data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 can simply bedemodulated and decoded using the channel estimation signal (propagationpath fluctuation signal) estimated by using “symbols for signaldetection, symbols for frequency and time synchronization, and symbolsfor channel estimation, which are included in other symbols 403 andother symbols 503”.

Additionally as illustrated in FIG. 21, in phase changer 209A, when aphase change is applied to data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 (anddata symbols 402 in the example above), in multipath environments, it ispossible to reduce the influence of sharp drops in electric fieldintensity along the frequency axis. Accordingly, it is possible toobtain the advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality of data symbols 402 and data symbols 502.

In this way, the point that “symbols that are targets for implementationof a phase change by phase changers 205A, 205B” and “symbols that aretargets for implementation of a phase change by phase changer 209A” aredifferent is a characteristic point.

As described above, by applying a phase change using phase changers205A, 205B illustrated in FIG. 21, it is possible to achieve theadvantageous effect of an improvement in data reception quality of datasymbols 402 and data symbols 502 in the reception device in, forexample, LOS environments, and by applying a phase change using phasechanger 209A illustrated in FIG. 21, for example, it is possible toachieve the advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality in the reception device of the control information symbolsincluded in “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5” or “the frames of FIG. 13and FIG. 14” and the advantageous effect that operations of demodulationand decoding of data symbols 402 and data symbols 502 become simple.

Note that the advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality in the reception device of data symbols 402 and data symbols 502in, for example, LOS environments, is achieved as a result of the phasechange implemented by phase changers 205A, 205B illustrated in FIG. 21,and furthermore, the reception quality of data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502 is improved by applying a phase change to data symbols 402and data symbols 502 using phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 21.

Note that Q in Equation (38) may be an integer of −2 or less. In such acase, the value for the phase change cycle is the absolute value of Q.This feature is applicable to Embodiment 1 as well.

Embodiment 6

In this embodiment, an implementation method will be described that isdifferent from the configuration illustrated in FIG. 2 and described inEmbodiment 1.

FIG. 1 illustrates one example of a configuration of a transmissiondevice according to this embodiment, such as a base station, accesspoint, or broadcast station. As FIG. 1 is described in detail inEmbodiment 1, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

Signal processor 106 receives inputs of mapped signals 105_1 and 105_2,signal group 110, and control signal 100, performs signal processingbased on control signal 100, and outputs processed signals 106_A and106_B. Here, processed signal 106_A is expressed as u1(i), and processedsignal 106_B is expressed as u2(i). i is a symbol number, and, forexample, is an integer that is greater than or equal to 0. Note thatdetails regarding the signal processing will be described with referenceto FIG. 22 later.

FIG. 22 illustrates one example of a configuration of signal processor106 illustrated in FIG. 1. Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203 receivesinputs of mapped signal 201A (mapped signal 105_1 in FIG. 1), mappedsignal 201B (mapped signal 105_2 in FIG. 1), and control signal 200(control signal 100 in FIG. 1), performs weighting synthesis (precoding)based on control signal 200, and outputs weighted signal 204A andweighted signal 204B.

Here, mapped signal 201A is expressed as s1(t), mapped signal 201B isexpressed as s2(t), weighted signal 204A is expressed as z1′(t), andweighted signal 204B is expressed as z2′(t). Note that one example of tis time. s1(t), s2(t), z1′(t), and z2′(t) are defined as complexnumbers, and as such, may be actual numbers.

Here, these are given as functions of time, but may be functions of a“frequency (carrier number)”, and may be functions of “time andfrequency”. These may also be a function of a “symbol number”. Note thatthis also applies to Embodiment 1.

Weighting synthesizer (precoder) 203 performs the calculations indicatedin Equation (49).

Phase changer 205A receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204Aand control signal 200, applies a phase change to weighting synthesizedsignal 204A based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 206A. Note that phase-changed signal 206A is expressed as z1(t).z1(t) is defined as a complex number and may be an actual number.

Next, specific operations performed by phase changer 205A will bedescribed. In phase changer 205A, for example, a phase change of w(i) isapplied to z1′(i). Accordingly, z1(i) can be expressed asz1(i)=w(i)×z1′(i). Note that i is a symbol number and is an integer thatis greater than or equal to 0.

For example, the phase change value is set as indicated in Equation(50).

M is an integer that is greater than or equal to 2, and represents thenumber of phase change cycles. When M is set to an odd number greaterthan or equal to 3, data reception quality may increase. However,Equation (50) is merely a non-limiting example. Here, phase change valuew(i)=e^(j×λ(i)).

Phase changer 205B receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204Band control signal 200, applies a phase change to weighting synthesizedsignal 204B based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 206B. Note that phase-changed signal 206B is expressed as z2(t).z2(t) is defined as a complex number and may be an actual number.

Next, specific operations performed by phase changer 205B will bedescribed. In phase changer 205B, for example, a phase change of y(i) isapplied to z2′(i). Accordingly, z2(i) can be expressed asz2(i)=y(i)×z2′(i). Note that i is a symbol number and is an integer thatis greater than or equal to 0.

For example, the phase change value is set as indicated in Equation (2).Note that N is an integer that is greater than or equal to 2, andrepresents the number of phase change cycles. N≠M is satisfied. When Nis set to an odd number greater than or equal to 3, data receptionquality may increase. However, Equation (2) is merely a non-limitingexample. Here, phase change value y(i)=e^(j×δ(i)).

Here, z1(i) and z2(i) can be expressed with Equation (51).

Note that δ(i) and λ(i) are actual numbers. z1(i) and z2(i) aretransmitted from the transmission device at the same time and using thesame frequency (same frequency band). In Equation (51), the phase changevalue is not limited to the value used in Equations (2) and (51); forexample, a method in which the phase is changed cyclically or regularlyis conceivable.

As described in Embodiment 1, conceivable examples of the (precoding)matrix inserted in Equation (49) and Equation (51) are illustrated inEquation (5) through Equation (36). However, the precoding matrix is notlimited to these examples. This also applies to Embodiment 1.

Inserter 207A receives inputs of weighting synthesized signal 204A,pilot symbol signal pa(t)251A, preamble signal 252, control informationsymbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and based on information onthe frame configuration included in control signal 200, outputs basebandsignal 208A based on the frame configuration. t is time.

Similarly, inserter 207B receives inputs of phase-changed signal 206B,pilot symbol signal pb(t)251B, preamble signal 252, control informationsymbol signal 253, and control signal 200, and based on information onthe frame configuration included in control signal 200, outputs basebandsignal 208B based on the frame configuration.

Phase changer 209B receives inputs of baseband signal 208B and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210B. Basebandsignal 208B is a function of symbol number i (i is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0), and is expressed as x′(i). Then,phase-changed signal 210B (x(i)) can be expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i). j is an imaginary number unit.

Note that the operation performed by phase changer 209B may be CDD/CSDdisclosed in NPTL 2 and 3, as described in Embodiment 1. Phase changer209B then applies a phase change to a symbol present along the frequencyaxis. Phase changer 209B applies a phase change to, for example, a datasymbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a control information symbol.

FIG. 3 illustrates one example of a configuration of radio units 107_Aand 107_B illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 3 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 4 illustrates a frame configuration of transmission signal 108_Aillustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 4 is described in Embodiment 1. Accordingly,description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 5 illustrates a frame configuration of transmission signal 108_Billustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 5 is described in Embodiment 1. Accordingly,description will be omitted from this embodiment.

When a symbol is present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 4 and a symbolis present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 5, the symbol in carrier A attime $B in FIG. 4 and the symbol in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 5 aretransmitted at the same time and same frequency. Note that the frameconfiguration is not limited to the configurations illustrated in FIG. 4and FIG. 5; FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are mere examples of frame configurations.

The other symbols in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are symbols corresponding to“preamble signal 252 and control information symbol signal 253 in FIG.2”. Accordingly, when an other symbol 503 in FIG. 5 at the same time andsame frequency (same carrier) as an other symbol 403 in FIG. 4 transmitscontrol information, it transmits the same data (the same controlinformation).

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 4 and theframe of FIG. 5 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 4 or the frame of FIG. 5 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

FIG. 6 illustrates one example of components relating to controlinformation generation for generating control information symbol signal253 illustrated in FIG. 2. FIG. 6 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 7 illustrates one example of a configuration of antenna unit #A109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B illustrated in FIG. 1. In this example,antenna unit #A 109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B include a plurality ofantennas. FIG. 7 is described in Embodiment 1. Accordingly, descriptionwill be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 8 illustrates one example of a configuration of a reception devicethat receives a modulated signal upon the transmission deviceillustrated in FIG. 1 transmitting, for example, a transmission signalhaving the frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5. FIG. 8is described in Embodiment 1. Accordingly, description will be omittedfrom this embodiment.

FIG. 10 illustrates one example of a configuration of antenna unit #X801X and antenna unit #Y 801Y illustrated in FIG. 8. In this example,antenna unit #X 801X and antenna unit #Y 801Y include a plurality ofantennas. FIG. 10 is described in Embodiment 1. Accordingly, descriptionwill be omitted from this embodiment.

Next, signal processor 106 in the transmission device illustrated inFIG. 1 is inserted as phase changers 205A, 205B and phase changer 209B,as illustrated in FIG. 22. The characteristics and advantageous effectsof this configuration will be described.

As described with reference to FIG. 4 and FIG. 5, phase changers 205A,205B apply precoding (weighted synthesis) to mapped signal s1(i) 201Aobtained via mapping using the first sequence and mapped signal s2(i)201B obtained via mapping using the second sequence, and apply a phasechange to the obtained weighting synthesized signals 204A and 204B. Notethat i is a symbol number and is an integer that is greater than orequal to 0.

Phase-changed signal 206A and phase-changed signal 206B are thentransmitted at the same frequency and at the same time. Accordingly, inFIG. 4 and FIG. 5, a phase change is applied to data symbol 402 in FIG.4 and data symbol 502 in FIG. 5.

For example, FIG. 11 illustrates an extraction of carrier 1 throughcarrier 5 and time $4 through time $6 from the frame illustrated in FIG.4. Note that in FIG. 11, similar to FIG. 4, pilot symbol 401, datasymbols 402, and other symbols 403 are shown.

As described above, among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11, phasechanger 205A applies a phase change to the data symbols located at(carrier 1, time $5). (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5),(carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6).

Accordingly, the phase change values for the data symbols illustrated inFIG. 11 can be expressed as “e^(j×λ15(i))” for (carrier 1, time $5),“e^(j×λ25(i))” for (carrier 2, time $5), “e^(j×λ35(i))” for (carrier 3,time $5), “e^(j×λ45(i))” for (carrier 4, time $5), “e^(j×λ55(i))”(carrier 5, time $5), “e^(j×λ16(i))” for (carrier 1, time $6),“e^(j×λ26(i))” for (carrier 2, time $6), “e^(j×λ46(i))” for (carrier 4,time $6), and “e^(j×λ56(i))” for (carrier 5, time $6).

Among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11, the other symbols located at(carrier 1, time $4), (carrier 2, time $4), (carrier 3, time $4),(carrier 4, time $4), and (carrier 5, time $4), and the pilot symbollocated at (carrier 3, time $6) are not subject to phase change by phasechanger 205A.

This point is a characteristic of phase changer 205A. Note that, asillustrated in FIG. 4, data carriers are arranged at “the same carriersand the same times” as the symbols subject to phase change in FIG. 11,which are the data symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2,time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time$5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6),and (carrier 5, time $6).

In other words, in FIG. 4, the symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5),(carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5),(carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6),(carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6) are data symbols.

In other words, data symbols that perform MIMO transmission or transmita plurality of streams are subject to phase change by phase changer205A.

One example of the phase change that phase changer 205A applies to thedata symbols is the method given in Equation (50) in which phase changeis applied to the data symbols regularly such as at each cycle N.However, the method of applying the phase change to the data symbols isnot limited to this example.

For example, FIG. 11 illustrates an extraction of carrier 1 throughcarrier 5 and time $4 through time $6 from the frame illustrated in FIG.5. Note that in FIG. 11, similar to FIG. 5, pilot symbol 501, datasymbols 502, and other symbols 503 are shown.

As described above, among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11, phasechanger 205B applies a phase change to the data symbols located at(carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5),(carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6),(carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6).

Accordingly, the phase change values for the data symbols illustrated inFIG. 11 can be expressed as “e^(j×δ15(i))” for (carrier 1, time $5),“e^(j×δ25(i))” for (carrier 2, time $5), “e^(j×δ35(i))” for (carrier 3,time $5), “e^(j×δ45(i))” for (carrier 4, time $5), “e^(j×δ55(i))”(carrier 5, time $5), “e^(j×δ16(i))” for (carrier 1, time $6),“e^(j×δ26(i))” for (carrier 2, time $6), “e^(j×δ46(i))” for (carrier 4,time $6), and “e^(j×δ56(i))” for (carrier 5, time $6).

Among the symbols illustrated in FIG. 11, the other symbols located at(carrier 1, time $4), (carrier 2, time $4), (carrier 3, time $4),(carrier 4, time $4), and (carrier 5, time $4), and the pilot symbollocated at (carrier 3, time $6) are not subject to phase change by phasechanger 205B.

This point is a characteristic of phase changer 205B. Note that, asillustrated in FIG. 4, data carriers are arranged at “the same carriersand the same times” as the symbols subject to phase change in FIG. 11,which are the data symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5), (carrier 2,time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5), (carrier 5, time$5). (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6), (carrier 4, time $6),and (carrier 5, time $6).

In other words, in FIG. 4, the symbols located at (carrier 1, time $5),(carrier 2, time $5), (carrier 3, time $5), (carrier 4, time $5),(carrier 5, time $5), (carrier 1, time $6), (carrier 2, time $6),(carrier 4, time $6), and (carrier 5, time $6) are data symbols.

In other words, data symbols that perform MIMO transmission or transmita plurality of streams are subject to phase change by phase changer205B.

One example of the phase change that phase changer 205B applies to thedata symbols is the method given in Equation (2) in which phase changeis applied to the data symbols regularly, such as at each cycle N.However, the method of applying the phase change to the data symbols isnot limited to this example.

With this, when the environment is one in which the direct waves aredominant, such as in an LOS environment, it is possible to achieveimproved data reception quality in the reception device with respect tothe data symbols that perform MIMO transmission or transmit a pluralityof streams. Next, the advantageous effects of this will be described.

For example, the modulation scheme used by mapper 104 in FIG. 1 is QPSK.Mapped signal 201A in FIG. 18 is a QPSK signal, and mapped signal 201Bis a QPSK signal. In other words, two QPSK streams are transmitted.

Accordingly, for example, using channel estimated signals 806_1 and806_2, 16 candidate signal points are obtained by signal processor 811illustrated in FIG. 8. 2-bit transmission is possible with QPSK.Accordingly, since there are two streams, 4-bit transmission isachieved. Thus, there are 2⁴=16 candidate signal points.

Note that 16 other candidate signal points are obtained from usingchannel estimated signals 808_1 and 808_2 as well, but since descriptionthereof is the same as described above, the following description willfocus on the 16 candidate signal points obtained by using channelestimated signals 806_1 and 806_2.

FIG. 12 illustrates an example of the state resulting from such a case.In FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B, in-phase I is represented on the horizontalaxis and orthogonal Q is represented on the vertical axis. 16 candidatesignal points are present in the illustrated in-phase I-orthogonal Qplanes. Among the 16 candidate signal points, one is a signal point thatis transmitted by the transmission device. This is why these arereferred to as “16 candidate signal points”.

When the environment is one in which the direct waves are dominant, suchas in an LOS environment, a first conceivable case is “when phasechangers 205A, 205B are omitted from the configuration illustrated inFIG. 22, in other words, when phase change is not applied by phasechangers 205A, 205B in FIG. 22”.

In the first case, since phase change is not applied, there is apossibility that the state illustrated in FIG. 12A will be realized.When the state falls into the state illustrated in FIG. 12A, asillustrated by “signal points 1201 and 1202”, “signal points 1203, 1204,1205, and 1206”, and “signal points 1207, 1208”, the signal pointsbecome dense, that is to say, the distances between some signal pointsshorten. Accordingly, in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8,data reception quality may decrease.

In order to remedy this phenomenon, in FIG. 22, phase changers 205A,205B are inserted. When phase changers 205A, 205B are inserted, due tosymbol number i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal pointsare dense, such as in FIG. 12A, and symbol numbers whose “distancebetween signal points is long”, such as in FIG. 12B. With respect tothis state, since error correction code is introduced, high errorcorrection performance is achieved, and in the reception deviceillustrated in FIG. 8, high data reception quality is achieved.

Note that in FIG. 22, a phase change is not applied by phase changers205A, 205B in FIG. 22 to “pilot symbols, preamble” for demodulating(wave detection of) data symbols, such as pilot symbols and a preamble,and for channel estimation. With this, among data symbols, “due tosymbol number i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal pointsare dense, such as in FIG. 12A, and symbol numbers whose “distancebetween signal points is long”, such as in FIG. 12B” can be realized.

However, even if a phase change is applied by phase changers 205A, 205Bin FIG. 22 to “pilot symbols, preamble” for demodulating (wave detectionof) data symbols, such as pilot symbols and a preamble, and for channelestimation, the following is possible: “among data symbols, “due tosymbol number i, there is a mix of symbol numbers whose signal pointsare dense, such as in FIG. 12A, and symbol numbers whose “distancebetween signal points is long”, such as in FIG. 12B” can be realized.

In such a case, a phase change must be applied to pilot symbols and/or apreamble under some condition. For example, one conceivable method is toimplement a rule which is separate from the rule for applying a phasechange to a data symbol, and “applying a phase change to a pilot symboland/or a preamble”. Another example is a method of regularly applying aphase change to a data symbol in a cycle N, and regularly applying aphase change to a pilot symbol and/or a preamble in a cycle M. N and Mare integers that are greater than or equal to 2.

As described above, phase changer 209A receives inputs of basebandsignal 208A and control signal 200, applies a phase change to basebandsignal 208A based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 210A. Baseband signal 208A is a function of symbol number i, andis expressed as x′(i). Then, phase-changed signal x(i)210A can beexpressed as x(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i). Here, i is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0, and j is an imaginary number unit.

Note that the operation performed by phase changer 209A may be CDD/CSDdisclosed in NPTL 2 and 3. Phase changer 209A then applies a phasechange to a symbol present along the frequency axis. In other words,phase changer 209A applies a phase change to, for example, a datasymbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a control information symbol.

Accordingly, in such a case, symbols subject to symbol number i includedata symbols, pilot symbols, control information symbols, and preambles(other symbols). In the case of FIG. 22, since phase changer 209Aapplies a phase change to baseband signal 208A, a phase change isapplied to each symbol in FIG. 4.

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 4, phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (othersymbols 403) for all carriers at time $1.

Similarly, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phasechange to the following symbols: “all symbols (other symbols 403) forall carriers at time $2”, “all symbols (other symbols 403) for allcarriers at time $3”, “all symbols (other symbols 403) for all carriersat time $4”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) forall carriers at time $5”. “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or datasymbols 402) for all carriers at time $6”, “all symbols (pilot symbols401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers at time $7”, “all symbols(pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers at time $8”,“all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers attime $9”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for allcarriers at time $10”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols402) for all carriers at time $11”. Recitation for all other times andcarriers is omitted.

As described above, phase changer 209B receives inputs of basebandsignal 208B and control signal 200, applies a phase change to basebandsignal 208B based on control signal 200, and outputs phase-changedsignal 210B. Baseband signal 208B is a function of symbol number i, andis expressed as y′(i). Then, phase-changed signal y(i)210B can beexpressed as y(i)=e^(j×η(i))×y′(i). Here, i is an integer that isgreater than or equal to 0, and j is an imaginary number unit.

Note that the operation performed by phase changer 209B may be CDD/CSDdisclosed in NPTL 2 and 3. Phase changer 209B then applies a phasechange to a symbol present along the frequency axis. Phase changer 209Bapplies a phase change to, for example, a data symbol, a pilot symbol,and/or a control information symbol.

Accordingly, in such a case, symbols subject to symbol number i includedata symbols, pilot symbols, control information symbols, and preambles(other symbols). In the case of FIG. 22, since phase changer 209Bapplies a phase change to baseband signal 208B, a phase change isapplied to each symbol in FIG. 5.

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 5, phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (othersymbols 503) for all carriers at time $1.

Similarly, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phasechange to the following symbols: “all symbols (other symbols 503) forall carriers at time $2”, “all symbols (other symbols 503) for allcarriers at time $3”, “all symbols (other symbols 503) for all carriersat time $4”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) forall carriers at time $5”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or datasymbols 502) for all carriers at time $6”, “all symbols (pilot symbols501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers at time $7”, “all symbols(pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers at time $8”,“all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers attime $9”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for allcarriers at time $10”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols502) for all carriers at time $11”. Recitation for other times andcarriers is omitted.

FIG. 13 illustrates a frame configuration different from the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 4 of transmission signal 108_Aillustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 13 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

FIG. 14 illustrates a frame configuration different from the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 5 of transmission signal 108_Billustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 14 is described in Embodiment 1.Accordingly, description will be omitted from this embodiment.

When a symbol is present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 13 and a symbolis present in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 14, the symbol in carrier Aat time $B in FIG. 13 and the symbol in carrier A at time $B in FIG. 14are transmitted at the same time and same frequency. Note that the frameconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are merely examples.

The other symbols in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are symbols corresponding to“preamble signal 252 and control information symbol signal 253 in FIG.22”. Accordingly, when an other symbol 403 in FIG. 13 at the same timeand same frequency (same carrier) as an other symbol 503 in FIG. 14transmits control information, it transmits the same data (the samecontrol information).

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 13 and theframe of FIG. 14 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 13 or the frame of FIG. 14 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

Phase changer 209A receives inputs of baseband signal 208A and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208A based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210A. Basebandsignal 208A is a function of symbol symbol number i, and is expressed asx′(i). Phase-changed signal x(i) 210A is expressed asx(i)=e^(j×ε(i))×x′(i). Here, i is an integer that is greater than orequal to 0, and j is an imaginary number unit.

Note that the operation performed by phase changer 209A may be CDD/CSDdisclosed in NPTL 2 and 3. Phase changer 209A then applies a phasechange to a symbol present along the frequency axis. In other words,phase changer 209A applies a phase change to, for example, a datasymbol, a pilot symbol, and/or a control information symbol.

Here, a null symbol may be considered as a target for application of aphase change. Accordingly, symbols subject to symbol number i include,for example, data symbols, pilot symbols, control information symbols,preambles (other symbols), and null symbols.

However, since the in-phase component I is zero (0) and the orthogonalcomponent Q is zero (0), even if a phase change is applied to a nullsymbol, the signals before and after the phase change are the same.

Accordingly, it is possible to construe a null symbol as not a targetfor a phase change. In the case of FIG. 22, since phase changer 209Aapplies a phase change to baseband signal 208A, a phase change isapplied to each symbol in FIG. 13.

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 13, phase changer 209Aillustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (othersymbols 403) for all carriers at time $1. However, the handling of thephase change with respect to null symbol 1301 is as previouslydescribed.

Similarly, phase changer 209A illustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phasechange to the following symbols: “all symbols (other symbols 403) forall carriers at time $2”, “all symbols (other symbols 403) for allcarriers at time $3”, “all symbols (other symbols 403) for all carriersat time $4”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) forall carriers at time $5”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or datasymbols 402) for all carriers at time $6”, “all symbols (pilot symbols401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers at time $7”, “all symbols(pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers at time $8”,“all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for all carriers attime $9”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols 402) for allcarriers at time $10”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 401 or data symbols402) for all carriers at time $11”. However, the handling of the phasechange with respect to null symbol 1301 for all times and carriers is aspreviously described. Recitation for other times and carriers isomitted.

The phase change value of phase changer 209A is expressed as Ω(i).Baseband signal 208A is x′(i) and phase-changed signal 210A is x(i).Accordingly, x(i)=Ω(i)×x′(i) holds true.

For example, the phase change value is set as in Equation (38). Q is aninteger that is greater than or equal to 2, and represents the number ofphase change cycles. j is an imaginary number unit. However, Equation(38) is merely a non-limiting example.

For example, Ω(i) may be set so as to implement a phase change thatyields a cycle Q.

Moreover, for example, in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13, the same phase changevalue is applied to the same carriers, and the phase change value may beset on a per carrier basis. For example, the following may beimplemented.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (39)for carrier 1 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (40)for carrier 2 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (41)for carrier 3 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (42)for carrier 4 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 13. Recitation for other carriers isomitted.

This concludes the operational example of phase changer 209A illustratedin FIG. 22.

Phase changer 209B receives inputs of baseband signal 208B and controlsignal 200, applies a phase change to baseband signal 208B based oncontrol signal 200, and outputs phase-changed signal 210B. Basebandsignal 208B is a function of symbol symbol number i, and is expressed asy′(i). Then, phase-changed signal x(i)210B can be expressed asy(i)=e^(j×η(i))×y′(i). Here, i is an integer that is greater than orequal to 0, and j is an imaginary number unit.

Note that the operation performed by phase changer 209B may be CDD/CSDdisclosed in NPTL 2 and 3. Phase changer 209B then applies a phasechange to a symbol present along the frequency axis. Phase changer 209Bapplies a phase change to, for example, a data symbol, a pilot symbol,and/or a control information symbol.

Here, a null symbol may be considered as a target for application of aphase change. Accordingly symbols subject to symbol number i include,for example, data symbols, pilot symbols, control information symbols,preambles (other symbols), and null symbols.

However, since the in-phase component I is zero (0) and the orthogonalcomponent Q is zero (0), even if a phase change is applied to a nullsymbol, the signals before and after the phase change are the same.Accordingly, it is possible to construe a null symbol as not a targetfor a phase change. In the case of FIG. 22, since phase changer 209Bapplies a phase change to baseband signal 208B, a phase change isapplied to each symbol in FIG. 14.

Accordingly, in the frame illustrated in FIG. 14, phase changer 209Billustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phase change to all symbols (othersymbols 503) for all carriers at time $1. However, the handling of thephase change with respect to null symbol 1301 is as previouslydescribed.

Similarly, phase changer 209B illustrated in FIG. 22 applies a phasechange to the following symbols: “all symbols (other symbols 503) forall carriers at time $2”, “all symbols (other symbols 503) for allcarriers at time $3”, “all symbols (other symbols 503) for all carriersat time $4”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) forall carriers at time $5”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or datasymbols 502) for all carriers at time $6”, “all symbols (pilot symbols501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers at time $7”, “all symbols(pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers at time $8”,“all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for all carriers attime $9”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols 502) for allcarriers at time $10”, “all symbols (pilot symbols 501 or data symbols502) for all carriers at time $11”. However, the handling of the phasechange with respect to null symbol 1301 for all carriers at all times isas previously described. Recitation for other times and carriers isomitted.

The phase change value of phase changer 209B is expressed as Δ(i).Baseband signal 208B is y′(i) and phase-changed signal 210B is y(i).Accordingly, y(i)=Δ(i)×y′(i) holds true.

For example, the phase change value is set as in Equation (49). R is aninteger that is greater than or equal to 2, and represents the number ofphase change cycles. Note that the values for Q and R in Equation (38)may be different values.

For example, Δ(i) may be set so as to implement a phase change thatyields a cycle R.

Moreover, for example, in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14, the same phase changevalue is applied to the same carriers, and the phase change value may beset on a per carrier basis. For example, the following may beimplemented.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (39)for carrier 1 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (40)for carrier 2 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (41)for carrier 3 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14.

Regardless of time, the phase change value may be as in Equation (42)for carrier 4 in FIG. 5 and FIG. 14. Recitation for other carriers isomitted.

This concludes the operational example of phase changer 209B illustratedin FIG. 20.

Next, the advantageous effects obtained by phase changers 209A. 209Billustrated in FIG. 22 will be described.

The other symbols 403, 503 in “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5” or “theframes of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14” may include a control information symbol.As previously described, when an other symbol 503 in FIG. 5 at the sametime and same frequency (in the same carrier) as an other symbol 403transmits control information, it transmits the same data (same controlinformation).

As case 2, “transmitting a control information symbol using eitherantenna unit #A 109_A or antenna unit #B 109_B illustrated in FIG. 1” isconceivable.

When transmission according to “case 2” is performed, since only oneantenna is used to transmit the control information symbol, compared towhen “transmitting a control information symbol using both antenna unit#A 109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B” is performed, spatial diversity gainis less. Accordingly, in “case 2”, data reception quality decreases evenwhen received by the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8.Accordingly, from the perspective of improving data reception quality,“transmitting a control information symbol using both antenna unit #A109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B” is more beneficial.

As case 3, “transmitting a control information symbol using both antennaunit #A 109_A and antenna unit #B 109_B illustrated in FIG. 1. However,phase change is not implemented by phase changers 209A, 209B illustratedin FIG. 22” is conceivable.

When transmission according to “case 3” is performed, since themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #A 109_A and themodulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #B 109_B are the same orexhibit a specific phase shift, depending on the radio wave propagationenvironment, the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8 may receive aninferior reception signal, and both modulated signal may be subjected tothe same multipath effect. Accordingly, in the reception deviceillustrated in FIG. 8, data reception quality decreases.

In order to remedy this phenomenon, in FIG. 22, phase changers 209A,209B are inserted. Since this changes the phase along the time orfrequency axis, in the reception device illustrated in FIG. 8, it ispossible to reduce the probability of reception of an inferior receptionsignal. Moreover, since there is a high probability that there will be adifference in the multipath effect that the modulated signal transmittedfrom antenna unit #A 109_A is subjected to with respect to the multipatheffect that the modulated signal transmitted from antenna unit #B 109_Bis subjected to, there is a high probability that diversity gain willresult, and accordingly, that data reception quality in the receptiondevice illustrated in FIG. 8 will improve.

For these reasons, in FIG. 22, phase changers 209A, 209B are providedand phase change is implemented.

Other symbols 403 and other symbols 503 include, in addition to controlinformation symbols, for example, symbols for signal detection, symbolsfor performing frequency and time synchronization, and symbols forperforming channel estimation (a symbol for performing propagation pathfluctuation estimation), for demodulating and decoding controlinformation symbols. Moreover, “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5” or “theframes of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14” include pilot symbols 401, 501, and byusing these, it is possible to perform demodulation and decoding withhigh precision via control information symbols.

Moreover, “the frames of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5” or “the frames of FIG. 13and FIG. 14” transmit a plurality of streams or perform MIMOtransmission at the same time and using the same frequency (frequencyband) via data symbols 402 and data symbols 502. In order to demodulatethese data symbols, symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequencyand time synchronization, and symbols for channel estimation, which areincluded in other symbols 403 and other symbols 503, are used.

Here, “symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequency and timesynchronization, and symbols for channel estimation, which are includedin other symbols 403 and other symbols 503” are applied with a phasechange by phase changers 209A. 209B, as described above.

Under these circumstances, when this processing is not performed on datasymbols 402 and data symbols 502 (on data symbols 402 in the exampleabove), in the reception device, when data symbols 402 and data symbols502 are demodulated and decoded, there is a need to perform thedemodulation and decoding in which the processing for the phase changeby phase changer 209A was performed, and there is a probability thatthis processing will be complicated.

This is because “symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequency andtime synchronization, and symbols for channel estimation, which areincluded in other symbols 403 and other symbols 503” are applied with aphase change by phase changers 209A, 209B.

However, as illustrated in FIG. 22, in phase changers 209A, 209B, when aphase change is applied to data symbols 402 and data symbols 502, in thereception device, there is the advantage that data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502 can simply be demodulated and decoded using the channelestimation signal (propagation path fluctuation signal) estimated byusing “symbols for signal detection, symbols for frequency and timesynchronization, and symbols for channel estimation, which are includedin other symbols 403 and other symbols 503”.

Additionally, as illustrated in FIG. 22, in phase changers 209A, 209B,when a phase change is applied to data symbols 402 and data symbols 502,in multipath environments, it is possible to reduce the influence ofsharp drops in electric field intensity along the frequency axis.Accordingly, it is possible to obtain the advantageous effect of animprovement in data reception quality of data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502.

In this way, the point that “symbols that are targets for implementationof a phase change by phase changers 205A, 205B” and “symbols that aretargets for implementation of a phase change by phase changers 209A.209B” are different is a characteristic point.

As described above, by applying a phase change using phase changer 205Billustrated in FIG. 22, it is possible to achieve the advantageouseffect of an improvement in data reception quality of data symbols 402and data symbols 502 in the reception device in, for example, LOSenvironments, and by applying a phase change using phase changers 209A,209B illustrated in FIG. 22, for example, it is possible to achieve theadvantageous effect of an improvement in data reception quality in thereception device of the control information symbols included in “theframes of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5” or “the frames of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14” andthe advantageous effect that operations of demodulation and decoding ofdata symbols 402 and data symbols 502 become simple.

Note that the advantageous effect of an improvement in data receptionquality in the reception device of data symbols 402 and data symbols 502in, for example, LOS environments, is achieved as a result of the phasechange implemented by phase changers 205A, 205B illustrated in FIG. 22and furthermore, the reception quality of data symbols 402 and datasymbols 502 is improved by applying a phase change to data symbols 402and data symbols 502 using phase changers 209A, 209B illustrated in FIG.22.

Note that Q in Equation (38) may be an integer of −2 or less. In such acase, the value for the phase change cycle is the absolute value of Q.This feature is applicable to Embodiment 1 as well.

Note that R in Equation (49) may be an integer of −2 or less. In such acase, the value for the phase change cycle is the absolute value of R.

Moreover, taking into consideration the descriptions provided inSupplemental Information 1, the cyclic delay amount set in phase changer209A and the cyclic delay amount set in phase changer 209B may bedifferent values.

Embodiment 7

In this embodiment, an example of a communications system that employsthe transmission method and reception method described in Embodiments 1to 6 will be described.

FIG. 23 illustrates one example of a configuration of a base station,access point, or the like according to this embodiment.

Transmission device 2303 receives inputs of data 2301, signal group2302, and control signal 2309, generates a modulated signalcorresponding to data 2301 and signal group 2302, and transmits themodulated signal from an antenna.

One example of a configuration of transmission device 2303 is as isshown in FIG. 1, where data 2301 corresponds to data 101 in FIG. 1,signal group 2302 corresponds to signal group 110 in FIG. 1, and controlsignal 2309 corresponds to control signal 100 in FIG. 1.

Reception device 2304 receives a modulated signal transmitted by thecommunication partner such as a terminal, performs signal processing,demodulation, and decoding on the modulated signal, and outputs controlinformation signal 2305 from the communication partner and receptiondata 2306.

One example of a configuration of reception device 2304 is as shown inFIG. 8, where reception data 2306 corresponds to reception data 812 inFIG. 8, and control information signal 2305 from the communicationpartner corresponds to control signal 810 in FIG. 8.

Control signal generator 2308 receives inputs of control informationsignal 2305 from the communication partner and settings signal 2307, andgenerates and outputs control signal 2309 based on these inputs.

FIG. 24 illustrates one example of a configuration of a terminal, whichis the communication partner of the base station illustrated in FIG. 23.

Transmission device 2403 receives inputs of data 2401, signal group2402, and control signal 2409, generates a modulated signalcorresponding to data 2401 and signal group 2402, and transmits themodulated signal from an antenna.

One example of a configuration of transmission device 2403 is as isshown in FIG. 1, where data 2401 corresponds to data 101 in FIG. 1,signal group 2402 corresponds to signal group 110 in FIG. 1, and controlsignal 2409 corresponds to control signal 100 in FIG. 1.

Reception device 2404 receives a modulated signal transmitted by thecommunication partner such as a base station, performs signalprocessing, demodulation, and decoding on the modulated signal, andoutputs control information signal 2405 from the communication partnerand reception data 2406.

One example of a configuration of reception device 2404 is as shown inFIG. 8, where reception data 2406 corresponds to reception data 812 inFIG. 8, and control information signal 2405 from the communicationpartner corresponds to control signal 810 in FIG. 8.

Control signal generator 2408 receives inputs of control informationsignal 2305 from the communication partner and settings signal 2407, andgenerates and outputs control signal 2409 based on this information.

FIG. 25 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal transmitted by the terminal illustrated in FIG. 24. Time isrepresented on the horizontal axis. Preamble 2501 is a symbol, such as aPSK symbol, for the communication partner (for example, a base station)to perform signal detection, frequency synchronization, timesynchronization, frequency offset estimation, and/or channel estimation.Preamble 2501 may include a training symbol for directionality control.Note that, here, the terminology “preamble” is used, but differentterminology may be used.

FIG. 25 illustrates control information symbol 2502 and data symbol 2503including data to be transmitted to the communication partner.

Control information symbol 2502 includes, for example: information on anerror correction encoding method used to generate data symbol 2503, suchas information on the code length (block length) and/or encode rate;modulation scheme information, and control information for notifying thecommunication partner.

Note that FIG. 25 is merely one non-limiting example of a frameconfiguration. Moreover other symbols, such as a pilot symbol and/orreference symbol, may be included in the symbols illustrated in FIG. 25.In FIG. 25, frequency is represented on the vertical axis and symbolsare present along the frequency axis (carrier direction).

As examples of a frame configuration transmitted by the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 have been described with reference to FIG. 4,FIG. 5, FIG. 13, and FIG. 14, further description is herein omitted.Note that other symbols 403, 503 may include a training symbol forperforming directionality control. Accordingly, in this embodiment, thebase station covers a case in which a plurality of modulated signals aretransmitted using a plurality of antennas.

Next, operations performed by a base station in a communications systemsuch as described above will be described in detail.

Transmission device 2303 in the base station illustrated in FIG. 23 hasthe configuration illustrated in FIG. 1. Signal processor 106illustrated in FIG. 1 has the configuration illustrated in any one ofFIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29,FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG. 33. Note that FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG.30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG. 33 will be described later. Here,operation performed by phase changers 205A, 205B may be switcheddepending on the communications environment or the settings. Controlinformation relating to operations performed by phase changers 205A,205B is transmitted by the base station as a part of the controlinformation transmitted via control information symbols, namely, othersymbols 403, 503 in the frame configurations illustrated in FIG. 4, FIG.5, FIG. 13, and FIG. 14.

Here, control information relating to operations performed by phasechangers 205A, 205B is expressed as u0, u1. The relationship between [u0u1] and phase changers 205A, 205B is illustrated in Table 1. Note thatu0, u1 are transmitted by the base station as some of the controlinformation symbols, namely other symbols 403, 503. The terminal obtains[u0 u1] included in control information symbols, namely, other symbol403, 503, becomes aware of operations performed by phase changers 205A,205B from [u0 u1], and demodulates and decodes data symbols.

TABLE 1 u0 u1 phase changer operations 00 no phase change 01 changephase change value on a per-symbol basis (cyclically/regularly) 10implement phase change using specified phase change value (set) 11Reserve

Interpretation of Table 1 is as follows.

When the settings in the base station are configured such that phasechangers 205A, 205B do not implement a phase change, u0 is set to 0(u0=0) and u1 is set to 0 (u1=0). Accordingly, phase changer 205Aoutputs signal 206A without implementing a phase change on the inputsignal (204A). Similarly, phase changer 205B outputs signal 206B withoutimplementing a phase change on input signal 204B.

When the settings in the base station are configured such that phasechangers 205A, 205B implement a phase change cyclically/regularly on aper-symbol basis, u0 is set to 0 (u0=0) and u1 is set to 1 (u1=1). Notethat since the method used by phase changers 205A, 205B to implement aphase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis is described indetail in Embodiments 1 through 6, detailed description thereof isomitted. When signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 1 is configuredas illustrated in any one of FIG. 20, FIG. 21, and FIG. 22, u0 is alsoset to 0 (u0=0) and u1 is also set to 1 (u1=1) when the settings in thebase station are configured such that phase changer 205A implements aphase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and phasechanger 205B does not implement a phase change cyclically/regularly on aper-symbol basis, and when the settings in the base station areconfigured such that phase changer 205A does not implement a phasechange cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and phase changer 205Bimplements a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis.

When the settings in the base station are configured such that phasechangers 205A, 205B implement phase change using a specific phase changevalue, u0 is set to 1 (u0=1) and u1 is set to 0 (u1=0). Next,implementation of a phase change using a specific phase change valuewill be described.

For example, in phase changer 205A, a phase change is implemented usinga specific phase change value. Here, the input signal (204A) isexpressed as z1(i). i is a symbol number. Accordingly, when a phasechange is implemented using a specific phase change value, output signal206A is expressed as e^(jα)×z1(i). α is the specific phase change value,and is an actual number. Here, the amplitude may be changed. In such acase, output signal 206A is expressed as A×e^(jα)×z1(i). Note that A isan actual number.

Similarly, in phase changer 206A, a phase change is implemented using aspecific phase change value. Here, input signal 204B is expressed asz2(t). i is a symbol number. Accordingly, when a phase change isimplemented using a specific phase change value, output signal 206B isexpressed as e^(jδ β)×z2(i). α is the specific phase change value, andis an actual number. Here, the amplitude may be changed. In such a case,output signal 206B is expressed as B×e^(jβ)×z2(i). Note that B is anactual number.

Note that when signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 1 is configuredas illustrated in any one of FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 31, FIG.32, and FIG. 33, u0 is also set to 1 (u0=1) and u1 is also set to 0(u1=0) when the settings in the base station are configured such thatphase changer 205A implements a phase change using a specific phasechange value and phase changer 205B does not implement a phase changeusing a specific phase change value, and when the settings in the basestation are configured such that phase changer 205A does not implement aphase change using a specific phase change value and phase changer 205Bimplements a phase change using a specific phase change value.

Next, an example of a method for setting a specific phase change valuewill be described. Hereinafter, a first method and a second method willbe described.

First Method:

The base station transmits a training symbol. The terminal, which is thecommunication partner, uses the training symbol to transmit informationon the specific phase change value (set) to the base station. The basestation implements a phase change based on the information on thespecific phase change value (set) obtained from the terminal.

Another alternative example is as follows. The base station transmits atraining symbol. The terminal, which is the communication partner,transmits, to the base station, information relating to the receptionresult of the training symbol (e.g., information relating to a channelestimation value). Based on the information relating to the receptionresult of the training symbol from the terminal, the base stationcalculates a suitable value for the specific phase change value (set)and implements a phase change.

Note that it is necessary for the base station to notify the terminal ofthe information relating to the specific phase change value (set) set inthe settings, and in this case, the control information symbols, namely,other symbols 403, 503 illustrated in FIG. 4, FIG. 5, FIG. 13, and FIG.14 transmit information relating to the specific phase change value(set) set in the settings by the base station.

Next, an implementation example of the first method will be describedwith reference to FIG. 26. In FIG. 26, (A) illustrates symbolstransmitted by the base station arranged on the time axis, which is thehorizontal axis. In FIG. 26, (B) illustrates symbols transmitted by theterminal arranged on the time axis, which is the horizontal axis.

Hereinafter, FIG. 26 will be described in detail. First, the terminalrequests communication with the base station.

Then, the base station transmits at least training symbol 2601 forestimating the specific phase change value (set) to be used by the basestation for the transmission of data symbol 2604. Note that the terminalmay perform other estimation using training symbol 2601, and trainingsymbol 2601 may use PSK modulation, for example. The training symbol isthen transmitted from a plurality of antennas, just like the pilotsymbol described in Embodiments 1 through 6.

The terminal receives training symbol 2601 transmitted by the basestation, calculates, using training symbol 2601, a suitable specificphase change value (set) for phase changer 205A and/or phase changer205B included in the base station to use upon implementing a phasechange, and transmits feedback information symbol 2602 including thecalculated value.

The base station receives feedback information symbol 2602 transmittedby the terminal, and demodulates and decodes the symbol to obtaininformation on the suitable specific phase change value (set). Based onthis information, the phase change value (set) used in theimplementation of the phase change by phase changer 205A and/or phasechanger 205B in the base station is set.

The base station then transmits control information symbol 2603 and datasymbol 2604. Here, at least data symbol 2604 is implemented with a phasechange using the set phase change value (set).

Note that regarding data symbol 2604, the base station transmits aplurality of modulated signals from a plurality of antennas, just asdescribed in Embodiments 1 through 6. However, unlike Embodiments 1through 6, phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B implement aphase change using the specific phase change value (set) describedabove.

The frame configurations of the base station and terminal illustrated inFIG. 26 are mere non-limiting examples; other symbols may be included.Training symbol 2601, feedback information symbol 2602, controlinformation symbol 2603, and data symbol 2604 may each include anothersymbol such as a pilot symbol. Moreover, control information symbol 2603includes information relating to the specific phase change value (set)used upon transmitting data symbol 2604, and the terminal becomescapable of demodulating and decoding data symbol 2604 as a result ofobtaining this information.

Similar to as described in Embodiments 1 through 6, for example, whenthe base station transmits a modulated signal having a frameconfiguration such as illustrated in FIG. 4, FIG. 5, FIG. 13, or FIG.14, the subject of the phase change implemented using the specific phasechange value (set) by phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B, asdescribed above, is a data symbol (402, 502). The symbol that is subjectto phase change implemented by phase changer 209A and/or phase changer209B is, just as described in Embodiments 1 through 6, “pilot symbol401, 501”, “other symbol 403, 503”.

However, in phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B, if a phasechange is applied to “pilot symbol 401, 501”, “other symbol 403, 503” aswell, demodulating and decoding is possible.

A note regarding the recitation “specific phase change value (set)”follows. In the examples illustrated in FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG.31, FIG. 32, FIG. 33, phase changer 205A is omitted, and phase changer205B is included. Accordingly, in such a case, there is a need toprepare a specific phase change value to be used by phase changer 205B.On the other hand, in the examples illustrated in FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG.22, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG. 33, phase changer 205A and phase changer205B are included. In such a case, there is a need to prepare a specificphase change value #A to be used by phase changer 205A and a specificphase change value #B to be used by phase changer 205B. Accordingly theterminology “specific phase change value (set)” is used.

Second Method:

The base station starts transmission of a frame to the terminal. In thiscase, for example, the base station sets the specific phase change value(set) based on a random value, implements a phase change using thespecific phase change value, and transmits the modulated signal.

Thereafter, the terminal transmits, to the base station, informationindicating that the frame or packet could not be obtained, and the basestation receives this information.

In this case, for example, the base station sets the specific phasechange value (set) based on a random value, and transmits the modulatedsignal. Here, at least a data symbol including the frame (packet) datathat the terminal could not obtain is transmitted via a modulated signalimplemented with a phase change based on the newly set specific phasechange value (set). In other words, when the base station performstransmission two (or more) times as a result of, for example,retransmitting the first frame (packet) data, the specific phase changevalue (set) used for the first transmission and the specific phasechange value (set) used for the second transmission may be different.This makes it possible to achieve the advantageous effect that the frameor packet is highly likely to be obtained by the terminal upon thesecond transmission when retransmission is performed.

Thereafter, when the base station receives, from the terminal,information indicating that a frame or packet could not be obtained, thebase station changes the specific change value (set) based on, forexample, a random number.

Note that it is necessary for the base station to notify the terminal ofthe information relating to the specific phase change value (set) set inthe settings, and in this case, the control information symbols, namely,other symbols 403, 503 illustrated in FIG. 4, FIG. 5, FIG. 13, and FIG.14 transmit information relating to the specific phase change value(set) set in the settings by the base station.

Note that in the above description of the second method, the specificphase change value (set) is set by the base station based on a randomvalue, but the method for setting the specific phase change value (set)is not limited to this example. So long as the specific phase changevalue (set) is set to a new value upon setting the specific phase changevalue (set), any method may be used to set the specific phase changevalue (set). For example, the specific phase change value (set) is setbased on some rule. The specific phase change value (set) may be setrandomly. The specific phase change value (set) may be set based oninformation obtained from the communication partner. The specific phasechange value (set) may be set in any of these ways. However, the methodis not limited to these examples.

Next, an implementation example of the second method will be describedwith reference to FIG. 27. In FIG. 27, (A) illustrates symbolstransmitted by the base station arranged on the time axis, which is thehorizontal axis. In FIG. 27, (B) illustrates symbols transmitted by theterminal arranged on the time axis, which is the horizontal axis.

Hereinafter, FIG. 27 will be described in detail.

Note that in order to describe FIG. 27, descriptions of FIG. 28, FIG.29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG. 33 will also be described.

Examples of the configuration of signal processor 106 illustrated inFIG. 1 are given in FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, and FIG.22, and variations on those configurations are illustrated in FIG. 28,FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG. 33.

FIG. 28 is an example in which the configuration in FIG. 2 is modifiedby moving phase changer 205B in front of weighting synthesizer 203.Next, operations in FIG. 28 different from those with respect to FIG. 2will be described.

Phase changer 205B receives inputs of mapped signal s2(t)201B andcontrol signal 200, and based on control signal 200, applies a phasechange to mapped signal 201B, and outputs phase-changed signal 2801B.

In phase changer 205B, for example, a phase change of y(i) is applied tos2(i). Accordingly, when phase-changed signal 2801B is expressed ass2′(i), s2′(i)=y(i)×s2(i). Note that i is a symbol number and is aninteger that is greater than or equal to 0. Note that the applicationmethod for phase change value y(i) is as described in Embodiment 1.

Weighting synthesizer 203 receives inputs of mapped signal s1(i)201A,phase-changed signal s2′(i)2801B, and control signal 200, performsweighting synthesis (precoding) based on control signal 200, and outputsweighting synthesized signal 204A and weighting synthesized signal 204B.More specifically, weighting synthesizer 203 multiplies a precodingmatrix with the vectors of mapped signal s1(i)201A and phase-changedsignal s2′(i)2801B to obtain weighting synthesized signal 204A andweighting synthesized signal 204B. Note that the configuration examplefor the precoding matrix is as described in Embodiment 1. Subsequentdescription is the same as made with reference to FIG. 2, and as such,is omitted.

FIG. 29 is an example in which the configuration in FIG. 18 is modifiedby moving phase changer 205B in front of weighting synthesizer 203. Inthis case, the operations performed by phase changer 205B and weightingsynthesizer 203 are the same as described with reference to FIG. 28, andas such, description will be omitted. Moreover, operations down the lineof weighting synthesizer 203 are also the same as made with reference toFIG. 18, and as such, description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 30 is an example in which the configuration in FIG. 19 is modifiedby moving phase changer 205B in front of weighting synthesizer 203. Inthis case, the operations performed by phase changer 205B and weightingsynthesizer 203 are the same as described with reference to FIG. 28, andas such, description will be omitted. Moreover, operations down the lineof weighting synthesizer 203 are also the same as made with reference toFIG. 19, and as such, description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 31 is an example in which the configuration in FIG. 20 is modifiedby moving phase changer 205A in front of weighting synthesizer 203 andmoving phase changer 205B in front of weighting synthesizer 203.

Phase changer 205A receives inputs of mapped signal s1(t)201A andcontrol signal 200, and based on control signal 200, applies a phasechange to mapped signal 201A, and outputs phase-changed signal 2801A.

In phase changer 205A, for example, a phase change of w(i) is applied tomapped signal s1(i). Accordingly, phase-changed signal s1′(i)2901A canbe expressed as s1′(i)=w(i)×s1(i). Note that i is a symbol number and isan integer that is greater than or equal to 0. Note that the applicationmethod for phase change value w(i) is as described in Embodiment 1.

In phase changer 205B, for example, a phase change of y(i) is applied tos2(i). Accordingly, phase-changed signal s2′(i)2801B can be expressed ass2′(i)=y(i)×s2(i). Note that i is a symbol number and is an integer thatis greater than or equal to 0. Note that the application method forphase change value y(i) is as described in Embodiment 1.

Weighting synthesizer 203 receives inputs of mapped signal s1′(i)2801A,phase-changed signal s2′(i)2801B, and control signal 200, performsweighting synthesis (precoding) based on control signal 200, and outputsweighting synthesized signal 204A and weighting synthesized signal 204B.More specifically, weighting synthesizer 203 multiplies a precodingmatrix with the vectors of mapped signal s1′(i)2801A and phase-changedsignal s2′(i)2801B to obtain weighting synthesized signal 204A andweighting synthesized signal 204B. Note that the configuration examplefor the precoding matrix is as described in Embodiment 1. Subsequentdescription is the same as made with reference to FIG. 20, and as such,is omitted.

FIG. 32 is an example in which the configuration in FIG. 21 is modifiedby moving phase changer 205A in front of weighting synthesizer 203 andmoving phase changer 205B in front of weighting synthesizer 203. In thiscase, the operations performed by phase changer 205A, phase changer205B, and weighting synthesizer 203 are the same as described withreference to FIG. 31, and as such, description will be omitted.Moreover, operations down the line of weighting synthesizer 203 are alsothe same as made with reference to FIG. 21, and as such, descriptionthereof is omitted.

FIG. 33 is an example in which the configuration in FIG. 22 is modifiedby moving phase changer 205A in front of weighting synthesizer 203 andmoving phase changer 205B in front of weighting synthesizer 203. In thiscase, the operations performed by phase changer 205A, phase changer205B, and weighting synthesizer 203 are the same as described withreference to FIG. 31, and as such, description will be omitted.Moreover, operations down the line of weighting synthesizer 203 are alsothe same as made with reference to FIG. 22, and as such, descriptionthereof is omitted.

In FIG. 27, the terminal requests communication with the base station.

In this case, the base station determines the phase change value to beimplemented by phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B to be afirst specific phase change value (set) by using a random number, forexample. Then, the base station implements a phase change via phasechanger 205A and/or phase changer 205B based on the determined firstspecific phase change value (set). Here, control information symbol2701_1 includes information on the first specific phase change value(set).

A note regarding the terminology “first specific phase change value(set)” follows. In the examples illustrated in FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19,FIG. 28, FIG. 29, and FIG. 30, phase changer 205A is omitted, and phasechanger 205B is included. Accordingly in such a case, there is a need toprepare a first specific phase change value to be used by phase changer205B. On the other hand, in the examples illustrated in FIG. 20, FIG.21, FIG. 22, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG. 33, phase changer 205A and phasechanger 205B are included. In such a case, there is a need to prepare afirst specific phase change value #A to be used by phase changer 205Aand a first specific phase change value #B to be used by phase changer205B. Accordingly, the terminology “first specific phase change value(set)” is used.

The base station then transmits control information symbol 2701_1 anddata symbol #1 2702_1. Here, at least data symbol #1 2702_1 isimplemented with a phase change using the determined first specificphase change value (set).

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_1 and data symbol#1 2702_1 transmitted by the base station, and demodulates and decodesdata symbol #1 2702_1 based at least on information on the firstspecific phase change value (set) included in control information symbol2701_1. As a result, the terminal determines that the data included indata symbol #1 2702_1 is obtained without error. The terminal thentransmits, to the base station, terminal transmission symbol 2750_1including at least information indicating that the data included in datasymbol #1 2702_1 was obtained without error.

The base station receives terminal transmission symbol 2750_1transmitted by the terminal, and based at least on the information thatis included in terminal transmission symbol 2750_1 and indicates thatthe data included in data symbol #1 2702_1 was obtained without error,determines the phase change (set) to be implemented by phase changer205A and/or phase changer 205B to be the first specific phase changevalue (set), just as in the case where data symbol #1 2702_1 istransmitted.

Since the base station obtained the data included in data symbol #12702_1 without error, the terminal can determine that it is highlyprobable that data can be obtained without error when the next datasymbol is transmitted and the first specific phase change value (set) isused. This makes it possible to achieve an advantageous effect that itis highly probable that the terminal can achieve a high data receptionquality.

Then, the base station implements a phase change via phase changer 205Aand/or phase changer 205B based on the determined first specific phasechange value (set). Here, control information symbol 2701_2 includesinformation on the first specific phase change value (set).

The base station then transmits control information symbol 2701_2 anddata symbol #2 2702_2. Here, at least data symbol #2 2702_2 isimplemented with a phase change using the determined first specificphase change value (set).

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_2 and data symbol#2 2702_2 transmitted by the base station, and demodulates and decodesdata symbol #2 2702_2 based at least on information on the firstspecific phase change value (set) included in control information symbol2701_2. As a result, the terminal determines that the data included indata symbol #2 2702_2 is not successfully obtained. The terminal thentransmits, to the base station, terminal transmission symbol 2750_2including at least information indicating that the data included in datasymbol #2 2702_2 was not successfully obtained.

The base station receives terminal transmission symbol 2750_2transmitted by the terminal, and based at least on the information thatis included in terminal transmission symbol 2750_2 and indicates thatthe data included in data symbol #2 2702_2 was not successfullyobtained, determines the phase change (set) to be implemented by phasechanger 205A and/or phase changer 205B to be changed from the firstspecific phase change value (set).

Since the base station did not obtain the data included in data symbol#2 2702_2 successfully, the terminal can determine that it is highlyprobable that data can be obtained without error when the next datasymbol is transmitted and the phase change value is changed from thefirst specific phase change value (set). This makes it possible toachieve an advantageous effect that it is highly probable that theterminal can achieve a high data reception quality.

Accordingly, the base station determines the phase change value (set) tobe implemented by phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B to bechanged from the first specific phase change value (set) to a secondspecific phase change value (set), by using a random number, forexample. Then, the base station implements a phase change via phasechanger 205A and/or phase changer 205B based on the determined secondspecific phase change value (set). Here, control information symbol2701_3 includes information on the second specific phase change value(set).

A note regarding the terminology “second specific phase change value(set)” follows. In the examples illustrated in FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19,FIG. 28, FIG. 29, and FIG. 30, phase changer 205A is omitted, and phasechanger 205B is included. Accordingly, in such a case, there is a needto prepare a second specific phase change value to be used by phasechanger 205B. On the other hand, in the examples illustrated in FIG. 20,FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG. 33, phase changer 205A andphase changer 205B are included. In such a case, there is a need toprepare a second specific phase change value #A to be used by phasechanger 205A and a second specific phase change value #B to be used byphase changer 205B. Accordingly, the terminology “second specific phasechange value (set)” is used.

The base station then transmits control information symbol 2701_3 anddata symbol #2 2702_2-1. Here, at least data symbol #2 2702_2-1 isimplemented with a phase change using the determined second specificphase change value (set).

Note that regarding “data symbol #2 2702_2 present immediately behindcontrol information symbol 2701_2” and “data symbol #2 2702_2-1 presentimmediately behind control information symbol 2701_3”, the modulationscheme of “data symbol #2 2702_2 present immediately behind controlinformation symbol 2701_2” and the modulation scheme of “data symbol #22702_2-1 present immediately behind control information symbol 2701_3”may be the same or different.

Moreover, since “data symbol #2 2702_2-1 present immediately behindcontrol information symbol 2701_3” is a symbol for retransmission, allor some data included in “data symbol #2 2702_2 present immediatelybehind control information symbol 2701_2” is included in “data symbol #22702_2-1 present immediately behind control information symbol 2701_3”.

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_3 and data symbol#2 2702_2 transmitted by the base station, and demodulates and decodesdata symbol #2 2702_2-1 based at least on information on the secondspecific phase change value (set) included in control information symbol2701_3. As a result, the terminal determines that the data included indata symbol #2 2702_2-1 is not successfully obtained. The terminal thentransmits, to the base station, terminal transmission symbol 2750_3including at least information indicating that the data included in datasymbol #2 2702_2-1 was not successfully obtained.

The base station receives terminal transmission symbol 2750_3transmitted by the terminal, and based at least on the information thatis included in terminal transmission symbol 2750_3 and indicates thatthe data included in data symbol #2 2702_2-1 was not successfullyobtained, determines the phase change (set) to be implemented by phasechanger A and phase changer B to be changed from the second specificphase change value (set).

Since the base station did not obtain the data included in data symbol#2 2702_2-1 successfully, the terminal can determine that it is highlyprobable that data can be obtained without error when the next datasymbol is transmitted and the phase change value is changed from thesecond specific phase change value (set). This makes it possible toachieve an advantageous effect that it is highly probable that theterminal can achieve a high data reception quality.

Accordingly, the base station determines the phase change value (set) tobe implemented by phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B to bechanged from the second specific phase change value (set) to a thirdspecific phase change value (set), by using a random number, forexample. Here, control information symbol 2701_4 includes information onthe third specific phase change value (set).

A note regarding the terminology “third specific phase change value(set)” follows. In the examples illustrated in FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19,FIG. 28, FIG. 29, and FIG. 30, phase changer 205A is omitted, and phasechanger 205B is included. Accordingly, in such a case, there is a needto prepare a third specific phase change value to be used by phasechanger 205B.

On the other hand, in the examples illustrated in FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG.22, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG. 33, phase changer 205A and phase changer205B are included. In such a case, there is a need to prepare a thirdspecific phase change value #A to be used by phase changer 205A and athird specific phase change value #B to be used by phase changer 205B.Accordingly, the terminology “third specific phase change value (set)”is used.

The base station then transmits control information symbol 2701_4 anddata symbol #2 2702_2-2. Here, at least data symbol #2 2702_2 isimplemented with a phase change using the determined third specificphase change value (set).

Note that regarding “data symbol #2 2702_2-1 present immediately behindcontrol information symbol 2701_3” and “data symbol #2 2702_2-2 presentimmediately behind control information symbol 2701_4”, the modulationscheme of “data symbol #2 2702_2-1 present immediately behind controlinformation symbol 2701_3” and the modulation scheme of “data symbol #22702_2-2 present immediately behind control information symbol 2701_4”may be the same or different.

Moreover, since “data symbol #2 2702_2-2 present immediately behindcontrol information symbol 2701_4” is a symbol for retransmission, allor some data included in “data symbol #2 2702_2-1 present immediatelybehind control information symbol 2701_3” is included in “data symbol #22702_2-2 present immediately behind control information symbol 2701_4”.

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_4 and data symbol#2 2702_2-2 transmitted by the base station, and demodulates and decodesdata symbol #2 2702_2-2 based at least on information on the thirdspecific phase change value (set) included in control information symbol2701_4. As a result, the terminal determines that the data included indata symbol #2 2702_2-2 is obtained without error. The terminal thentransmits, to the base station, terminal transmission symbol 2750_4including at least information indicating that the data included in datasymbol #2 2702_2-2 was obtained without error.

The base station receives terminal transmission symbol 2750_4transmitted by the terminal, and based at least on the information thatis included in terminal transmission symbol 2750_4 and indicates thatthe data included in data symbol #2 2702-2 was obtained without error,determines the phase change (set) to be implemented by phase changer205A and/or phase changer 205B to be the third specific phase changevalue (set), just as in the case where data symbol #2 2702_2-2 istransmitted.

Since the base station obtained the data included in data symbol #22702_2-2 without error, the terminal can determine that it is highlyprobable that data can be obtained without error when the next datasymbol is transmitted and the third specific phase change value (set) isused. This makes it possible to achieve an advantageous effect that itis highly probable that the terminal can achieve a high data receptionquality.

Then, the base station implements a phase change via phase changer 205Aand/or phase changer 205B based on the determined third specific phasechange value (set). Here, control information symbol 2701_5 includesinformation on the third specific phase change value (set).

The base station then transmits control information symbol 2701_5 anddata symbol #3 2702_3. Here, at least data symbol #3 2702_3 isimplemented with a phase change using the determined third specificphase change value (set).

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_5 and data symbol#3 2702_3 transmitted by the base station, and demodulates and decodesdata symbol #3 2702_3 based at least on information on the thirdspecific phase change value (set) included in control information symbol2701_5.

As a result, the terminal determines that the data included in datasymbol #3 2702_3 is obtained without error. The terminal then transmits,to the base station, terminal transmission symbol 2750_5 including atleast information indicating that the data included in data symbol #32702_3 was obtained without error.

The base station receives terminal transmission symbol 2750_5transmitted by the terminal, and based at least on the information thatis included in terminal transmission symbol 2750_5 and indicates thatthe data included in data symbol #3 2702_3 was obtained without error,determines the phase change (set) to be implemented by phase changer205A and/or phase changer 205B to be the third specific phase changevalue (set), just as in the case where data symbol #3 2702_3 istransmitted.

Since the base station obtained the data included in data symbol #32702_3 without error, the terminal can determine that it is highlyprobable that data can be obtained without error when the next datasymbol is transmitted and the third specific phase change value (set) isused. This makes it possible to achieve an advantageous effect that itis highly probable that the terminal can achieve a high data receptionquality.

Then, the base station implements a phase change via phase changer 205Aand/or phase changer 205B based on the determined third specific phasechange value (set). Here, control information symbol 2701_6 includesinformation on the third specific phase change value (set).

The base station then transmits control information symbol 2701_6 anddata symbol #4 2702_4. Here, at least data symbol #4 2702_4 isimplemented with a phase change using the determined third specificphase change value (set).

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_6 and data symbol#4 2702_4 transmitted by the base station, and demodulates and decodesdata symbol #4 2702_4 based at least on information on the thirdspecific phase change value (set) included in control information symbol2701_6.

As a result, the terminal determines that the data included in datasymbol #4 2702_4 is not successfully obtained. The terminal thentransmits, to the base station, terminal transmission symbol 2750_6including at least information indicating that the data included in datasymbol #4 2702_4 was not successfully obtained.

The base station receives terminal transmission symbol 2750_6transmitted by the terminal, and based at least on the information thatis included in terminal transmission symbol 2750_6 and indicates thatthe data included in data symbol #4 2702_4 was not successfullyobtained, determines the phase change (set) to be implemented by phasechanger 205A and/or phase changer 205B to be changed from the thirdspecific phase change value (set).

Since the base station did not obtain the data included in data symbol#4 2702_4 successfully, the terminal can determine that it is highlyprobable that data can be obtained without error when the next datasymbol is transmitted and the phase change value is changed from thethird specific phase change value (set). This makes it possible toachieve an advantageous effect that it is highly probable that theterminal can achieve a high data reception quality.

Accordingly, the base station determines the phase change value (set) tobe implemented by phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B to bechanged from the third specific phase change value (set) to a fourthspecific phase change value (set), by using a random number, forexample. Then, the base station implements a phase change via phasechanger 205A and/or phase changer 205B based on the determined fourthspecific phase change value (set). Here, control information symbol2701_7 includes information on the fourth specific phase change value(set).

A note regarding the terminology “fourth specific phase change value(set)” follows. In the examples illustrated in FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19,FIG. 28, FIG. 29, and FIG. 30, phase changer 205A is omitted, and phasechanger 205B is included. Accordingly, in such a case, there is a needto prepare a fourth specific phase change value to be used by phasechanger 205B. On the other hand, in the examples illustrated in FIG. 20,FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG. 33, phase changer 205A andphase changer 205B are included. In such a case, there is a need toprepare a fourth specific phase change value #A to be used by phasechanger 205A and a fourth specific phase change value #B to be used byphase changer 205B. Accordingly, the terminology “fourth specific phasechange value (set)” is used.

Note that regarding “data symbol #4 2702_4 present immediately behindcontrol information symbol 2701_6” and “data symbol #4 2702_4-1 presentimmediately behind control information symbol 2701_7”, the modulationscheme of “data symbol #4 2702_4 present immediately behind controlinformation symbol 2701_6” and the modulation scheme of “data symbol #42702_4-1 present immediately behind control information symbol 2701_7”may be the same or different.

Moreover, since “data symbol #4 2702_4-1 present immediately behindcontrol information symbol 2701_7” is a symbol for retransmission, allor some data included in “data symbol #4 2702_4 present immediatelybehind control information symbol 2701_6” is included in “data symbol #42702_4-1 present immediately behind control information symbol 2701_7”.

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_7 and data symbol#4 2702_4-1 transmitted by the base station, and demodulates and decodesdata symbol #4 2702_4-1 based at least on information on the fourthspecific phase change value (set) included in control information symbol2701_7.

Note that regarding data symbol #1 2702_1, data symbol #2 2702_2, datasymbol #3 2702_3, and data symbol #4 2702_4, the base station transmitsa plurality of modulated signals from a plurality of antennas, just asdescribed in Embodiments 1 through 6. However, unlike Embodiments 1through 6, phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B implement aphase change using the specific phase change value described above.

The frame configurations of the base station and terminal illustrated inFIG. 27 are mere non-limiting examples; other symbols may be included.Moreover, control information symbol 2701_1, 2701_2, 2701_3, 2701_4,2701_5, 2701_6, data symbol #1 2702_1, data symbol #2 2702_2, datasymbol #3 2702_3, and data symbol #4 2702_4 may each include othersymbols, such as a pilot symbol.

Moreover, control information symbol 2701_1, 2701_2, 2701_3, 2701_4,2701_5, and 2701_6 include information relating to the specific phasechange value (set) used upon transmitting data symbol #1 2702_1, datasymbol #2 2702_2, data symbol #3 2702_3, and data symbol #4 2702_4, andthe terminal becomes capable of demodulating and decoding data symbol #12702_1, data symbol #2 2702_2, data symbol #3 2702_3, and data symbol #42702_4 as a result of obtaining this information.

Note that in the above description, the base station determines thevalue for the specific phase change value (set), i.e., the set for thespecific phase change value, by using a “random number”, but thedetermination of the value for the specific phase change value (set) isnot limited to this method. The base station may regularly change thevalue for the specific phase change value (set), i.e., the set for thespecific phase change value.

Any method may be used to determine the value for the specific phasechange value (set). When the specific phase change value (set) needs tobe changed, the specific phase change value (set) before and after thechange may be different.

Similar to as described in Embodiments 1 through 6, for example, whenthe base station transmits a modulated signal having a frameconfiguration such as illustrated in FIG. 4, FIG. 5, FIG. 13, or FIG.14, the subject of the phase change implemented using the specific phasechange value (set) by phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B, asdescribed above, are data symbols 402, 502. The symbol that is subjectto phase change implemented by phase changer 209A and/or phase changer209B is, just as described in Embodiments 1 through 6, “pilot symbol401, 501”, “other symbol 403, 503”.

However, in phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B, if a phasechange is applied to “pilot symbol 401, 501”, “other symbol 403, 503” aswell, demodulating and decoding is possible.

Even if this transmission method is implemented independently, themethod of implementation of a phase change using a specific phase changevalue described above can achieve an advantageous effect in that highdata reception quality can be achieved with the terminal.

Moreover, examples of the configuration of signal processor 106illustrated in FIG. 1 and included in the transmission device of thebase station are given in FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21,FIG. 22, FIG. 23, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG.33, but phase change need not be implemented in phase changer 209A andphase changer 209B.

In other words, in FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22,FIG. 23, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG. 33, phasechanger 209A and phase changer 209B may be removed. In such cases,signal 208A corresponds to signal 106_A in FIG. 1, and signal 208Bcorresponds to signal 106_B in FIG. 1.

When [u0 u1], which is described above and used to control operationsperformed by phase changers 205A, 205B included in the base station, isset to [01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), that is to say, when phase changers205A, 205B implement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbolbasis, control information for setting the phase change in detail is setto u2, u3. The relationship between [u2 u3] and the phase changeimplemented by phase changers 205A, 205B in detail is illustrated inTable 2.

Note that u2, u3 are, for example, transmitted by the base station assome of the control information symbols, namely, other symbols 403, 503.The terminal obtains [u2 u3] included in control information symbols,namely, other symbols 403, 503, becomes aware of operations performed byphase changers 205A, 205B from [u2 u3], and demodulates and decodes datasymbols. Also, the control information for “detailed phase change” is2-bit information, but the number of bits may be other than 2 bits.

TABLE 2 u2 u3 phase change method when [u0 u1] = [01] 00 method 01_1 01method 01_2 10 method 01_3 11 method 01_4

A first example of an interpretation of Table 2 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[00] (i.e., u2=0,u3=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_1.

Method 01_1:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 53} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(53)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B does not implement a phase change.

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[01] (i.e., u2=0,u3=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_2.

Method 01_2:

Phase changer 205A does not implement a phase change. Phase changer 205Bsets the coefficient used in the multiplication for the phase change toy2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integer that is greaterthan or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 54} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(54)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[10] (i.e., u2=1,u3=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_3.

Method 01_3:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 55} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(55)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 56} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{{- j}\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{7}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(56)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[11] (i.e., u2=1,u3=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_4.

Method 01_4:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 57} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{{- j}\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{7}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(57)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 58} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(58)}\end{matrix}$

A second example of an interpretation of Table 2 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[00] (i.e., u2=0,u3=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_1.

Method 01_1:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 59} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{3}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(59)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B does not implement a phase change.

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[01] (i.e., u2=0,u3=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_2.

Method 01_2:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 60} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{5}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(60)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B does not implement a phase change.

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[10] (i.e., u2=1,u3=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_3.

Method 01_3:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 61} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1\;(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{7}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(61)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B does not implement a phase change.

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[11] (i.e., u2=1,u3=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_4.

Method 01_4:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 62} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1\;(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(62)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B does not implement a phase change.

A third example of an interpretation of Table 2 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[00] (i.e., u2=0,u3=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_1.

Method 01_1:

Phase changer 205A does not implement a phase change. Phase changer 205Bsets the coefficient used in the multiplication for the phase change toy2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integer that is greaterthan or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 63} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2\;(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{3}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(63)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[01] (i.e., u2=0,u3=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_2.

Method 01_2:

Phase changer 205A does not implement a phase change. Phase changer 205Bsets the coefficient used in the multiplication for the phase change toy2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integer that is greaterthan or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 64} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2\;(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{5}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(64)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[10] (i.e., u2=1,u3=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_3.

Method 01_3:

Phase changer 205A does not implement a phase change. Phase changer 205Bsets the coefficient used in the multiplication for the phase change toy2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integer that is greaterthan or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 65} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2\;(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{7}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(65)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[11] (i.e., u2=1,u3=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_4.

Method 01_4:

Phase changer 205A does not implement a phase change. Phase changer 205Bsets the coefficient used in the multiplication for the phase change toy2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integer that is greaterthan or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 66} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2\;(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(66)}\end{matrix}$

A fourth example of an interpretation of Table 2 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[00] (i.e., u2=0,u3=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_1.

Method 01_1:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 67} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1\;(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{5}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(67)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 68} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2\;(i)} = e^{{- j}\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{3}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(68)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[01] (i.e., u2=0,u3=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_2.

Method 01_2:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 69} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1\;(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{7}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(69)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 70} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2\;(i)} = e^{{- j}\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{3}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(70)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[10] (i.e., u2=1,u3=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_3.

Method 01_3:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 71} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1\;(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{7}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(71)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 72} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2\;(i)} = e^{{- j}\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{5}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(72)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[01] (i.e., u0=0, u1=1), and [u2 u3]=[11] (i.e., u2=1,u3=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis inaccordance with method 01_4.

Method 01_4:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 73} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1\;(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(73)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 74} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2\;(i)} = e^{{- j}\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{5}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(74)}\end{matrix}$

Although first through fourth examples are given above, the detailedphase change method employed by phase changer 205A, phase changer 205Bis not limited to these examples.

<1> In phase changer 205A, a phase change is implementedcyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis.

<2> In phase changer 205B, a phase change is implementedcyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis.

<3> In phase changer 205A and phase changer 205B, a phase change isimplemented cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis.

So long as a method according to one or more of <1>, <2>, and <3> is setin detail according to [u2 u3], it may be implemented in the same manneras described above.

When [u0 u1], which is described above and used to control operationsperformed by phase changers 205A, 205B included in the base station, isset to [10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), that is to say, when phase changers205A, 205B implement a phase change using a specific phase change value(set), control information for setting the phase change in detail is setto u4, u5. The relationship between [u4 u5] and the phase changeimplemented by phase changers 205A, 205B in detail is illustrated inTable 3.

Note that u4, u5 are transmitted by base station as some of controlinformation symbols, namely, other symbols 403, 503. The terminalobtains [u4 u5] included in control information symbols, namely, othersymbols 403, 503, becomes aware of operations performed by phasechangers 205A, 205B from [u4 u5], and demodulates and decodes datasymbols. Also, the control information for “detailed phase change” is2-bit information, but the number of bits may be other than 2 bits.

TABLE 3 u4 u5 phase change method when [u0 u1] = [10] 00 method 10_1 01method 10_2 10 method 10_3 11 method 10_4

A first example of an interpretation of Table 3 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[00] (i.e., u4=0,u5=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_1.

Method 10_1:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.This acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 75} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1\;(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(75)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B does not implement a phase change.

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[01] (i.e., u4=0,u5=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_2.

Method 10_2:

Phase changer 205A does not implement a phase change. Phase changer 205Bsets the coefficient used in the multiplication for the phase change toy2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integer that is greaterthan or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows. This acts as afixed phase value independent of symbol number.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 76} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{3}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(76)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[10] (i.e., u4=1,u5=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_3.

Method 10_3:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.This acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 77} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(77)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.This acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 78} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{{- j}\frac{\pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(78)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[11] (i.e., u4=1,u5=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_4.

Method 10_4:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.This acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 79} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{{- j}\frac{2 \times \pi}{7}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(79)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.This acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 80} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi}{9}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(80)}\end{matrix}$

A second example of an interpretation of Table 3 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u51]=[00] (i.e., u4=0,u5=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_1.

Method 10_1:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.This acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number.[MATH. 81]y1(i)=e ^(j0)  Equation (81)

In the case of Equation (81), phase changer 205A does not implement aphase. Phase changer 205B does not implement a phase change.

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[01] (i.e., u4=0,u5=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_2.

Method 10_2:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.This acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 82} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(82)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B does not implement a phase change.

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u51]=[10] (i.e., u4=1,u5=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_3.

Method 10_3:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.This acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 83} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(83)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B does not implement a phase change.

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[11] (i.e., u4=1,u5=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_4.

Method 10_4:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.This acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 84} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{3 \times \pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(84)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B does not implement a phase change.

A third example of an interpretation of Table 3 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[00] (i.e., u4=0,u5=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_1.

Method 10_1:

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.This acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number.[MATH. 85]y2(i)=e ^(j0)  Equation (85)

In the case of Equation (85), phase changer 205B does not implement aphase. Phase changer 205A does not implement a phase change.

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[01] (i.e., u4=0,u5=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_2.

Method 10_2:

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.This acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 86} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(86)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205A does not implement a phase change.

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[10] (i.e., u4=1,u5=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_3.

Method 10_3:

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.This acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 87} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(87)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205A does not implement a phase change.

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[11] (i.e., u4=1,u5=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_4.

Method 10_4:

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.This acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 88} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{3 \times \pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(88)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205A does not implement a phase change.

A fourth example of an interpretation of Table 3 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[00] (i.e., u4=0,u5=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_1.

Method 10_1:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.This acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 89} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(89)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.This acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number.[MATH. 90]y2(i)=e ^(j0)  Equation (90)

In the case of Equation (90), phase changer 205B does not implement aphase.

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u51]=[01] (i.e., u4=0,u5=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_2.

Method 10_2:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.This acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 91} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(91)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.This acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 92} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{{- j}\frac{\pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(92)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[10] (i.e., u4=1,u5=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_3.

Method 10_3:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.This acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 93} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(93)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.This acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 94} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{{- j}\frac{\pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(94)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[10] (i.e., u0=1, u1=0), and [u4 u5]=[11] (i.e., u4=1,u5=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a specific phase change value (set) inaccordance with method 10_4.

Method 10_4:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.This acts as a fixed phase value independent of symbol number.[MATH. 95]y1(i)=e ^(j0)  Equation (95)

In the case of Equation (95), phase changer 205A does not implement aphase. Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in themultiplication for the phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbolnumber and is an integer that is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i)is expressed as follows. This acts as a fixed phase value independent ofsymbol number.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 96} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{{- j}\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(96)}\end{matrix}$

Although first through fourth examples are given above, the detailedphase change method employed by phase changer 205A, phase changer 205Bis not limited to these examples.

<4> In phase changer 205A, phase change is implemented using a specificphase change value.

<5> In phase changer 205B, phase change is implemented using a specificphase change value.

<6> In phase changer 205A and phase changer 205B, phase change isimplemented using a specific phase change value.

So long as a method according to one or more of <4>, <5>, and <6> is setin detail according to [u4 u5], it may be implemented in the same manneras described above.

Moreover, in phase changers 205A, 205B included in the base station, acombination of the method of implementing a phase changecyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the method ofimplementing a phase change using a specific phase change value may beused. A mode in which phase changers 205A, 205B use a combination of themethod of implementing a phase change cyclically/regularly on aper-symbol basis and the method of implementing a phase change using aspecific phase change value is indicated as “reserve” in Table 1, and isallotted as [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1).

When [u0 u1], which is described above and used to control operationsperformed by phase changers 205A, 205B included in the base station, isset to [11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), that is to say when phase changers 205A,205B implement a phase change using a combination the method ofimplementing a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basisand the method of implementing a phase change using a specific phasechange value, control information for setting the phase change in detailis set to u6, u7. The relationship between [u6 u7] and the phase changeimplemented by phase changers 205A, 205B in detail is illustrated inTable 4.

Note that u6, u7 are, for example, transmitted by the base station assome of the control information symbols, namely, other symbols 403, 503.The terminal obtains [u6 u7] included in control information symbols,namely, other symbols 403, 503, becomes aware of operations performed byphase changers 205A, 205B from [u6 u7], and demodulates and decodes datasymbols. Also, the control information for “detailed phase change” is2-bit information, but the number of bits may be other than 2 bits.

TABLE 4 a6 u7 phase change method when [u0 u1] = [10] 00 method 11_1 01method 11_2 10 method 11_3 11 method 11_4

A first example of an interpretation of Table 4 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[00] (i.e., u6=0,u7=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_1.

Method 11_1:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 97} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(97)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.[MATH. 98]y2(i)=e ^(j0)  (98)

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[01] (i.e., u6=0,u7=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_2.

Method 11_2:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 99} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(99)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 100} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(100)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[10] (i.e., u6=1,u7=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_3.

Method 11_3:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.[MATH. 101]y1(i)e ^(j0)  Equation (101)

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 102} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(102)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u71]=[11] (i.e., u6=1,u7=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_4.

Method 11_4:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 103} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(103)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 104} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(104)}\end{matrix}$

A second example of an interpretation of Table 4 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[00] (i.e., u6=0,u7=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_1.

Method 11_1:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 105} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(105)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.[MATH. 106]y2(i)=e ^(j0)  Equation (106)

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[01] (i.e., u6=0,u7=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_2.

Method 11_2:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 107} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(107)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 108} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(108)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[10] (i.e., u6=1,u7=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_3.

Method 11_3:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 109} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(109)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 110} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(110)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u71]=[11] (i.e., u6=1,u7=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_4.

Method 11_4:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 111} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(111)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 112} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{3 \times \pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(112)}\end{matrix}$

A third example of an interpretation of Table 4 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[00] (i.e., u6=0,u7=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_1.

Method 11_1:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.\mspace{14mu} 113} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{3}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(113)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.\mspace{14mu} 114} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(114)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[01] (i.e., u6=0,u7=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_2.

Method 11_2:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.\mspace{14mu} 115} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{5}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(115)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.\mspace{14mu} 116} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(116)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[10] (i.e., u6=1,u7=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_3.

Method 11_3:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.\mspace{14mu} 117} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{7}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(117)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.\mspace{14mu} 118} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(118)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[11] (i.e., u6=1,u7=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_4.

Method 11_4:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.\mspace{14mu} 119} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(119)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.\mspace{14mu} 120} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(120)}\end{matrix}$

A fourth example of an interpretation of Table 4 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[00] (i.e., u6=0,u7=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_1.

Method 11_1:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.[MATH. 121]y1(i)=e ^(j0)  Equation (121)

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.\mspace{14mu} 122} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(122)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[01] (i.e., u6=0,u7=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_2.

Method 11_2:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.\mspace{14mu} 123} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(123)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.\mspace{14mu} 124} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(124)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[10] (i.e., u6=1,u7=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_3.

Method 11_3:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.\mspace{14mu} 125} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(125)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.\mspace{14mu} 126} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(126)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[11] (i.e., u6=1,u7=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_4.

Method 11_4:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.\mspace{14mu} 127} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{3 \times \pi}{8}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(127)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{Math}.\mspace{14mu} 128} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(128)}\end{matrix}$

A fifth example of an interpretation of Table 4 is as follows.

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[00] (i.e., u6=0,u7=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_1.

Method 11_1:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 129} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(129)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 130} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{3}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(130)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[01] (i.e., u6=0,u7=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_2.

Method 11_2:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 131} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(131)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 132} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{5}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(132)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[10] (i.e., u6=1,u7=0), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_3.

Method 11_3:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 133} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(133)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 134} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{7}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(134)}\end{matrix}$

When [u0 u1]=[11] (i.e., u0=1, u1=1), and [u6 u7]=[11] (i.e., u6=1,u7=1), the base station causes phase changer 205A, phase changer 205B toimplement a phase change using a combination the method of implementinga phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis and the methodof implementing a phase change using a specific phase change value inaccordance with method 11_4.

Method 11_4:

Phase changer 205A sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y1(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y1(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 135} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 1(i)} = e^{j\frac{\pi}{4}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(135)}\end{matrix}$

Phase changer 205B sets the coefficient used in the multiplication forthe phase change to y2(i). i indicates a symbol number and is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0. Here, y2(i) is expressed as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 136} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y\; 2(i)} = e^{j\frac{2 \times \pi \times i}{9}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(136)}\end{matrix}$

Although first through fifth examples are given above, the detailedphase change method employed by phase changer 205A, phase changer 205Bis not limited to these examples.

<7> In phase changer 205A, phase change is implementedcyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis, and in phase changer 205B,phase change is implemented using a specific phase change value (set).

<8> In phase changer 205B, phase change is implemented using a specificphase change value (set), and in phase changer 205B, phase change isimplemented cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis.

<3> In phase changer 205A and phase changer 205B, a phase change isimplemented cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis.

So long as a method according to one or more of <7> and <8> is set indetail according to [u2 u3], it may be implemented in the same manner asdescribed above.

In weighting synthesizer 203 included in the base station, the matrixused for the weighting synthesis may be changed. Control information forsetting the weighting synthesis matrix shall be referred to as u8, u9.The relationship between [u8 u9] and the weighting synthesis matrix tobe used in detail by weighting synthesizer 203 is given in Table 5.

Note that u8, u9 are, for example, transmitted by the base station assome of the control information symbols, namely, other symbols 403, 503.The terminal obtains [u8 u9] included in control information symbols,namely, other symbols 403, 503, becomes aware of operations performed byweighting synthesizer 203 from [u8 u9], and demodulates and decodes datasymbols. Also, the control information for identifying “detailedweighting matrix” is 2-bit information, but the number of bits may beother than 2 bits.

TABLE 5 u8 u9 phase change method when [u0 u1] = [10] 00 precoding usingmatrix 1 01 precoding using matrix 2 10 precoding using matrix 3 11determine precoding method based on information from communicationpartner

When [u8 u9]=[00] (i.e., u8=0, u9=0), in weighting synthesizer 203 inthe base station, precoding that uses matrix 1 is performed.

When [u8 u9]=[01] (i.e., u8=0, u9=1), in weighting synthesizer 203 inthe base station, precoding that uses matrix 2 is performed.

When [u8 u9]=[10] (i.e., u8=1, u9=0), in weighting synthesizer 203 inthe base station, precoding that uses matrix 3 is performed.

When [u8 u9]=[11] (i.e., u8=1, u9=1), the base station obtains, from thecommunication partner, for example, feedback information, and based onthe feedback information, in weighting synthesizer 203 of the basestation, calculates a precoding matrix to be used, and performsprecoding using the calculated precoding matrix.

As described above, weighting synthesizer 203 in the base stationswitches between precoding matrices. The terminal, which is thecommunication partner of the base station, obtains u8, u9 included inthe control information symbol, and based on u8, u9, can demodulate anddecode the data symbols. With this, since a suitable precoding matrixcan be set based on the communications situation such as the state ofthe radio wave propagation environment, the terminal can achieve anadvantageous effect of achieving a high data reception quality.

Although identification methods such as those for phase changers 205A,205B in the base station indicated in Table 1 have been described,settings such as those in Table 6 may be used instead of those in Table1.

Transmission device 2303 in the base station illustrated in FIG. 23 hasthe configuration illustrated in FIG. 1. Signal processor 106illustrated in FIG. 1 has the configuration illustrated in any one ofFIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29,FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG. 33. Here, operation performed byphase changers 205A, 205B may be switched depending on thecommunications environment or the settings. Control information relatingto operations performed by phase changers 205A, 205B is transmitted bythe base station as a part of the control information transmitted viacontrol information symbols, namely, other symbols 403, 503 in the frameconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 4, FIG. 5, FIG. 13, and FIG. 14.

Here, control information relating to operations performed by phasechangers 205A, 205B is expressed as u10. The relationship between [u10]and phase changers 205A, 205B is illustrated in Table 6.

TABLE 6 change phase change value on a per-symbol basis u10(cyclically/regularly) 0 OFF 1 ON

Note that u10 is transmitted by the base station as some of the controlinformation symbols, namely other symbols 403, 503. The terminal obtains[u10] included in control information symbols, namely, other symbols403, 503, becomes aware of operations performed by phase changers 205A205B from [u10], and demodulates and decodes data symbols.

Interpretation of Table 6 is as follows.

When the settings in the base station are configured such that phasechangers 205A, 205B do not implement a phase change, u10 is set to 0(u10=0). Accordingly, phase changer 205A outputs signal 206A withoutimplementing a phase change on input signal 204A. Similarly, phasechanger 205B outputs a signal (206B) without implementing a phase changeon the input signal (204B).

When the settings in the base station are configured such that phasechangers 205A, 205B implement a phase change cyclically/regularly on aper-symbol basis, u10 is set to 1 (u10=1). Note that since the methodused by phase changers 205A, 205B to implement a phase changecyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis is described in detail inEmbodiments 1 through 6, detailed description thereof is omitted. Whensignal processor 106 in FIG. 1 is configured as illustrated in any oneof FIG. 20, FIG. 21, and FIG. 22, u10 is also set to 1 (u10=1) when thesettings in the base station are configured such that phase changer 205Aimplements a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis andphase changer 205B does not implement a phase changecyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis, and when the settings in thebase station are configured such that phase changer 205A does notimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis andphase changer 205B implements a phase change cyclically/regularly on aper-symbol basis.

With this, the terminal can achieve an advantageous effect of achievinga high data reception quality by turning the operation of the phasechange performed by phase changers 205A, 205B on and off based on thecommunications situation such as the state of the radio wave propagationenvironment.

Transmission device 2303 in the base station illustrated in FIG. 23 hasthe configuration illustrated in FIG. 1. Signal processor 106illustrated in FIG. 1 has the configuration illustrated in any one ofFIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29,FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG. 33. Here, operations performed byphase changers 209A, 209B may be switched depending on thecommunications environment or the settings. Control information relatingto operations performed by phase changers 209A, 209B is transmitted bythe base station as a part of the control information transmitted viacontrol information symbols, namely other symbols 403, 503 in the frameconfigurations illustrated in FIG. 4, FIG. 5, FIG. 13, and FIG. 14.

Here, control information relating to operations performed by phasechangers 209A, 209B is expressed as u11. The relationship between [u11]and phase changers 209A, 209B is illustrated in Table 7.

TABLE 7 u11 phase change (or cyclic delay diversity) 0 OFF 1 ON

Note that u11 is transmitted by the base station as some of the controlinformation symbols, namely other symbols 403, 503. The terminal obtains[u11] included in control information symbols, namely, other symbols403, 503, becomes aware of operations performed by phase changers 209A,209B from [u11], and demodulates and decodes data symbols.

Interpretation of Table 7 is as follows.

When the settings in the base station are configured such that phasechangers 209A 209B do not implement a phase change, u11 is set to 0(u11=0). Accordingly phase changer 209A outputs a signal (210A) withoutimplementing a phase change on the input signal (208A). Similarly phasechanger 209B outputs a signal (210B) without implementing a phase changeon the input signal (208B).

When the settings in the base station are configured such that phasechangers 209A, 209B implement a phase change cyclically/regularly on aper-symbol basis or apply cyclic delay diversity, u11 is set to 1(u11=1).

Note that since the method used by phase changers 209A, 209B toimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis isdescribed in detail in Embodiments 1 through 6, detailed descriptionthereof is omitted. When signal processor 106 in FIG. 1 is configured asillustrated in any one of FIG. 19 and FIG. 22, u11 is also set to 1(u11=1) when the settings in the base station are configured such thatphase changer 209A implements a phase change cyclically/regularly on aper-symbol basis and phase changer 209B does not implement a phasechange cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis, and when the settingsin the base station are configured such that phase changer 209A does notimplement a phase change cyclically/regularly on a per-symbol basis andphase changer 209B implements a phase change cyclically/regularly on aper-symbol basis.

With this, the terminal can achieve an advantageous effect of achievinga high data reception quality by turning the operation of the phasechange performed by phase changers 209A, 209B on and off based on thecommunications situation such as the state of the radio wave propagationenvironment.

Next, an example of switching the operations performed by phase changers205A, 205B shown in Table 1 will be given.

For example, the base station and the terminal may communicate asillustrated in FIG. 27. Note that communication based on FIG. 27 hasbeen described above, and as such, description will be partiallyomitted.

First, the terminal requests communication with the base station.

The base station then selects “implement phase change using a specificphase change value (set)” in Table 1, whereby phase changer 205A and/orphase changer 205B perform signal processing equivalent to “implementphase change using a specific phase change value (set)”, and transmitdata symbol #1 2702_1.

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_1 and data symbol#1 2702_1 transmitted by the base station, and demodulates and decodesdata symbol #1 2702_1 based on the transmission method included incontrol information symbol 2701_1. As a result, the terminal determinesthat the data included in data symbol #1 2702_1 is obtained withouterror. The terminal then transmits, to the base station, terminaltransmission symbol 2750_1 including at least information indicatingthat the data included in data symbol #1 2702_1 was obtained withouterror.

The base station receives terminal transmission symbol 2750_1transmitted by the terminal, and based at least on the information thatis included in terminal transmission symbol 2750_1 and indicates thatthe data included in data symbol #1 2702_1 was obtained without error,determines the phase change (set) to be implemented by phase changer205A and/or phase changer 205B to be “implement a phase change at aspecific phase change value (set)”, just as in the case where datasymbol #1 2702_1 is transmitted.

Since the base station obtained the data included in data symbol #12702_1 without error, the terminal can determine that it is highlyprobable that data can be obtained without error when the next datasymbol is transmitted and phase change is implemented using the specificphase change value (set).

This makes it possible to achieve an advantageous effect that it ishighly probable that the terminal can achieve a high data receptionquality. Then, the base station implements a phase change via phasechanger 205A and/or phase changer 205B based on the determined“implement a phase change at a specific phase change value (set)”.

The base station then transmits control information symbol 2701_2 anddata symbol #2 2702_2. Here, at least data symbol #2 2702_2 isimplemented with a phase change using the determined “implement a phasechange at a specific phase change value (set)”.

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_2 and data symbol#2 2702_2 transmitted by the base station, and demodulates and decodesdata symbol #2 2702_2 based on information on the transmission methodincluded in control information symbol 2701_2. As a result, the terminaldetermines that the data included in data symbol #2 2702_2 is notsuccessfully obtained.

The terminal then transmits, to the base station, terminal transmissionsymbol 2750_2 including at least information indicating that the dataincluded in data symbol #2 2702_2 was not successfully obtained.

The base station receives terminal transmission symbol 2750_2transmitted by the terminal, and based at least on the information thatis included in terminal transmission symbol 2750_2 and indicates thatthe data included in data symbol #2 2702_2 was not successfullyobtained, determines the phase change (set) to be implemented by phasechanger 205A and/or phase changer 205B to be changed to“cyclically/regularly change phase change value on a per-symbol basis”.

Since the base station did not obtain the data included in data symbol#2 2702_2 successfully, the terminal can determine that it is highlyprobable that data can be obtained without error when the next datasymbol is transmitted and the phase change method is changed to“cyclically/regularly implement phase change on a per-symbol basis”.

This makes it possible to achieve an advantageous effect that it ishighly probable that the terminal can achieve a high data receptionquality. Accordingly, the base station implements a phase change viaphase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B based on“cyclically/regularly implement phase change on a per-symbol basis”.

Here, the base station transmits control information symbol 2701_3 anddata symbol #2 2702_2-1. At least data symbol #2 2702_2-1 is implementedwith a phase change based on “cyclically/regularly implement phasechange on a per-symbol basis”.

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_3 and data symbol#2 2702_2 transmitted by the base station, and demodulates and decodesdata symbol #2 2702_2-1 based on information on the transmission methodincluded in control information symbol 2701_3. As a result, the terminaldetermines that the data included in data symbol #2 2702_2-1 is notsuccessfully obtained. The terminal then transmits, to the base station,terminal transmission symbol 2750_3 including at least informationindicating that the data included in data symbol #2 2702_2-1 was notsuccessfully obtained.

The base station receives terminal transmission symbol 2750_3transmitted by the terminal, and based at least on the information thatis included in terminal transmission symbol 2750_3 and indicates thatthe data included in data symbol #2 2702_2-1 was not successfullyobtained, determines to set the phase change to be implemented by phasechanger A and phase changer B to once again be “cyclically/regularlyimplement phase change on a per-symbol basis”. Accordingly, the basestation implements a phase change via phase changer 205A and/or phasechanger 205B based on “cyclically/regularly implement phase change on aper-symbol basis”. Here, the base station transmits control informationsymbol 2701_4 and data symbol #2 2702_2-2. At least data symbol #22702_2-2 is implemented with a phase change based on“cyclically/regularly implement phase change on a per-symbol basis”.

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_4 and data symbol#2 2702_2-2 transmitted by the base station, and demodulates and decodesdata symbol #2 2702_2-2 based at least on information on thetransmission method included in control information symbol 2701_4. As aresult, the terminal determines that the data included in data symbol #22702_2-2 is obtained without error. The terminal then transmits, to thebase station, terminal transmission symbol 2750_4 including at leastinformation indicating that the data included in data symbol #2 2702_2-2was obtained without error.

The base station receives terminal transmission symbol 2750_4transmitted by the terminal, and based at least on the information thatis included in terminal transmission symbol 2750_4 and indicates thatthe data included in data symbol #2 2702-2 was obtained without error,determines the phase change (set) to be implemented by phase changer205A and/or phase changer 205B to be “implement a phase change at aspecific phase change value (set)”. Then, the base station implements aphase change via phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B based onthe determined “implement a phase change at a specific phase changevalue (set)”.

The base station then transmits control information symbol 2701_5 anddata symbol #3 2702_3. Here, at least data symbol #3 2702_3 isimplemented with a phase change based on “implement a phase change at aspecific phase change value (set)”.

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_5 and data symbol#3 2702_3 transmitted by the base station, and demodulates and decodesdata symbol #3 2702_3 based on information on the transmission methodincluded in control information symbol 2701_5. As a result, the terminaldetermines that the data included in data symbol #3 2702_3 is obtainedwithout error. The terminal then transmits, to the base station,terminal transmission symbol 2750_5 including at least informationindicating that the data included in data symbol #3 2702_3 was obtainedwithout error.

The base station receives terminal transmission symbol 2750_5transmitted by the terminal, and based at least on the information thatis included in terminal transmission symbol 2750_5 and indicates thatthe data included in data symbol #3 2702_3 was obtained without error,determines the method to be implemented by phase changer 205A and/orphase changer 205B to be the method “implement a phase change at aspecific phase change value (set)”. The base station then transmits datasymbol #4 2702_4 based on “implement a phase change at a specific phasechange value (set)”.

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_6 and data symbol#4 2702_4 transmitted by the base station, and demodulates and decodesdata symbol #4 2702_4 based on information on transmission methodincluded in control information symbol 2701_6. As a result, the terminaldetermines that the data included in data symbol #4 2702_4 is notsuccessfully obtained. The terminal then transmits, to the base station,terminal transmission symbol 2750_6 including at least informationindicating that the data included in data symbol #4 2702_4 was notsuccessfully obtained.

The base station receives terminal transmission symbol 2750_6transmitted by the terminal, and based at least on the information thatis included in terminal transmission symbol 2750_6 and indicates thatthe data included in data symbol #4 2702_4 was not successfullyobtained, determines to change the phase change to be implemented byphase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B to “cyclically/regularlyimplement phase change on a per-symbol basis”. Accordingly, the basestation implements a phase change via phase changer 205A and/or phasechanger 205B based on “cyclically/regularly implement phase change on aper-symbol basis”. Here, the base station transmits control informationsymbol 2701_7 and data symbol #4 2702_4-1. At least data symbol #42702_4-1 is implemented with a phase change based on“cyclically/regularly implement phase change on a per-symbol basis”.

The terminal receives control information symbol 2701_7 and data symbol#4 2702_4-1 transmitted by the base station, and demodulates and decodesdata symbol #4 2702_4-1 based on information on the transmission methodincluded in control information symbol 2701_7.

Note that regarding data symbol #1 2702_1, data symbol #2 2702_2, datasymbol #3 2702_3, and data symbol #4 2702_4, the base station transmitsa plurality of modulated signals from a plurality of antennas, just asdescribed in Embodiments 1 through 6.

The frame configurations of the base station and terminal illustrated inFIG. 27 are mere non-limiting examples; other symbols may be included.Moreover, control information symbol 2701_1, 2701_2, 2701_3, 2701_4,2701_5, 2701_6, data symbol #1 2702_1, data symbol #2 2702_2, datasymbol #3 2702_3, and data symbol #4 2702_4 may each include othersymbols, such as a pilot symbol. Moreover, control information symbol2701_1, 2701_2, 2701_3, 2701_4, 2701_5, and 2701_6 include informationrelating to the specific phase change value (set) used upon transmittingdata symbol #1 2702_1, data symbol #2 2702_2, data symbol #3 2702_3, anddata symbol #4 2702_4, and the terminal becomes capable of demodulatingand decoding data symbol #1 2702_1, data symbol #2 2702_2, data symbol#3 2702_3, and data symbol #4 2702_4 as a result of obtaining thisinformation.

Note that the switching of the transmission method based on Table 1described in this embodiment of the base station with reference to FIG.27 is not limited to the above description. The above description ismerely one example. The switching of the transmission method based onTable 1 may be performed more flexibly.

As described above, by switching the transmission method, switching thephase change method, and switching implementation of the phase change onor off in a more flexible manner in accordance with, for example, thecommunications network, the reception device of the communicationpartner can achieve an advantageous effect of an improvement in datareception quality.

Note that a method for switching the precoding matrix based on, forexample, information from the communication partner, may be allotted to“reserve” in Table 1 according to this embodiment, which is associatedwith u0=1 and u1=1. In other words, when the base station selects theMIMO transmission method, the base station may be allowed to also selecta method for selecting a precoding matrix based on information from thecommunication partner.

In this embodiment, the configuration of signal processor 106illustrated in FIG. 1 was exemplified using FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30,FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG. 33, but for Embodiments 1 through 6 as well,signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 1 can be configured asillustrated in FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG. 33.

(Supplemental Information 3)

The method used to map each symbol in the mapper described in thepresent disclosure may be switched regularly/cyclically, for example.For example, a modulation scheme that has 16 signal points in anin-phase I-orthogonal Q plane for transmitting 4 bits is implemented.Here, the arrangement of the 16 signal points for transmitting the fourbits in the in-phase I-orthogonal Q plane may be changed on a per-symbolbasis.

Moreover, in Embodiments 1 through 6, a case in which a multi-carrierscheme such as OFDM is implemented is described, but a single-carrierscheme may be implemented in the same manner.

Moreover, the embodiments according to the present disclosure may beimplemented in the same manner even when a spread spectrum communicationmethod is implemented.

(Supplemental Information 4)

In each embodiment disclosed in the present disclosure, an example ofthe configuration of the transmission device is given in FIG. 1, andexamples of the configuration of signal processor 106 illustrated inFIG. 1 are given in FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22,FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG. 33. However, theconfiguration of transmission device is not limited to the configurationillustrated in FIG. 1, and the configuration of signal processor 106 isnot limited to the examples illustrated in FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19,FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32,and FIG. 33. In other words, the transmission device and signalprocessor 106 included in the transmission device may be configured inany manner so long as the transmission device can generate a signalequivalent to either of the processed signal 106_A or 106_B described inthe above embodiments according to the present disclosure and transmitthe signal using a plurality of antenna units.

Hereinafter, a different configuration example of the transmissiondevice and signal processor 106 included in the transmission device thatmeet this requirement will be given.

One example of a different configuration is one in which mapper 104illustrated in FIG. 1 generates, as mapped signal 105_1, 105_2, a signalequivalent to weighting synthesized signal 204A, 204B illustrated in anyone of FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, and FIG. 22, based onencoded data 103 and control signal 100, signal processor 106 includes aconfiguration in which weighting synthesizer 203 is removed from aconfiguration illustrated in any one of FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG.20, FIG. 21, and FIG. 22. Mapped signal 105_1 is input into phasechanger 205A or inserter 207A, and mapped signal 105_2 is input intophase changer 205B or inserter 207B.

Another example of a different configuration is one in which, when theweighting synthesis (precoding) processing is expressed as (precoding)matrix F illustrated in Equation (33) or Equation (34), weightingsynthesizer 203 illustrated in FIG. 2 does not perform signal processingfor weighting synthesis on mapped signal 201A, 201B, outputs mappedsignal 201A as weighting synthesized signal 204A, and outputs mappedsignal 201B as weighting synthesized signal 204B.

In such a case, weighting synthesizer 203 performs, based on controlsignal 200, control of switching between (i) performing signalprocessing corresponding to weighting synthesis to generate weightingsynthesized signal 204A. 204B, and (ii) outputting mapped signal 201A asweighting synthesized signal 204A and outputting mapped signal 201B asweighting synthesized signal 204B without performing signal processingfor weighting synthesis. Moreover, when the only weighting synthesis(precoding) processing that is performed is the processing expressed as(precoding) matrix F in Equation (33) or Equation (34), weightingsynthesizer 203 may be omitted.

Thus, even if the specific configuration of the transmission device ischanged in this manner, so long as the transmission device can generatea signal equivalent to either of the processed signal 106A or 106_Bdescribed in the above embodiments according to the present disclosureand transmit the signal using a plurality of antenna units, thereception device, it is possible to achieve the advantageous effect thatdata reception quality in the reception device can be improved withrespect to data symbols that perform MIMO transmission or transmit aplurality of streams when the environment is one in which the directwaves are dominant, such as in an LOS environment.

Note that in signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 1, a phase changemay be provided both before and after weighting synthesizer 203. Morespecifically, signal processor 106 includes, before weightingsynthesizer 203, one or both of phase changer 205A_1 that generatesphase-changed signal 2801A by applying a phase change to mapped signal201A, and phase changer 205B_1 that generates phase-changed signal 2801Bby applying a phase change to mapped signal 201B.

Signal processor 106 further includes, before inserter 207A, 207B, oneor both of phase changer 205A_2 that generates phase-changed signal 206Aby applying a phase change to weighting synthesized signal 204A, andphase changer 205B_2 that generates phase-changed signal 206B byapplying a phase change to weighting synthesized signal 204B.

Here, when signal processor 106 includes phase changer 205A_1, one inputof weighting synthesizer 203 is phase-changed signal 2801A, and whensignal processor 106 does not include phase changer 205A_1, one input ofweighting synthesizer 203 is mapped signal 201A.

When signal processor 106 includes phase changer 205B_1, the other inputof weighting synthesizer 203 is phase-changed signal 2801B, and whensignal processor 106 does not include phase changer 205B_1, the otherinput of weighting synthesizer 203 is mapped signal 201B. When signalprocessor 106 includes phase changer 205A_2, the input of inserter 207Ais phase-changed signal 206A, and when signal processor 106 does notinclude phase changer 205A_2, the input of inserter 207A is weightingsynthesized signal 204A.

When signal processor 106 includes phase changer 205B_2, the input ofinserter 207B is phase-changed signal 206B, and when signal processor106 does not include phase changer 205B_2, the input of inserter 207B isweighting synthesized signal 204B.

Moreover, the transmission device illustrated in FIG. 1 may include asecond signal processor that implements different signal processing onprocessed signal 106_A, 106_B, i.e., the output of signal processor 106.Here, radio unit 107_A receives an input of signal A processed withsecond signal processing and performs predetermined processing on theinput signal, and radio unit 107_B receives an input of signal Bprocessed with second signal processing and performs predeterminedprocessing on the input signal, where signal A and signal B processedwith second signal processing are two signals output from a secondsignal processor.

Embodiment A1

Hereinafter, a case in which the base station (AP) and the terminalcommunicate with each other will be described. Here, the base station(AP) can transmit a plurality of modulated signals including a pluralityof streams of data using a plurality of antennas.

For example, the base station (AP) includes the transmission deviceillustrated in FIG. 1 in order to transmit a plurality of modulatedsignals including a plurality of streams of data using a plurality ofantennas. Moreover, the base station (AP) includes, as the configurationof signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 1, a configurationillustrated in any one of FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21,FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG. 33.

The following will describe a case in which the transmission devicedescribed above implements phase change on at least one modulated signalafter precoding. In this embodiment, the base station (AP) is capableswitching between implementing and not implementing a phase change,based on a control signal. Accordingly, the following holds true.

<When Phase Change is Implemented>

The base station (AP) implements a phase change on at least onemodulated signal. The base station (AP) transmits a plurality ofmodulated signals using a plurality of antennas. Note that thetransmission method of implementing a phase change on at least onemodulated signal and transmitting a plurality of modulated signals usinga plurality of antennas is as described in the plurality of embodimentsaccording to the present disclosure.

<When Phase Change is not Implemented>

The base station (AP) performs precoding (weighting synthesis) describedin the present disclosure on a plurality of streams of modulated signals(baseband signals), and without implementing a phase change, transmitsthe generated plurality of modulated signals using a plurality ofantennas. However, as described above, the precoder (weightingsynthesizer) is not required to perform precoding, and a configurationin which precoding is never performed and a precoder (weightingsynthesizer) is not included is also acceptable.

Note that the base station (AP) transmits control information fornotifying the terminal, which is the communication partner, whether ornot phase change is to be implemented, using a preamble, for example.

FIG. 34 illustrates one example of a system configuration in a state inwhich base station (AP) 3401 and terminal 3402 are communicating.

As illustrated in FIG. 34, base station (AP) 3401 transmits a modulatedsignal and terminal 3402, which is the communication partner, receivesthe modulated signal. Terminal 3402 then transmits a modulated signal,and base station 3401, which is the communication partner, receives themodulated signal.

FIG. 35 illustrates one example of communication between base station(AP) 3401 and terminal 3402.

In FIG. 35, (A) illustrates the temporal state of a signal transmittedby base station (AP) 3401. Time is represented on the horizontal axis.In FIG. 35, (B) illustrates the temporal state of a signal transmittedby terminal 3402. Time is represented on the horizontal axis.

First, base station (AP) 3401 transmits transmission request 3501including requested information indicating a request to transmit amodulated signal, for example.

Terminal 3402 receives transmission request 3501 transmitted by basestation (AP) 3401, which is requested information indicating a requestto transmit a modulated signal, and, for example, transmits receptioncapability notification symbol 3502 including information indicating thereception capability of terminal 3402 (or a receivable scheme).

Base station (AP) 3401 receives reception capability notification symbol3502 transmitted by terminal 3402, and based on the information includedin reception capability notification symbol 3502, determines an errorcorrection encoding method, modulation scheme (or modulation schemeset), and a transmission method, and transmits modulated signal 3503that includes, for example, data symbols, and is generated by mappingand implementing other signal processing (such as precoding, phasechange) on information (data) to be transmitted within the errorcorrection encoding and modulation scheme, based on the determinedschemes and methods.

Note that, for example, data symbols 3503 may include a controlinformation symbol. In such a case, when transmitting the data symbolsusing a transmission method of transmitting a plurality of modulatedsignals including a plurality of streams of data using a plurality ofantennas, a control symbol may be transmitted that includes informationfor notifying the communication partner of whether a phase change wasimplemented on at least one modulated signal or not. This allows thecommunication partner to easily change demodulation methods.

Terminal 3402 obtains data upon receiving, for example, data symbols3503 transmitted by base station 3401.

FIG. 36 illustrates an example of data included in reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502 transmitted by the terminal illustrated in FIG.35. FIG. 36 illustrates data 3601 indicating information relating tophase change demodulation support, and data 3602 indicating informationrelating to reception directionality control support.

Note that in data 3601 indicating information relating to phase changedemodulation support, “supported” indicates, for example, the followingstate.

“Phase change demodulation is supported” means, when base station (AP)3401 applies a phase change to at least one modulated signal and aplurality of modulated signals are transmitted using a plurality ofantennas, terminal 3402 can receive and demodulate the modulatedsignals. In other words, demodulation taking into consideration phasechange can be performed to obtain data. Note that the transmissionmethod of implementing a phase change on at least one modulated signaland transmitting a plurality of modulated signals using a plurality ofantennas is as described in the plurality of embodiments according tothe present disclosure.

In data 3601 indicating information relating to phase changedemodulation support, “not supported” indicates, for example, thefollowing state.

“Phase change demodulation is not supported” means, when base station(AP) 3401 applies a phase change to at least one modulated signal and aplurality of modulated signals are transmitted using a plurality ofantennas, even if terminal 3402 receives the modulated signals,demodulation of the modulated signals is arduous. In other words,demodulation taking into consideration phase change is arduous. Notethat the transmission method of implementing a phase change on at leastone modulated signal and transmitting a plurality of modulated signalsusing a plurality of antennas is as described in the plurality ofembodiments according to the present disclosure.

For example, when terminal 3402 supports phase change, as describedabove, data 3601 indicating information relating to phase changedemodulation support is set to “0”, and terminal 3402 transmitsreception capability notification symbol 3502. Moreover, when terminal3402 does not support phase change, as described above, data 3601indicating information relating to phase change demodulation support isset to “1”, and terminal 3402 transmits reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502.

Then, base station (AP) 3401 receives data 3601 transmitted by terminal3402 indicating information relating to phase change demodulationsupport. When the reception indicates “supported” with phase change andbase station (AP) 3401 determines to transmit a plurality of streams ofmodulated signals using a plurality of antennas, base station (AP) 3401may transmit the modulated signals using either <method #1> or <method#2> described below. Alternatively base station (AP) 3401 transmits themodulated signals using <method #2>. Note that “reception indicates“supported”” means receipt of “0” as data 3601 indicating informationrelating to phase change demodulation support.

<Method #1>

Base station (AP) 3401 performs precoding (weighting synthesis)described in the present disclosure on a plurality of streams ofmodulated signals (baseband signals), and without implementing a phasechange, transmits the generated plurality of modulated signals using aplurality of antennas. However, as described in the present disclosure,the precoder (weighting synthesizer) need not perform a precodingprocess.

<Method #2>

Base station (AP) 3401 implements a phase change on at least onemodulated signal. The base station (AP) transmits a plurality ofmodulated signals using a plurality of antennas. Note that thetransmission method of implementing a phase change on at least onemodulated signal and transmitting a plurality of modulated signals usinga plurality of antennas is as described in the plurality of embodimentsaccording to the present disclosure.

Here, what is important is that <method #2> is included as atransmission method selectable by base station (AP) 3401. Accordingly,base station (AP) 3401 may transmit modulated signals using a methodother than <method #1> and <method #2>.

Base station (AP) 3401 receives data 3601 transmitted by terminal 3402indicating information relating to phase change demodulation support.When the reception indicates “not supported” with phase change and basestation (AP) 3401 determines to transmit a plurality of streams ofmodulated signals using a plurality of antennas, for example, basestation (AP) 3401 may transmit the modulated signals using <method #1>.Note that “reception indicates “not supported”” means receipt of “1” asdata 3601 indicating information relating to phase change demodulationsupport.

Here, <method #2> is not included as a transmission method selectable bybase station (AP) 3401. Accordingly, base station (AP) 3401 may transmitmodulated signals using a transmission method that is different from<method #1> and is not <method #2>.

Note that reception capability notification symbol 3502 may include dataindicating information other than data 3601 indicating informationrelating to phase change demodulation support. For example, thereception device of terminal 3402 may include data 3602 indicatinginformation relating to reception directionality control support.Accordingly, the configuration of reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 is not limited to the configuration illustrated in FIG. 36.

For example, when base station (AP) 3401 includes a function oftransmitting a modulated signal using a method other than <method #1>and <method #2>, the reception device in terminal 3402 may include dataindicating information relating to support of that method other than<method #1> and <method #2>.

For example, when terminal 3402 can perform reception directionalitycontrol, “0” is set as data 3602 indicating information relating toreception directionality control support. When terminal 3402 cannotperform reception directionality control, “1” is set as data 3602indicating information relating to reception directionality controlsupport.

Terminal 3402 transmits information on data 3602 relating to receptiondirectionality control support, base station (AP) 3401 receives thisinformation, and when it is determined that terminal 3402 supportsreception directionality control, base station (AP) 3401 and terminal3402 transmits, for example, a training symbol, reference symbol, and/orcontrol information symbol for reception directionality control forterminal 3402.

FIG. 37 illustrates an example of data included in reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502 transmitted by the terminal illustrated in FIG.35, different from the example illustrated in FIG. 36. Note thatcomponents that perform the same operations as in FIG. 36 share likereference numerals. Accordingly, since data 3601 indicating informationrelating to phase change demodulation support in FIG. 37 has alreadybeen described, repeated description will be omitted.

Next, data 3702 indicating information relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams in FIG. 37 will be described.

In data 3702 indicating information relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams, “supported” indicates, for example, thefollowing state.

When base station (AP) 3401 that supports reception for a plurality ofstreams transmits a plurality of modulated signals from a plurality ofantennas to transmit a plurality of streams, this means the terminal canreceive and demodulate the plurality of modulated signals transmitted bythe base station. However, for example, when base station (AP) 3401transmits a plurality of modulated signals from a plurality of antennas,whether a phase change has been implemented or not is not distinguished.In other words, when base station (AP) 3401 defines a plurality oftransmission methods for transmitting a plurality of modulated signalsfrom a plurality of antennas to transmit a plurality of streams, theterminal may depend on at least one transmission method with whichdemodulation is possible.

In data 3702 indicating information relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams, “not supported” indicates, for example, thefollowing state.

When base station (AP) 3401 does not support reception for a pluralityof streams and a plurality of transmission methods are defined astransmission methods for transmitting, from a plurality of antennas, aplurality of modulated signals for transmitting a plurality of streams,terminal 3402 cannot demodulate the modulated signals even iftransmitted by base station using any one of the transmission methods.

For example, when terminal 3402 supports reception for a plurality ofstreams, data 3702 relating to support for reception for a plurality ofstreams is set to “0”. When the terminal (3402) does not supportreception for a plurality of streams, data 3702 relating to support forreception for a plurality of streams is set to “1”.

Accordingly, when terminal 3402 has data 3702 relating to support forreception for a plurality of streams set to “0”, data 3601 relating tophase change demodulation support is valid, and in such a case, basestation (AP) 3401 determines the transmission method to use to transmitdata based on data 3601 relating to phase change demodulation supportand data 3702 relating to support for reception for a plurality ofstreams.

When terminal 3402 has data 3702 relating to support for reception for aplurality of streams set to “1”, data 3601 indicating informationrelating to phase change demodulation support is null, and in such acase, base station (AP) 3401 determines the transmission method to useto transmit data based on data 3702 relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams.

With this, as a result of terminal 3402 transmitting receptioncapability notification symbol 3502 and base station (AP) 3401determining a transmission method to use to transmit data based on thissymbol, there is an advantageous point that data can be actuallytransmitted to the terminal (since it is possible to reduce instances inwhich data is transmitted using a transmission method via whichdemodulation cannot be performed by terminal 3402), and, accordingly, anadvantages effect that data transfer efficiency of base station (AP)3401 can be improved.

Moreover, when data 3601 indicating information relating to phase changedemodulation support is present as reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 and terminal 3402 that supports phase change demodulationand base station (AP) 3401 communicate, base station (AP) 3401 canaccurate select the mode “transmit modulated signal using transmissionmethod that implements a phase change”, whereby an advantageous effectthat terminal 3402 can obtain a high reception quality even in anenvironment in which direct waves are dominant can be achieved.

Moreover, when a terminal that does not support the phase changedemodulation and base station (AP) 3401 communicate, base station (AP)3401 can accurately select a transmission method via which reception ispossible by terminal 3402, which makes it possible to achieve anadvantageous effect that it is possible to improve data transferefficiency.

Note that in FIG. 35, (A) illustrates a signal transmitted by basestation (AP) 3401 and (B) illustrates a signal transmitted by terminal3402, but these examples are not limiting. For example, (A) in FIG. 35may illustrate a signal transmitted by terminal 3402 and (B) mayillustrate a signal transmitted by base station (AP) 3401.

Moreover, in FIG. 35, (A) may illustrate a signal transmitted byterminal #1 and (B) may illustrate a signal transmitted by terminal #2.In other words, FIG. 35 may illustrate communication between terminals.

Moreover, in FIG. 35, (A) may illustrate a signal transmitted by basestation (AP) #1 and (B) may illustrate a signal transmitted by basestation (AP) #2. In other words, FIG. 35 may illustrate communicationbetween base stations (APs).

Note that FIG. 35 is not limited to these examples; FIG. 35 illustratescommunication between communications devices.

Moreover, the data symbol in the transmission of, for example, datasymbol 3503 in (A) in FIG. 35 may be a multi-carrier scheme signal suchas an OFDM signal, and may be a single-carrier scheme signal. Similarly,reception capability notification symbol 3502 in FIG. 35 may be amulti-carrier scheme signal such as an OFDM signal, and may be asingle-carrier scheme signal.

For example, when reception capability notification symbol 3502 in FIG.is a single-carrier scheme symbol, in the case of FIG. 35, terminal 3402can achieve an advantageous effect that power consumption can bereduced.

Embodiment A2

Next, a different example will be given.

FIG. 38 illustrates an example of data included in reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502 transmitted by the terminal illustrated in FIG.35, different from the examples illustrated in FIG. 36 and FIG. 37. Notethat components that perform the same operations as in FIG. 36 and FIG.37 share like reference numerals. Moreover, duplicate description ofcomponents that perform the same operations as in FIG. 36 and FIG. 37will be omitted.

First, data 3801 relating to “supported scheme” in FIG. 38 will bedescribed. Transmission of a modulated signal from the base station (AP)to the terminal and transmission of a modulated signal from the terminalto the base station (AP) in FIG. 34 are transmission of a modulatedsignal under a specific frequency (frequency band) communicationsscheme. Communications scheme #A and communications scheme #B areexamples of such a specific frequency (frequency band) communicationsscheme.

For example, data 3801 relating to “supported scheme” is 2-bit data.When the terminal supports communications scheme #A, data 3801 relatingto “supported scheme” is set to “01”. When data 3801 relating to“supported scheme” is set to “01”, even if the base station (AP)transmits a “communications scheme #B” modulated signal, the terminalcannot demodulate and obtain the data.

When the terminal supports communications scheme #B, data 3801 relatingto “supported scheme” is set to “10”. When data 3801 relating to“supported scheme” is set to “10”, even if the base station (AP)transmits a “communications scheme #A” modulated signal, the terminalcannot demodulate and obtain the data.

When the terminal supports both communications scheme #A andcommunications scheme #B, data 3801 relating to “supported scheme” isset to “11”.

Note that communications scheme #A does not include support for a schemethat transmits a plurality of modulated signals including a plurality ofstreams using a plurality of antennas. In other words, there is noselection of “a scheme that transmits a plurality of modulated signalsincluding a plurality of streams using a plurality of antennas” forcommunications scheme #A. Communications scheme #B does include supportfor a scheme that transmits a plurality of modulated signals including aplurality of streams using a plurality of antennas. Selection of “atransmission method that transmits a plurality of modulated signalsincluding a plurality of streams using a plurality of antennas” forcommunications scheme #B is possible.

Next, data 3802 relating to multi-carrier scheme support in FIG. 38 willbe described. “Single-carrier scheme” and “multi-carrier scheme such asOFDM” are selectable for communications scheme #A as a transmissionmethod for a modulated signal. Moreover, “single-carrier scheme” and“multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM” are selectable for communicationsscheme #B as a transmission method for a modulated signal.

For example, data 3802 relating to multi-carrier scheme support is 2-bitdata. When the terminal supports a single-carrier scheme, data 3802relating to multi-carrier scheme support is set to “01”. When data 3802relating to multi-carrier scheme support is set to “01”, even if thebase station (AP) transmits a “multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM”modulated signal, the terminal cannot demodulate and obtain the data.

When the terminal supports a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM, data3802 relating to multi-carrier scheme support is set to “10”. When data3802 relating to multi-carrier scheme support is set to “10”, even ifthe base station (AP) transmits a “single-carrier scheme” modulatedsignal, the terminal cannot demodulate and obtain the data.

When the terminal supports both a single-carrier scheme and amulti-carrier scheme such as OFDM, data 3802 relating to multi-carrierscheme support is set to “11”.

Next, data 3803 relating to “supported error correction encoding scheme”in FIG. 38 will be described. For example, “error correction encodingscheme #C” is an error correction encoding method that supports one ormore encode rates for a code length (block length) of c-bits, and “errorcorrection encoding scheme #D” is an error correction encoding methodthat supports one or more encode rates for a code length (block length)of d-bits. c is an integer that is greater than or equal to 1, d is aninteger that is greater than or equal to 1, and d is greater than c(d>c).

Note that the method that supports one or more encode rates may be amethod that uses a different error correction code for each encode rate,and may be a method that supports one or more encode rates viapuncturing. Moreover, a combination of these methods may be used forsupport with one or more encode rates.

Note that the only selectable choice for communications scheme #A iserror correction encoding scheme #C, whereas error correction encodingscheme #C and error correction encoding scheme #D are selectable choicesfor communications scheme #B.

For example, data 3803 relating to “supported error correction encodingscheme” is 2-bit data. When the terminal supports error correctionencoding scheme #C, data 3803 relating to “supported error correctionencoding scheme” is set to “01”. When data 3803 relating to “supportederror correction encoding scheme” is set to “01”, even if the basestation (AP) uses error correction encoding scheme #D to generate andtransmit a modulated signal, the terminal cannot demodulate and decodethe modulated signal to obtain the data.

When the terminal supports error correction encoding scheme #D, data3803 relating to “supported error correction encoding scheme” is set to“10”. When data 3803 relating to “supported error correction encodingscheme” is set to “10”, even if the base station (AP) uses errorcorrection encoding scheme #C to generate and transmit a modulatedsignal, the terminal cannot demodulate and decode the modulated signalto obtain the data.

When the terminal supports both error correction encoding scheme #C anderror correction encoding scheme #D, data 3803 relating to “supportederror correction encoding scheme” is set to “11”.

The base station (AP) receives, for example, reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502 configured as illustrated in FIG. 38 andtransmitted by the terminal, and base station (AP) determines a methodfor generating a modulated signal including a data symbol for theterminal based on information in reception capability notificationsymbol 3502, and transmits a modulated signal to the terminal.

Next, the characteristic points in such a case will be described.

Example 1

When the terminal performs transmission when data 3801 relating to“supported scheme” is set to “01” (communications scheme #A), the basestation (AP) that receives this data determines that data 3803 relatingto “supported error correction encoding scheme” is null, and when thebase station (AP) generates the modulated signal for the terminal, since“error correction encoding scheme #D” cannot be selected incommunications scheme #A, error correction encoding is performed usingerror correction encoding scheme #C.

Example 2

When the terminal performs transmission when data 3801 relating to“supported scheme” is set to “01” (communications scheme #A), the basestation (AP) that receives this data determines that data 3601 relatingto phase change demodulation support and data 3702 relating to supportfor reception for a plurality of streams are null, and when the basestation (AP) generates the modulated signal for the terminal, since “ascheme that transmits a plurality of modulated signals including aplurality of streams using a plurality of antennas” is not supported incommunications scheme #A, a single stream of a modulated signal isgenerated and transmitted.

In addition to the above examples, for example, consider a case in whichthe following constraints are in place.

[Constraint Condition 1]

In “communications scheme #B”, with a single-carrier scheme, in “ascheme that transmits a plurality of modulated signals including aplurality of streams using a plurality of antennas”, a scheme in which“among a plurality of modulated signals, a phase change is implementedon at least one modulated signal” is not supported, but another schememay be supported. Additionally, in a multi-carrier scheme such as anOFDM scheme, at least a scheme in which “among a plurality of modulatedsignals, a phase change is implemented on at least one modulated signal”is supported, but another scheme may be supported.

The following applies in such a case.

Example 3

When the terminal performs transmission under when “data 3802 relatingto multi-carrier scheme support is set to “01” (single-carrier scheme)”,the base station (AP) that receives this data determines that data 3601relating to phase change demodulation support is null, and when the basestation (AP) generates the modulated signal for the terminal, the basestation (AP) does not use the scheme in which “among a plurality ofmodulated signals, a phase change is implemented on at least onemodulated signal”.

Note that FIG. 38 is one example of a “reception capability notificationsymbol” (3502) that is transmitted by the terminal. As described withreference to FIG. 38, when the terminal transmits information on aplurality of reception abilities (for example, 3601, 3702, 3801, 3802,and 3803 in FIG. 38), when the base station (AP) determines a method forgenerating the modulated signal for the terminal based on a “receptioncapability notification symbol” (3502), there are cases in which thebase station (AP) is required to determine whether a portion of theinformation on the plurality of reception abilities is null or not.Taking this into consideration, when the terminal bundles and transfersthe information on the plurality of reception abilities as a “receptioncapability notification symbol” (3502), the base station (AP) canachieve an advantageous effect in which the generation of the modulatedsignal for the terminal can be determined easily, with low delay.

Embodiment A3

In this embodiment, an operational example in which a single-carrierscheme is implemented in an embodiment described in the presentdisclosure will be given.

FIG. 39 illustrates an example of a frame configuration of transmissionsignal 106_A illustrated in FIG. 1. In FIG. 39, time is represented onthe horizontal axis. The frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 39 isan example of a frame configuration when a single-carrier scheme isused. Symbols are present along the time axis. In FIG. 39, symbols fromtime t1 to t22 are shown.

Preamble 3901 in FIG. 39 corresponds to preamble signal 252 in, forexample, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 28, FIG. 29,FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG. 33. Here, the preamble may transmitdata (data for control purposes), and may be configured as, for example,a symbol for signal detection, a symbol for frequency synchronizationand temporal synchronization, a symbol for channel estimation, or asymbol for frame synchronization.

Control information symbol 3902 in FIG. 39 is a symbol that correspondsto control information symbol signal 253 in, for example, FIG. 2, FIG.18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG.32, and FIG. 33, and is a symbol including control information forrealizing demodulation and decoding of data symbols by the receptiondevice that received the frame illustrated in FIG. 39.

Pilot symbol 3904 illustrated in FIG. 39 is a symbol corresponding topilot signal pa(t)251A such as in FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20,FIG. 21, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, FIG. 33. Pilotsymbol 3904 is, for example, a PSK symbol, and is used by the receptiondevice that receives the frame for, for example, channel estimation(propagation path variation estimation), frequency offset estimation,and phase variation estimation. For example, the transmission deviceillustrated in FIG. 1 and the reception device that receives the frameillustrated in FIG. 39 may share the pilot symbol transmission method.

3903 in FIG. 39 is a data symbol for transmitting data.

Note that mapped signal 201A (mapped signal 105_1 in FIG. 1) is referredto as “stream #1” and mapped signal 201B (mapped signal 105_2 in FIG. 1)is referred to as “stream #2”.

Data symbol 3903 is a symbol corresponding to a data symbol included inbaseband signal 208A generated by signal processing illustrated in, forexample, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 28, FIG. 29,FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG. 33. Accordingly, data symbol 3903 iseither (i) a symbol including both the symbol “stream #1” and the symbol“stream #2”, or (ii) either one of symbol “stream #1” and the symbol“stream #2”. This is determined by the precoding matrix configurationused by weighting synthesizer 203. In other words, data symbol 3903corresponds to weighting synthesized signal 204A (z1(i)).

Note that, although not illustrated in FIG. 39, the frame may includesymbols other than a preamble, control information symbol, data symbol,and pilot symbol. Moreover, not each of preamble 3901, controlinformation symbol 3902, and pilot symbol 3904 need be present in theframe.

For example, in FIG. 39, the transmission device transmits preamble 3901at time t1, transmits control information symbol 3902 at time t2,transmits data symbols 3903 from time t3 to time t11, transmits pilotsymbol 3904 at time t12, transmits data symbols 3903 from time t13 totime t21, and transmits pilot symbol 3904 at time t22.

FIG. 40 illustrates an example of a frame configuration of transmissionsignal 106_B illustrated in FIG. 1. In FIG. 40, time is represented onthe horizontal axis. The frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 40 isan example of a frame configuration when a single-carrier scheme isused. Symbols are present along the time axis. In FIG. 40, symbols fromtime t1 to t22 are shown.

Preamble 4001 in FIG. 40 corresponds to preamble signal 252 in, forexample, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 28, FIG. 29,FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG. 33. Here, the preamble may transmitdata (data for control purposes), and may be configured as, for example,a symbol for signal detection, a symbol for frequency synchronizationand temporal synchronization, a symbol for channel estimation, or asymbol for frame synchronization.

Control information symbol 1102 in FIG. 40 is a symbol that correspondsto control information symbol signal 253 in, for example, FIG. 2, FIG.18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG.32, and FIG. 33, and is a symbol including control information forrealizing demodulation and decoding of data symbols by the receptiondevice that received the frame illustrated in FIG. 40.

Pilot symbol 4004 illustrated in FIG. 40 is a symbol corresponding topilot signal pb(t)251B such as in FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20,FIG. 21, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, FIG. 33. Pilotsymbol 4004 is, for example, a PSK symbol, and is used by the receptiondevice that receives the frame for, for example, channel estimation(propagation path variation estimation), frequency offset estimation,and phase variation estimation. For example, the transmission deviceillustrated in FIG. 1 and the reception device that receives the frameillustrated in FIG. 40 may share the pilot symbol transmission method.

4003 in FIG. 40 is a data symbol for transmitting data.

Note that mapped signal 201A (mapped signal 105_1 in FIG. 1) is referredto as “stream #1” and mapped signal 201B (mapped signal 105_2 in FIG. 1)is referred to as “stream #2”.

Data symbol 4003 is a symbol corresponding to a data symbol included inbaseband signal 208B generated by signal processing illustrated in, forexample, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 28, FIG. 29,FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG. 33. Accordingly, data symbol 4003 iseither (i) a symbol including both the symbol “stream #1” and the symbol“stream #2”, or (ii) either one of symbol “stream #1” and the symbol“stream #2”. This is determined by the precoding matrix configurationused by weighting synthesizer 203. In other words, data symbol 4003corresponds to phase-changed signal 206B (z2(i)).

Note that, although not illustrated in FIG. 40, the frame may includesymbols other than a preamble, control information symbol, data symbol,and pilot symbol. Moreover, not each of preamble 4001, controlinformation symbol 4002, and pilot symbol 4004 need be present in theframe.

For example, in FIG. 40, the transmission device transmits preamble 4001at time t1, transmits control information symbol 4002 at time t2,transmits data symbols 4003 from time t3 to time t11, transmits pilotsymbol 4004 at time t12, transmits data symbols 4003 from time t13 totime t21, and transmits pilot symbol 4004 at time t22.

When a symbol is present at time tp in FIG. 39 and a symbol is presentat time tp in FIG. 40 (where p is an integer that is greater than orequal to 1), the symbol at time tp in FIG. 39 and the symbol at time tpin FIG. 40 are transmitted at the same time and same frequency or at thesame time and same frequency band. For example, the data symbol at timet3 in FIG. 39 and the data symbol at time t3 in FIG. 40 are transmittedat the same time and at the same frequency, or at the same time and atthe same frequency band. Note that the frame configuration is notlimited to the configurations illustrated in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40; FIG.39 and FIG. 40 are mere examples of frame configurations.

Moreover, a method in which the preamble and control information symbolin FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 transmit the same data (same control information)may be used.

Note that this is under the assumption that the frame of FIG. 39 and theframe of FIG. 40 are received at the same time by the reception device,but even when the frame of FIG. 39 or the frame of FIG. 40 has beenreceived, the reception device can obtain the data transmitted by thetransmission device.

Note that a combination of the single-carrier scheme transmissionmethod, transmission device described in this embodiment and theembodiments described above may be implemented.

Embodiment A4

In this embodiment, using the example described in Embodiment A2, anoperational example of the terminal will be given.

FIG. 24 illustrates one example of a configuration of a terminal. Asthis example has already been described, repeated description will beomitted.

FIG. 41 illustrates one example of a configuration of reception device2404 in the terminal illustrated in FIG. 24. Radio unit 4103 receives aninput of reception signal 4102 received by antenna unit 4101, performsprocessing such as frequency conversion, and outputs baseband signal4104.

Control information decoder 4107 receives an input of baseband signal4104, demodulates the control information symbol, and outputs controlinformation 4108.

Channel estimator 4105 receives an input of baseband signal 4104,extracts preamble and pilot symbol, performs channel fluctuationestimation, and outputs channel estimation signal 4106.

Signal processor 4109 receives inputs of baseband signal 4104, channelestimation signal 4106, and control information 4108, demodulates andperforms error correction decoding on a data symbol based on controlinformation 4108, and outputs reception data 4110.

FIG. 42 illustrates an example of a frame configuration upon singlemodulated signal transmission by a base station or AP, which is thecommunication partner of the terminal, using a multi-carriertransmission scheme such as OFDM. In FIG. 42, components that operatethe same as in FIG. 4 share like reference marks.

In FIG. 42, frequency is represented on the horizontal axis, and allcarrier symbols are shown in FIG. 42. Moreover, in FIG. 42, time isrepresented on the vertical axis, and symbols for time $1 through time$11 are shown.

For example, the transmission device in the base station illustrated inFIG. 1 may transmit a single stream modulated signal having the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 42.

FIG. 43 illustrates an example of a frame configuration upon singlemodulated signal transmission by a base station or AP, which is thecommunication partner of the terminal, using a single-carriertransmission scheme. In FIG. 43, components that operate the same as inFIG. 39 share like reference marks.

In FIG. 43, time is represented on the horizontal axis, and symbols fromtime t1 to time t22 are shown in FIG. 43.

For example, the transmission device in the base station illustrated inFIG. 1 may transmit a single stream modulated signal having the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 43.

For example, the transmission device in the base station illustrated inFIG. 1 may transmit a plurality of streams of a plurality of modulatedsignals having the frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 4 and/or FIG.5.

Furthermore, for example, the transmission device in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 1 may transmit a plurality of streams of a pluralityof modulated signals having the frame configuration illustrated in FIG.39 and/or FIG. 40.

The reception device of the terminal has the configuration illustratedin FIG. 41. For example, the reception device of the terminal supportsthe following. For example, the reception device of the terminalsupports reception of “communications scheme #A” described in EmbodimentA2. Accordingly, even if the communication partner transmits a pluralityof streams of a plurality of modulated signals, the terminal does notsupport reception of such. Thus, when the communication partnertransmits a plurality of streams of a plurality of modulated signals andphase change is implemented, the terminal does not support reception ofsuch. The terminal supports only single-carrier schemes. The terminalsupports decoding of “error correction encoding scheme #C” as an errorcorrection encoding scheme.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2, a terminalhaving the configuration illustrated in FIG. 41 that supports the abovegenerates reception capability notification symbol 3502 illustrated inFIG. 38 and transmits reception capability notification symbol 3502 inaccordance with the sequence illustrated in FIG. 35.

Here, the terminal uses, for example, transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 to generate reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 and transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 in accordance with the sequenceillustrated in FIG. 35.

Reception device 2304 in the base station or AP illustrated in FIG. 23receives reception capability notification symbol 3502 transmitted bythe terminal. Control signal generator 2308 in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 then extracts data from reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502, and the terminal knows that communicationsscheme #A is supported from supported scheme 3801.

Accordingly, based on information 3601 relating to phase changedemodulation support in FIG. 38 being null and communications scheme #Abeing supported, control signal generator 2308 in the base stationdetermines to not transmit a phase-changed modulated signal, and outputscontrol signal 2309 including such information. This is becausecommunications scheme #A does not support transmission or reception of aplurality of modulated signals for a plurality of streams.

Based on information 3702 relating to support for reception for aplurality of streams in FIG. 38 being null and communications method #Abeing supported, control signal generator 2308 in the base stationdetermines to not transmit a phase-changed modulated signal, and outputscontrol signal 2309 including such information. This is becausecommunications scheme #A does not support transmission or reception of aplurality of modulated signals for a plurality of streams.

Based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 38 being null and communications method #A beingsupported, control signal generator 2308 in the base station determinesto use error correction encoding scheme #C, and outputs control signal2309 including such information This is because communications scheme #Asupports error correction encoding scheme #C.

For example, as illustrated in FIG. 41, since this is supported bycommunications method #A, the above-described operations are performedso that the base station or AP does not transmit a plurality ofmodulated signals for a plurality of streams, whereby the base stationor AP can achieve an advantageous effect of an improvement in datatransmission efficiency in the system including the base station or APand terminal, due to the communications method #A modulated signal beingaccurately transmitted.

As a second example, the reception device of the terminal has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 41, and supports the following. Forexample, the reception device of the terminal supports reception of“communications scheme #B” described in Embodiment A2. Accordingly,since the reception device has the configuration illustrated in FIG. 41,even if the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams of aplurality of modulated signals, the terminal does not support receptionof such. Thus, when the communication partner transmits a plurality ofstreams of a plurality of modulated signals and phase change isimplemented, the terminal does not support reception of such. Theterminal supports a single-carrier scheme and a multi-carrier schemesuch as OFDM. The terminal supports decoding of “error correctionencoding scheme #C”, “error correction encoding scheme #D” as an errorcorrection encoding scheme.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2, a terminalhaving the configuration illustrated in FIG. 41 that supports the abovetransmits reception capability notification symbol 3502 illustrated inFIG. 38.

Reception device 2304 in the base station or AP illustrated in FIG. 23receives reception capability notification symbol 3502 transmitted bythe terminal. Control signal generator 2308 in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 then extracts data from reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502, and the terminal knows that communicationsscheme #B is supported from supported scheme 3801.

Moreover, based on information 3702 relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams illustrated in FIG. 38, control signalgenerator 2308 in the base station knows that the terminal, which is thecommunication partner, cannot demodulate the plurality of modulatedsignals for the plurality of streams.

Accordingly, based on information 3601 relating to phase changedemodulation support in FIG. 38 being null, control information signalgenerator 2308 in the base station determines to not transmit aphase-changed modulated signal, and outputs control signal 2309including such information. This is because the terminal does notsupport “reception for a plurality of streams”.

Based on information 3802 relating to multi-carrier scheme support inFIG. 38, control signal generator 2308 in the base station outputscontrol signal 2309 including information indicating that the terminal,which is the communication partner, supports a multi-carrier schemeand/or a single-carrier scheme.

Then, based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 38, control signal generator 2308 in the basestation outputs control signal 2309 including information indicatingthat the terminal, which is the communication partner, supports errorcorrection encoding scheme #C and/or error correction encoding scheme#D.

Accordingly, the above-described operations are performed so that thebase station or AP does not transmit a plurality of modulated signalsfor a plurality of streams, whereby the base station or AP can achievean advantageous effect of an improvement in data transmission efficiencyin the system including the base station or AP and terminal, due to thesingle stream modulated signal being accurately transmitted.

As a third example, the reception device of the terminal has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 41, and supports the following. Thereception device of the terminal supports reception of “communicationsscheme #A” and “communications scheme #B” described in Embodiment A2.Accordingly, even if the communication partner transmits a plurality ofstreams of a plurality of modulated signals using either one of“communications scheme #A” or “communications scheme #B”, the terminaldoes not support reception of such. Thus, when the communication partnertransmits a plurality of streams of a plurality of modulated signals andphase change is implemented, the terminal does not support reception ofsuch. Single-carrier schemes are supported in either one of“communications scheme #A” or “communications scheme #B”. Regardingerror correction encoding schemes, the terminal supports decoding of“error correction encoding scheme #C” as “communications scheme #A”, and“error correction encoding scheme #C” and “error correction encodingscheme #D” as “communications scheme #B”.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2, a terminalhaving the configuration illustrated in FIG. 41 that supports the abovegenerates reception capability notification symbol 3502 illustrated inFIG. 38 and transmits reception capability notification symbol 3502 inaccordance with the sequence illustrated in FIG. 35.

Reception device 2304 in the base station or AP illustrated in FIG. 23receives reception capability notification symbol 3502 transmitted bythe terminal. Control signal generator 2308 in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 then extracts data from reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502, and the terminal knows that communicationsscheme #A and communications scheme #B are supported from supportedscheme 3801.

Moreover, based on information 3702 relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams illustrated in FIG. 38, control signalgenerator 2308 in the base station knows that the terminal does notsupport reception for a plurality of streams.

Accordingly, based on information 3601 relating to phase changedemodulation support in FIG. 38 being null and communications scheme #Abeing supported, control signal generator 2308 in the base stationdetermines to not transmit a phase-changed modulated signal, and outputscontrol signal 2309 including such information. This is because terminalA does not support transmission or reception of a plurality of modulatedsignals for a plurality of streams.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station knows whether theterminal supports a single-carrier scheme and knows whether the terminalsupports a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM from information 3802relating to multi-carrier scheme support in FIG. 38.

Then, based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 38, control signal generator 2308 in the basestation knows that the terminal supports decoding of error correctionencoding scheme #C and error correction encoding scheme #D.

Accordingly, the above-described operations are performed so that thebase station or AP does not transmit a plurality of modulated signalsfor a plurality of streams, whereby the base station or AP can achievean advantageous effect of an improvement in data transmission efficiencyin the system including the base station or AP and terminal, due to thesingle stream modulated signal being accurately transmitted.

As a fourth example, the reception device of the terminal has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 41, and, for example, supports thefollowing. The reception device of the terminal supports reception of“communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B” described inEmbodiment A2. Accordingly even if the communication partner transmits aplurality of streams of a plurality of modulated signals using eitherone of “communications scheme #A” or “communications scheme #B”, theterminal does not support reception of such. Thus, when thecommunication partner transmits a plurality of streams of a plurality ofmodulated signals and phase change is implemented, the terminal does notsupport reception of such. The terminal supports a single-carrier schemeas “communications scheme #A”, and supports both a single-carrier schemeand a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM as “communications scheme #B”.Regarding error correction encoding schemes, the terminal supportsdecoding of “error correction encoding scheme #C” as “communicationsscheme #A”, and “error correction encoding scheme #C” and “errorcorrection encoding scheme #D” as “communications scheme #B”.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2, a terminalhaving the configuration illustrated in FIG. 41 that supports the abovegenerates reception capability notification symbol 3502 illustrated inFIG. 38 and transmits reception capability notification symbol 3502 inaccordance with the sequence illustrated in FIG. 35.

Reception device 2304 in the base station or AP illustrated in FIG. 23receives reception capability notification symbol 3502 transmitted bythe terminal. Control signal generator 2308 in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 then extracts data from reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502, and the terminal knows that communicationsscheme #A and communications scheme #B are supported from supportedscheme 3801.

Moreover, based on information 3702 relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams illustrated in FIG. 38, control signalgenerator 2308 in the base station knows that the terminal does notsupport reception for a plurality of streams.

Accordingly, based on information 3601 relating to phase changedemodulation support in FIG. 38 being null and communications scheme #Abeing supported, control signal generator 2308 in the base stationdetermines to not transmit a phase-changed modulated signal, and outputscontrol signal 2309 including such information. This is because terminalA does not support transmission or reception of a plurality of modulatedsignals for a plurality of streams.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station knows whether theterminal supports a single-carrier scheme and knows whether the terminalsupports a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM from information 3802relating to multi-carrier scheme support in FIG. 38.

Here, information 3802 relating to multi-carrier scheme support isrequired to have a configuration such as the following.

Information 3802 relating to multi-carrier scheme support is 4-bitinformation, and the 4 bits are expressed as g0, g1, g2, and g3.

When the terminal supports single-carrier demodulation forcommunications scheme #A, (g0, g1)=(0, 0) is transmitted, when theterminal supports multi-carrier scheme demodulation such as OFDM forcommunications scheme #A, (g0, g1)=(0, 1) is transmitted, and when theterminal supports single-carrier demodulation and multi-carrier schemedemodulation such as OFDM for communications scheme #A, (g0, g1)=(1, 1)is transmitted.

When the terminal supports single-carrier demodulation forcommunications scheme #B, (g2, g3)=(0, 0) is transmitted, when theterminal supports multi-carrier scheme demodulation such as OFDM forcommunications scheme #B, (g2, g3)=(0, 1) is transmitted, and when theterminal supports single-carrier demodulation and multi-carrier schemedemodulation such as OFDM for communications scheme #B, (g2, g3)=(1, 1)is transmitted.

Then, based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 38, control signal generator 2308 in the basestation knows that the terminal supports decoding of error correctionencoding scheme #C and error correction encoding scheme #D.

Accordingly, the above-described operations are performed so that thebase station or AP does not transmit a plurality of modulated signalsfor a plurality of streams, whereby the base station or AP can achievean advantageous effect of an improvement in data transmission efficiencyin the system including the base station or AP and terminal, due to thesingle stream modulated signal being accurately transmitted.

As a fifth example, the reception device of the terminal has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 8, and, for example, supports thefollowing. For example, the reception device of the terminal supportsreception of “communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”described in Embodiment A2. Accordingly, in “communications scheme #B”,even if the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams of aplurality of modulated signals, the terminal supports reception of such.Moreover, in “communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”,even if the communication partner transmits a single stream modulatedsignal, the terminal supports reception of such. Thus, when thecommunication partner transmits a plurality of streams of modulatedsignals and phase change is implemented, the terminal supports receptionof such. The terminal supports single-carrier schemes. The terminalsupports decoding of “error correction encoding scheme #C” as an errorcorrection encoding scheme.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2, a terminalhaving the configuration illustrated in FIG. 8 that supports the abovegenerates reception capability notification symbol 3502 illustrated inFIG. 38 and transmits reception capability notification symbol 3502 inaccordance with the sequence illustrated in FIG. 35.

Here, the terminal uses, for example, transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 to generate reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 and transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 in accordance with the sequenceillustrated in FIG. 35.

Reception device 2304 in the base station or AP illustrated in FIG. 23receives reception capability notification symbol 3502 transmitted bythe terminal. Control signal generator 2308 in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 then extracts data from reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502, and the terminal knows that communicationsscheme #A and communications scheme #B are supported from supportedscheme 3801.

Accordingly, based on information 3702 relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams in FIG. 38, control signal generator 2308 inthe base station knows that in “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a plurality of streams of a plurality ofmodulated signals, the terminal supports reception of such and in“communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a single stream modulated signal, theterminal supports reception of such.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station then knows that theterminal supports phase change demodulation based on information 3601relating to phase change demodulation support in FIG. 38.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station knows that theterminal supports only single-carrier schemes based on information 3802relating to multi-carrier scheme support in FIG. 38.

Then, based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 38, control signal generator 2308 in the basestation knows that the terminal supports decoding of error correctionencoding scheme #C.

Accordingly, the base station or AP takes into consideration thecommunications method supported by the terminal and the communicationsenvironment, for example, and accurately generates and transmits amodulated signal receivable by the terminal to achieve an advantageouseffect of an improvement in data transmission efficiency in the systemincluding the base station or AP and terminal.

As a sixth example, the reception device of the terminal has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 8, and, for example, supports thefollowing. For example, the reception device of the terminal supportsreception of “communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”described in Embodiment A2. Accordingly, in “communications scheme #B”,even if the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams of aplurality of modulated signals, the terminal supports reception of such.Moreover, in “communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”,even if the communication partner transmits a single stream modulatedsignal, the terminal supports reception of such. When the communicationpartner transmits a plurality of streams of modulated signals and phasechange is implemented, the terminal does not support reception of such.The terminal supports single-carrier schemes. The terminal supportsdecoding of “error correction encoding scheme #C” and decoding of “errorcorrection encoding scheme #D” as an error correction encoding scheme.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2, a terminalhaving the configuration illustrated in FIG. 8 that supports the abovegenerates reception capability notification symbol 3502 illustrated inFIG. 38 and transmits reception capability notification symbol 3502 inaccordance with the sequence illustrated in FIG. 35.

Here, the terminal uses, for example, transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 to generate reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 and transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 in accordance with the sequenceillustrated in FIG. 35.

Reception device 2304 in the base station or AP illustrated in FIG. 23receives reception capability notification symbol 3502 transmitted bythe terminal. Control signal generator 2308 in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 then extracts data from reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502, and the terminal knows that communicationsscheme #A and communications scheme #B are supported from supportedscheme 3801.

Accordingly, based on information 3702 relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams in FIG. 38, control signal generator 2308 inthe base station knows that in “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a plurality of streams of a plurality ofmodulated signals, the terminal supports reception of such and in“communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a single stream modulated signal, theterminal supports reception of such.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station then knows that theterminal supports phase change demodulation based on information 3601relating to phase change demodulation support in FIG. 38. Accordingly,the base station or AP transmits a modulated signal without implementinga phase change upon transmission of a plurality of streams of modulatedsignals to the terminal.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station knows that theterminal supports single-carrier schemes based on information 3802relating to multi-carrier scheme support in FIG. 38.

Then, based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 38, control signal generator 2308 in the basestation knows that the terminal supports decoding of error correctionencoding scheme #C and decoding of error correction encoding scheme #D.

Accordingly, the base station or AP takes into consideration thecommunications method supported by the terminal and the communicationsenvironment, for example, and accurately generates and transmits amodulated signal receivable by the terminal to achieve an advantageouseffect of an improvement in data transmission efficiency in the systemincluding the base station or AP and terminal.

As a seventh example, the reception device of the terminal has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 8, and, for example, supports thefollowing. For example, the reception device of the terminal supportsreception of “communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”described in Embodiment A2. Accordingly, in “communications scheme #B”,even if the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams of aplurality of modulated signals, the terminal supports reception of such.Moreover, in “communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”,even if the communication partner transmits a single stream modulatedsignal, the terminal supports reception of such. The terminal supports asingle-carrier scheme as “communications scheme #A”, and supports both asingle-carrier scheme and a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM as“communications scheme #B”. However, in the case of a communicationsscheme #B multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM, upon transmitting aplurality of streams of modulated signals, implementation of a phasechange by the communication partner is possible. Thus, when thecommunication partner transmits a plurality of streams of modulatedsignals and phase change is implemented, the terminal supports receptionof such. The terminal supports decoding of “error correction encodingscheme #C” and decoding of “error correction encoding scheme #D” as anerror correction encoding scheme.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2 and thisembodiment, a terminal having the configuration illustrated in FIG. 8that supports the above generates reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 and, for example, transmits receptioncapability notification symbol 3502 in accordance with the sequenceillustrated in FIG. 35.

Here, the terminal uses, for example, transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 to generate reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 and transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 in accordance with the sequenceillustrated in FIG. 35.

Reception device 2304 in the base station or AP illustrated in FIG. 23receives reception capability notification symbol 3502 transmitted bythe terminal. Control signal generator 2308 in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 then extracts data from reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502, and the terminal knows that communicationsscheme #A and communications scheme #B are supported from supportedscheme 3801.

Accordingly, based on information 3702 relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams in FIG. 38, control signal generator 2308 inthe base station knows that in “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a plurality of streams of a plurality ofmodulated signals, the terminal supports reception of such and in“communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a single stream modulated signal, theterminal supports reception of such.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station then knows that theterminal supports phase change demodulation based on information 3601relating to phase change demodulation support in FIG. 38. Accordingly,the base station or AP transmits a modulated signal without implementinga phase change upon transmission of a plurality of streams of modulatedsignals to the terminal. Note that as described above, when the terminalobtains information indicating “phase change demodulation is supported”from information 3601 relating to “phase change demodulation support”,the terminal understands that the scheme is “communications scheme #B”.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station knows that theterminal supports single-carrier schemes as “communications scheme #A”and supports single-carrier schemes and multi-carrier schemes such asOFDM as “communications scheme #B” based on information 3802 relating tomulti-carrier scheme support in FIG. 38.

Here, as described above, the terminal may be configured to notify thebase station or AP of the status regarding single-carrier scheme supportand multi-carrier schemes such as OFDM according to “communicationsscheme #A” and single-carrier scheme support and multi-carrier schemesuch as OFDM support according to “communications scheme #B”.

Then, based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 38, control signal generator 2308 in the basestation knows that the terminal supports decoding of error correctionencoding scheme #C and decoding of error correction encoding scheme #D.

Accordingly, the base station or AP takes into consideration thecommunications method supported by the terminal and the communicationsenvironment, for example, and accurately generates and transmits amodulated signal receivable by the terminal to achieve an advantageouseffect of an improvement in data transmission efficiency in the systemincluding the base station or AP and terminal.

As an eighth example, the reception device of the terminal has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 8, and, for example, supports thefollowing. For example, the reception device of the terminal supportsreception of “communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”described in Embodiment A2. Accordingly, in “communications scheme #B”,even if the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams of aplurality of modulated signals, the terminal supports reception of such.Moreover, in “communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”,even if the communication partner transmits a single stream modulatedsignal, the terminal supports reception of such. Accordingly, in asingle-carrier scheme of “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a plurality of streams of a plurality ofmodulated signals, the terminal supports reception of such. However, ina multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM of “communications scheme #B”, evenif the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams of aplurality of modulated signals, the terminal does not support receptionof such. Moreover, in the case of a single-carrier scheme of“communications scheme #A”, when the communication partner transmits asingle stream, the terminal supports reception of such, but does notsupport reception of a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM. Thus, when thecommunication partner transmits a plurality of streams of modulatedsignals and phase change is implemented, the terminal supports receptionof such. The terminal supports decoding of “error correction encodingscheme #C” and decoding of “error correction encoding scheme #D” as anerror correction encoding scheme.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2, a terminalhaving the configuration illustrated in FIG. 8 that supports the abovegenerates reception capability notification symbol 3502 illustrated inFIG. 38 and transmits reception capability notification symbol 3502 inaccordance with the sequence illustrated in FIG. 35.

Here, the terminal uses, for example, transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 to generate reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 and transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 in accordance with the sequenceillustrated in FIG. 35.

Reception device 2304 in the base station or AP illustrated in FIG. 23receives reception capability notification symbol 3502 transmitted bythe terminal. Control signal generator 2308 in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 then extracts data from reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502, and the terminal knows that communicationsscheme #A and communications scheme #B are supported from supportedscheme 3801.

Moreover, based on information 3702 relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams in FIG. 38, control signal generator 2308 inthe base station knows that even when the base station transmits aplurality of streams of a plurality of modulated signals, the terminalsupports reception of such in the case of a single-carrier scheme of“communications scheme #B”, and that even when the base stationtransmits a plurality of streams of a plurality of modulated signals,the terminal does not support reception of such in the case of amulti-carrier scheme such as OFDM of “communications scheme #B”.Moreover, based on information 3702 relating to support for receptionfor a plurality of streams in FIG. 38, control signal generator 2308 inthe base station knows that in “communications scheme #A” and“communications scheme #B”, even if the base station transmits a singlestream of a modulated signal, the terminal supports reception of such.

Here, information 3702 relating to support for reception for a pluralityof streams is required to have a configuration such as the following.

Information 3702 relating to support for reception for a plurality ofstreams is 2-bit information, and the 2 bits are expressed as h0 and h1.

In the case of a single-carrier scheme of “communications scheme #B”,when the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams ofmodulated signals and the terminal supports demodulation, h0=1 istransmitted, and when the terminal does not support demodulation, h0=0is transmitted.

In the case of a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM of “communicationsscheme #B”, when the communication partner transmits a plurality ofstreams of modulated signals and the terminal supports demodulation,h1=1 is transmitted, and when the terminal does not supportdemodulation, h1=0 is transmitted.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station then knows that theterminal supports phase change demodulation based on information 3601relating to phase change demodulation support in FIG. 38.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station knows that theterminal supports single-carrier schemes based on information 3802relating to multi-carrier scheme support in FIG. 38.

Then, based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 38, control signal generator 2308 in the basestation knows that the terminal supports decoding of error correctionencoding scheme #C and error correction encoding scheme #D.

Accordingly, the base station or AP takes into consideration thecommunications method supported by the terminal and the communicationsenvironment, for example, and accurately generates and transmits amodulated signal receivable by the terminal to achieve an advantageouseffect of an improvement in data transmission efficiency in the systemincluding the base station or AP and terminal.

As a ninth example, the reception device of the terminal has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 8, and, for example, supports thefollowing. For example, the reception device of the terminal supportsreception of “communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”described in Embodiment A2. In “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a plurality of streams of a plurality ofmodulated signals, the terminal supports reception of such. Moreover, in“communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a single stream modulated signal, theterminal supports reception of such. In “communications scheme #B”, thebase station or AP can transmit a plurality of modulated signals for aplurality of streams in the case of a single-carrier scheme and amulti-carrier scheme such as OFDM. However, in the case of acommunications scheme #B multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM, upontransmitting a plurality of streams of modulated signals, implementationof a phase change by the communication partner is possible. Thus, whenthe communication partner transmits a plurality of streams of modulatedsignals and phase change is implemented, the terminal supports receptionof such. The terminal supports decoding of “error correction encodingscheme #C” and decoding of “error correction encoding scheme #D” as anerror correction scheme.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2, a terminalhaving the configuration illustrated in FIG. 8 that supports the abovegenerates reception capability notification symbol 3502 illustrated inFIG. 38 and transmits reception capability notification symbol 3502 inaccordance with the sequence illustrated in FIG. 35.

Here, the terminal uses, for example, transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 to generate reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 and transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 in accordance with the sequenceillustrated in FIG. 35.

Reception device 2304 in the base station or AP illustrated in FIG. 23receives reception capability notification symbol 3502 transmitted bythe terminal. Control signal generator 2308 in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 then extracts data from reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502, and the terminal knows that communicationsscheme #A and communications scheme #B are supported from supportedscheme 3801.

Based on information 3702 relating to support for reception for aplurality of streams in FIG. 38, control signal generator 2308 in thebase station knows that in “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a plurality of streams of a plurality ofmodulated signals, the terminal supports reception of such, and in“communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a single stream modulated signal, theterminal supports reception of such.

Moreover, based on information 3802 relating to multi-carrier schemesupport in FIG. 38, control signal generator 2308 in the base stationknows whether the terminal supports a single-carrier scheme, supports amulti-carrier scheme such as OFDM, or supports both a single-carrierscheme and a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM.

When the terminal supports a single-carrier scheme, upon control signalgenerator 2308 in the base station knowing this, control signalgenerator 2308 in the base station, in the case of single-carrierscheme, does not support phase-change, and thus ignores information 3601relating to phase change demodulation support in FIG. 38, and this isinterpreted as not supporting demodulation.

When the terminal supports a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM orsupports both a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM and a single-carrierscheme, based on information 3601 relating to phase change demodulationsupport in FIG. 38, control signal generator 2308 in the base stationobtains information indicating that the terminal supports amulti-carrier scheme such as OFDM or information indicating that it isnot.

Then, based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 38, control signal generator 2308 in the basestation knows that the terminal supports decoding of error correctionencoding scheme #C and decoding of error correction encoding scheme #D.

Accordingly, the base station or AP takes into consideration thecommunications method supported by the terminal and the communicationsenvironment, for example, and accurately generates and transmits amodulated signal receivable by the terminal to achieve an advantageouseffect of an improvement in data transmission efficiency in the systemincluding the base station or AP and terminal.

As a tenth example, the reception device of the terminal has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 8, and, for example, supports thefollowing. For example, the reception device of the terminal supportsreception of “communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”described in Embodiment A2. Accordingly, in “communications scheme #B”,even if the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams of aplurality of modulated signals, the terminal supports reception of such.Moreover, in “communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”,even if the communication partner transmits a single stream modulatedsignal, the terminal supports reception of such. In “communicationsscheme #B”, the base station or AP can transmit a plurality of modulatedsignals for a plurality of streams in the case of a single-carrierscheme and a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM. Then, in the case of asingle-carrier scheme, when the communication partner transmits aplurality of streams of modulated signals, whether to implement a phasechange or not can be set, and in the case of a multi-carrier scheme suchas OFDM, when the communication partner transmits a plurality of streamsof modulated signals, whether to implement a phase change or not can beset. The terminal supports decoding of “error correction encoding scheme#C” and decoding of “error correction encoding scheme #D” as an errorcorrection scheme.

Therefore, based on the rules described in Embodiment A2, a terminalhaving the configuration illustrated in FIG. 8 that supports the abovegenerates reception capability notification symbol 3502 illustrated inFIG. 38 and transmits reception capability notification symbol 3502 inaccordance with the sequence illustrated in FIG. 35.

Here, the terminal uses, for example, transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 to generate reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 and transmission device 2403illustrated in FIG. 24 transmits reception capability notificationsymbol 3502 illustrated in FIG. 38 in accordance with the sequenceillustrated in FIG. 35.

Reception device 2304 in the base station or AP illustrated in FIG. 23receives reception capability notification symbol 3502 transmitted bythe terminal. Control signal generator 2308 in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 23 then extracts data from reception capabilitynotification symbol 3502, and the terminal knows that communicationsscheme #A and communications scheme #B are supported from supportedscheme 3801.

Based on information 3702 relating to support for reception for aplurality of streams in FIG. 38, control signal generator 2308 in thebase station knows that in “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a plurality of streams of a plurality ofmodulated signals, the terminal supports reception of such, and in“communications scheme #A” and “communications scheme #B”, even if thecommunication partner transmits a single stream modulated signal, theterminal supports reception of such.

Moreover, based on information 3802 relating to multi-carrier schemesupport in FIG. 38, control signal generator 2308 in the base stationknows whether the terminal supports a single-carrier scheme, supports amulti-carrier scheme such as OFDM, or supports both a single-carrierscheme and a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM.

Control signal generator 2308 in the base station then knows whether theterminal supports phase change, based on information 3601 relating tophase change demodulation support in FIG. 38.

Here, information 3802 relating to phase change demodulation support isrequired to have a configuration such as the following.

Information 3802 relating to phase change demodulation support is 2-bitinformation, and the 2 bits are expressed as k0 and k1.

In the case of a single-carrier scheme of “communications scheme #B”,when the communication partner transmits a plurality of streams for aplurality of modulated signals and a phase change has been implemented,when the terminal supports demodulation, k0=1 is transmitted, and whenthe terminal does not support demodulation, k0=0 is transmitted.

In the case of a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM of “communicationsscheme #B”, when the communication partner transmits a plurality ofstreams for a plurality of modulated signals and a phase change has beenimplemented, when the terminal supports demodulation, k1=1 istransmitted, and when the terminal does not support demodulation, k1=0is transmitted.

Then, based on information 3803 relating to supported error correctionencoding scheme in FIG. 38, control signal generator 2308 in the basestation knows that the terminal supports decoding of error correctionencoding scheme #C and error correction encoding scheme #D.

Accordingly, the base station or AP takes into consideration thecommunications method supported by the terminal and the communicationsenvironment, for example, and accurately generates and transmits amodulated signal receivable by the terminal to achieve an advantageouseffect of an improvement in data transmission efficiency in the systemincluding the base station or AP and terminal.

As described above, the base station or AP obtains, from the terminal,which is the communication partner of the base station or AP,information relating to a scheme in which demodulation is supported bythe terminal, and based on that information, determines the number ofmodulated signals, the communications method of the modulated signals,and the signal processing method of the modulated signals, for example,and as a result, the base station or AP can accurately generate andtransmit a modulated signal receivable by the terminal, which makes itpossible to achieve an advantageous effect of an improvement in datatransmission efficiency in the system including the base station or APand terminal.

Here, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 38, by configuring a receptioncapability notification symbol of a plurality of items of information,the base station or AP can easily determine the validity of informationincluded in the reception capability notification symbol, and as aresult, it is possible to rapidly determine, for example, a modulatedsignal scheme and signal processing method to be used for transmission.

Then, based on information on the reception capability symboltransmitted by the terminals, the base station or AP can improve datatransmission efficiency by transmitting modulated signals to eachterminal using a suitable transmission method.

Note that the method of configuring the information on the receptioncapability notification symbol described in this embodiment is merelyone non-limiting example. Moreover, the order in which and timing atwhich the terminal transmits the reception capability notificationsymbols to the base station or AP described in this embodiment aremerely non-limiting examples.

Embodiment A5

In the present disclosure, one example of a configuration of atransmission device, such as a base station, access point, broadcaststation, illustrated in FIG. 1 was described. In this embodiment,another example of a configuration of a transmission device, such as abase station, access point, broadcast station that is illustrated inFIG. 44 and different from FIG. 1 will be described.

In FIG. 44, components that operate the same as in FIG. 1 share likereference marks. Accordingly, repeated description will be omitted. InFIG. 44, the point of difference from FIG. 1 is the inclusion of aplurality of error correction encoders. In FIG. 44, the configurationincludes two error correction encoders.

Note that the number of error correction encoders is not limited to onein the case of FIG. 1 or two in the case of FIG. 44. For example, threeor more may be provided, and the mapper may use the data output by eachof the error correction encoders to perform mapping.

In FIG. 44, error correction encoder 102_1 receives inputs of first data101_1 and control signal 100, error correction encodes first data 101_1based on information on the error correction encoding method included incontrol signal 100, and outputs encoded data 103_1.

Mapper 104_1 receives inputs of encoded data 103_1 and control signal100, and based on information on the modulation scheme included incontrol signal 100, performs mapping on encoded data 103_1, and outputsmapped signal 105_1.

Error correction encoder 102_1 receives inputs of second data 101_2 andcontrol signal 100, error correction encodes second data 101_2 based oninformation on the error correction encoding method included in controlsignal 100, and outputs encoded data 103_2.

Mapper 104_2 receives inputs of encoded data 103_2 and control signal100, and based on information on the modulation scheme included incontrol signal 100, performs mapping on encoded data 103_2, and outputsmapped signal 105_2.

Then, even when operations described in this embodiment are performedwith respect to the configuration of the transmission device illustratedin FIG. 44, implementation just like in FIG. 1 is possible and the sameadvantageous effects are also obtainable.

Note that, for example, the transmission device such as a base station,AP, or broadcast station may switch between transmitting a modulatedsignal with the configuration illustrated in FIG. 1 and transmitting amodulated signal with the configuration illustrated in FIG. 44.

Embodiment A6

Examples of configurations of signal processor 106 described withreference to, for example FIG. 1, are illustrated in FIG. 20, FIG. 21,and FIG. 22. Next, an example of operations performed by phase changers205A, 205B illustrated in FIG. 20, FIG. 21, and FIG. 22 will be given.

As described in Embodiment 4, the phase change value of phase changer205A is expressed as w(i), and the phase change value of phase changer205B is expressed as y(i). Here, z1(i) and z2(i) are expressed as inEquation (52). The phase change cycle of phase changer 205A is N, andthe phase change cycle of phase changer 205B is N. However, N is aninteger that is greater than or equal to 3. In other words, the numberof transmission streams or number of transmission modulated signals isan integer that is greater than 2. Here, phase change value w(i) andphase change value y(i) are applied as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 137} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{w(i)} = e^{j{({\frac{\pi \times i}{N} + \Delta})}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(137)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 138} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y(i)} = e^{j{({\frac{{- \pi} \times i}{N} + \Omega})}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(138)}\end{matrix}$

Note that Δ in Equation (137) and Ω in Equation (138) are actualnumbers. In one extremely simple example, Δ and Ω are both zero.However, this example is not limiting. When set in this manner, thepeak-to-average power ratio (PAPR) of signal z1(t) or signal z1(i), andthe PAPR of signal z2(t) or z2(i) in FIG. 20, FIG. 21, and FIG. 22 is,in the case of a single-carrier scheme, are the same. Accordingly, thephase noise in radio unit 107_A and 108_B in, for example, FIG. 1, andthe linear required criteria for the transmission power unit are thesame, which is advantageous since low power consumption is easilyachievable and a common radio unit configuration can be used. Note thatthere is a high probability that the same advantageous effects can beachieved when a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDM is used.

Phase changer w(i) and y(i) may be applied in the following manner.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 139} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{w(i)} = e^{j{({\frac{{- \pi} \times i}{N} + \Delta})}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(139)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 140} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y(i)} = e^{j{({\frac{\pi \times i}{N} + \Omega})}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(140)}\end{matrix}$

Even when applied as in Equation (139) and Equation (140), the sameadvantageous effects as above can be achieved.

Phase changer w(i) and y(i) may be applied in the following manner.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 141} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{w(i)} = e^{j{({\frac{k \times \pi \times i}{N} + \Delta})}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(141)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 142} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y(i)} = e^{j{({\frac{{- k} \times \pi \times i}{N} + \Omega})}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(142)}\end{matrix}$

Note that k is an integer excluding 0. For example, k may be 1, may be−1, may be 2, and may be −2. However, these examples are not limiting.Even when applied as in Equation (141) and Equation (142), the sameadvantageous effects as above can be achieved.

Embodiment A7

Examples of configurations of signal processor 106 described withreference to, for example FIG. 1, are illustrated in FIG. 31, FIG. 32,and FIG. 33. Next, an example of operations performed by phase changers205A, 205B illustrated in FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG. 33 will be given.

As described in Embodiment 7, in phase changer 205B, for example, aphase change of y(i) is applied to s2(i). Accordingly, phase-changedsignal s2′(i)2801B can be expressed as s2′(i)=y(i)×s2(i). Note that i isa symbol number (and is an integer that is greater than or equal to 0).

In phase changer 205A, for example, a phase change of w(i) is applied tos1(i). Accordingly, phase-changed signal s1′(i)2901A can be expressed ass1′(i)=w(i)×s1(i). Note that i is a symbol number and is an integer thatis greater than or equal to 0. The phase change cycle of phase changer205A is N, and the phase change cycle of phase changer 205B is N.However, N is an integer that is greater than or equal to 3. In otherwords, the number of transmission streams or number of transmissionmodulated signals is an integer that is greater than 2. Here, phasechange value w(i) and phase change value y(i) are applied as follows.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 143} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{w(i)} = e^{j{({\frac{\pi \times i}{N} + \Delta})}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(143)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 144} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y(i)} = e^{j{({\frac{{- \pi} \times i}{N} + \Omega})}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(144)}\end{matrix}$

Note that Δ in Equation (143) and Ω in Equation (144) are actualnumbers. In one extremely simple example, Δ and Ω are both zero.However, this example is not limiting. When set in this manner, the PAPRof signal z1(t) or signal z1(i), and the PAPR of signal z2(t) or z2(i)in FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG. 33 is, in the case of a single-carrierscheme, are the same. Accordingly, the phase noise in radio unit 107_Aand 108_B in, for example, FIG. 1, and the linear required criteria forthe transmission power unit are the same, which is advantageous sincelow power consumption is easily achievable and a common radio unitconfiguration can be used. Note that there is a high probability thatthe same advantageous effects can be achieved when a multi-carrierscheme such as OFDM is used.

Phase changer w(i) and y(i) may be applied in the following manner.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 145} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{w(i)} = e^{j{({\frac{{- \pi} \times i}{N} + \Delta})}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(145)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 146} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y(i)} = e^{j{({\frac{\pi \times i}{N} + \Omega})}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(146)}\end{matrix}$

Even when applied as in Equation (145) and Equation (146), the sameadvantageous effects as above can be achieved.

Phase changer w(i) and y(i) may be applied in the following manner.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 147} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{w(i)} = e^{j{({\frac{k \times \pi \times i}{N} + \Delta})}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(147)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 148} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{y(i)} = e^{j{({\frac{{- k} \times \pi \times i}{N} + \Omega})}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(148)}\end{matrix}$

Note that k is an integer excluding 0. For example, k may be 1, may be−1, may be 2, and may be −2. However, these examples are not limiting.Even when applied as in Equation (147) and Equation (148), the sameadvantageous effects as above can be achieved.

(Supplemental Information 5)

The embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented formulti-carrier schemes such as OFDM and may be implemented forsingle-carrier schemes. Hereinafter, additional information will begiven for cases in which a single-carrier scheme is applied.

For example, in Embodiment 1, from Equation (1) to Equation (36), using,for example, FIG. 2, or in other embodiments, using FIG. 18 to FIG. 22and FIG. 28 to FIG. 33, signal z1(i) and signal z2(i) or signal z1′(i)and signal z2′(i) are generated, and signal z1(i) and signal z2(i) orsignal z1′(i) and signal z2′(i) are transmitted from the transmissiondevice at the same time and at the same frequency (same frequency band).Note that i is a symbol number.

Here, for example, in cases in which a multi-carrier scheme such as OFDMis used, as described in Embodiments 1 through 6, signal z1(i) andsignal z2(i) or signal z1′(i) and signal z2′(i) are taken as functionsof a frequency (carrier number), functions of time and frequency, orfunctions of time, and, for example, are arranged as follows. Signalz1(i) and signal z2(i) or signal z1′(i) and signal z2′(i) are arrangedalong the frequency axis. Signal z1(i) and signal z2(i) or signal z1′(i)and signal z2′(i) are arranged along the time axis. Signal z1(i) andsignal z2(i) or signal z1′(i) and signal z2′(i) are arranged along boththe frequency and time axis.

Next, a specific example will be given.

FIG. 45 illustrates an example of a method of arranging symbols on thetime axis for signal z1(i) and signal z2(i) or signal z1′(i) and signalz2′(i). In FIG. 45, for example, zq(0) is shown. Here, q is 1 or 2.Accordingly zq(0) in FIG. 45 indicates “in z1(i) and z2(i), z1(0) andz2(0) when symbol number i=0”. Similarly, zq(1) indicates “in z1(i) andz2(i), z1(1) and z2(1) when symbol number i=1”. In other words, zq(X)indicates “in z1(i) and z2(i), z1(X) and z2(X) when symbol number i=X”.Note that this also applies to FIG. 46, FIG. 47, FIG. 48, FIG. 49, andFIG. 50.

As illustrated in FIG. 45, symbol zq(0) whose symbol number i=0 isarranged at time 0, symbol zq(1) whose symbol number i=1 is arranged attime 1, symbol zq(2) whose symbol number i=2 is arranged at time 2,symbol zq(3) whose symbol number i=3 is arranged at time 3, and othersymbols are arranged in a similar fashion. With this, symbols arearranged on the time axis for signal z1(i) and signal z2(i) or signalz1′(i) and signal z2′(i). However, FIG. 45 merely illustrates oneexample; the relationship between time and symbol number is not limitedto this example.

FIG. 46 illustrates an example of a method of arranging symbols on thefrequency axis for signal z1(i) and signal z2(i) or signal z1′(i) andsignal z2′(i).

As illustrated in FIG. 46, symbol zq(0) whose symbol number i=0 isarranged at carrier 0, symbol zq(1) whose symbol number i=1 is arrangedat carrier 1, symbol zq(2) whose symbol number i=2 is arranged atcarrier 2, symbol zq(3) whose symbol number i=3 is arranged at carrier3, and other symbols are arranged in a similar fashion. With this,symbols are arranged on the frequency axis for signal z1(i) and signalz2(i) or signal z1′(i) and signal z2′(i). However, FIG. 46 merelyillustrates one example; the relationship between frequency and symbolnumber is not limited to this example.

FIG. 47 illustrates an example of a method of arranging symbols on thetime and frequency axis for signal z1(i) and signal z2(i) or signalz1′(i) and signal z2′(i).

As illustrated in FIG. 47, symbol zq(0) whose symbol number i=0 isarranged at time 0 and carrier 0, symbol zq(1) whose symbol number i=1is arranged at time 0 and carrier 1, symbol zq(2) whose symbol numberi=2 is arranged at time 1 and carrier 0, symbol zq(3) whose symbolnumber i=3 is arranged at time 1 and carrier 1, and other symbols arearranged in a similar fashion. With this, symbols are arranged on thetime and frequency axis for signal z1(i) and signal z2(i) or signalz1′(i) and signal z2′(i). However, FIG. 47 merely illustrates oneexample; the relationship between time and frequency and symbol numberis not limited to this example.

FIG. 48 illustrates a second example of an arrangement symbols on thetime axis for signal z1(i) and signal z2(i) or signal z1′(i) and signalz2′(i).

As illustrated in FIG. 48, symbol zq(0) whose symbol number i=0 isarranged at time 0, symbol zq(1) whose symbol number i=1 is arranged attime 16, symbol zq(2) whose symbol number i=2 is arranged at time 12,symbol zq(3) whose symbol number i=3 is arranged at time 5, and othersymbols are arranged in a similar fashion. With this, symbols arearranged on the time axis for signal z1(i) and signal z2(i) or signalz1′(i) and signal z2′(i). However, FIG. 48 merely illustrates oneexample; the relationship between time and symbol number is not limitedto this example.

FIG. 49 illustrates a second example of an arrangement symbols on thefrequency axis for signal z1(i) and signal z2(i) or signal z1′(i) andsignal z2′(i).

As illustrated in FIG. 49, symbol zq(0) whose symbol number i=0 isarranged at carrier 0, symbol zq(1) whose symbol number i=1 is arrangedat carrier 16, symbol zq(2) whose symbol number i=2 is arranged atcarrier 12, symbol zq(3) whose symbol number i=3 is arranged at carrier5, and other symbols are arranged in a similar fashion. With this,symbols are arranged on the frequency axis for signal z1(i) and signalz2(i) or signal z1′(i) and signal z2′(i). However, FIG. 49 merelyillustrates one example; the relationship between frequency and symbolnumber is not limited to this example.

FIG. 50 illustrates an example of an arrangement of symbols on the timeand frequency axis for signal z1(i) and signal z2(i) or signal z1′(i)and signal z2′(i).

As illustrated in FIG. 50, symbol zq(0) whose symbol number i=0 isarranged at time 1 and carrier 1, symbol zq(1) whose symbol number i=1is arranged at time 3 and carrier 3, symbol zq(2) whose symbol numberi=2 is arranged at time 1 and carrier 0, symbol zq(3) whose symbolnumber i=3 is arranged at time 1 and carrier 3, and other symbols arearranged in a similar fashion. With this, symbols are arranged on thetime and frequency axis for signal z1(i) and signal z2(i) or signalz1′(i) and signal z2′(i). However, FIG. 50 merely illustrates oneexample; the relationship between time and frequency and symbol numberis not limited to this example.

Moreover, in cases where a single-carrier scheme is used, after signalz1(i) and signal z2(i) or signal z1′(i) and signal z2′(i) are generated,symbols are arranged along the time axis. Accordingly as describedabove, signal z1(i) and signal z2(i) or signal z1′(i) and signal z2′(i)are generated, symbols are arranged along the time axis, such asillustrated in FIG. 45 and FIG. 48. However, FIG. and FIG. 48 merelyillustrate examples; the relationship between time and symbol number isnot limited to these examples.

Moreover, various frame configurations are described in the presentdisclosure. The modulated signals having a frame configuration describedin the present disclosure is transmitted by a base station or AP using amulti-carrier scheme such as OFDM. Here, when a terminal communicatingwith the base station (AP) transmits a modulated signal, the modulatedsignal to be transmitted by the terminal is preferably a single-carrierscheme modulated signal. As a result of the base station or AP using theOFDM scheme, it is possible to concurrently transmit a data symbol groupto a plurality of terminals. Moreover, as a result of the terminal usinga single-carrier scheme, power consumption can be reduced.

Using part of a frequency band used by the modulated signal transmittedby the base station or AP, the terminal may implement a time divisionduplex (TDD) scheme for modulation scheme transmission.

In the present disclosure, phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205Bare described as implementing a phase change.

Here, when the phase change cycle of phase changer 205A is expressed asNA, and NA is an integer that is greater than or equal to 3, that is tosay, the number of transmission streams or the number of modulatedsignals is an integer greater than 2, there is a high probability thatthe reception device in the communication partner can achieve abeneficial data reception quality.

Similarly, when the phase change cycle of phase changer 205B isexpressed as NB, and NB is an integer that is greater than or equal to3, that is to say the number of transmission streams or the number ofmodulated signals is an integer greater than 2, there is a highprobability that the reception device in the communication partner canachieve a beneficial data reception quality.

As a matter of course, the present disclosure may be carried out bycombining a plurality of the exemplary embodiments and other contentdescribed herein.

Embodiment A8

In this embodiment, an operational example of a communications devicebased on the operations described in, for example, Embodiment 7 andSupplemental Information 1, will be given.

First Example

FIG. 51 illustrates one example of a configuration of a modulated signaltransmitted by a base station or AP according to this embodiment.

In FIG. 51, time is represented on the horizontal axis. As illustratedin FIG. 51, the transmission device in the base station or AP performs“single stream modulated signal transmission 5101” and subsequentlyperforms “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”.

FIG. 52 illustrates one example of a frame configuration when singlestream modulated signal transmission 5101 in FIG. 51 is performed.

In FIG. 52, time is represented on the horizontal axis. As illustratedin FIG. 52, the base station or AP transmits preamble 5201 andsubsequently transmits control information symbol 5201.

Note that preamble 5201 conceivably includes a symbol for the terminal,which is the communication partner of the base station or AP, to performsignal detection, time synchronization, frequency synchronization,frequency offset estimation, channel estimation, and/or framesynchronization. For example, preamble 5201 is conceivably a PSK schemesymbol.

Control information symbol 5201 is a symbol including, for example,information relating to the communications method of the modulatedsignal transmitted by the base station and AP and/or informationrequired by the terminal to demodulate a data symbol. However, theinformation included in control information symbol 5202 is not limitedto this example; control information symbol 5202 may include data (adata symbol), and may include other control information.

Moreover, the configuration of the symbols included in the single streammodulated signal is not limited to the example illustrated in FIG. 52,and the symbols included in the single stream modulated signal are notlimited to the example illustrated in FIG. 52.

FIG. 53 illustrates one example of a frame configuration whenmulti-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102 in FIG. 51 isperformed.

In FIG. 53, time is represented on the horizontal axis. As illustratedin FIG. 53, the base station or AP transmits preamble 5301 andsubsequently transmits control information symbol 5302, and subsequentlytransmits, for example, data symbol 5303.

Note that regarding at least data symbols, a plurality of modulatedsignals for a plurality of streams are transmitted at the same time andat the same frequency. Note that preamble 5301 conceivably includes asymbol for the terminal, which is the communication partner of the basestation or AP, to perform signal detection, time synchronization,frequency synchronization, frequency offset estimation, channelestimation, and/or frame synchronization. For example, preamble 5301 isconceivably a PSK scheme symbol.

Moreover, as a result of a symbol for channel estimation beingtransmitted from a plurality of antennas, demodulation of a data symbolincluded in, for example, data symbol 5303 becomes possible.

Control information symbol 5302 is a symbol including, for example,information relating to the communications method of the modulatedsignal transmitted by the base station and AP and/or informationrequired by the terminal to demodulate a data symbol. However, theinformation included in control information symbol 5302 is not limitedto this example; control information symbol 5302 may include data (adata symbol), and may include other control information.

Moreover, the symbols included in the plurality of modulated signals forplurality of streams are not limited to the example illustrated in FIG.53.

Note that hereinafter, the scheme used for “single stream modulatedsignal transmission 5101” in FIG. 51 may be a single-carrier scheme, andthe scheme used for “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission5102” in FIG. 51 may be a single-carrier scheme or a multi-carrierscheme. Note that in the following description, the multi-carrier schemeis exemplified as the OFDM scheme. However, note that the multi-carrierscheme used is not limited to the OFDM scheme.

One characteristic of this embodiment is that CDD/CSD as described inSupplemental Information 1 is implemented upon performing single streammodulated signal transmission 5101 using a single-carrier scheme in FIG.51.

Then, upon performing multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission5102 in FIG. 51, phase change is switched between implementation andnon-implementation.

Next, operations performed by the transmission device in the basestation will be described with reference to FIG. 54.

FIG. 54 illustrates one example of a configuration of signal processor106 in, for example, the transmission device in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 1 or FIG. 44.

Multi-stream multi-modulated-signal generator 5402 has the configurationillustrated in, for example, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21,FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, or FIG. 33.Multi-stream multi-modulated-signal generator 5402 receives inputs ofmapped signal s1(t)5401A, mapped signal s2(t)5401B, and control signal5400.

Here, mapped signal s1(t)5401A corresponds to mapped signal 201A, mappedsignal s2(t)5401B corresponds to mapped signal 201B, and control signal5400 corresponds to control signal 200. Multi-streammulti-modulated-signal generator 5402 performs processing described withreference to, for example, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21,FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG. 33, andoutputs signals 5403A, 5403B.

Note that signal 5403A corresponds to baseband signal 208A in FIG. 2,signal 210A in FIG. 18, signal 210A in FIG. 19, signal 208A in FIG. 20,signal 210A in FIG. 21, signal 210A in FIG. 22, signal 208A in FIG. 28,signal 210A in FIG. 29, signal 210A in FIG. 30, signal 208A in FIG. 31,signal 210A in FIG. 32, and signal 208A in FIG. 33.

Signal 5403B corresponds to signal 210B in FIG. 2, baseband signal 208Bin FIG. 18, signal 210B in FIG. 19, signal 210B in FIG. 20, signal 208Bin FIG. 21, signal 210B in FIG. 22, signal 210B in FIG. 28, signal 208Bin FIG. 29, signal 210B in FIG. 30, signal 210B in FIG. 31, signal 208Bin FIG. 32, and signal 210B in FIG. 33.

Then, based on information included in control signal 200 relating towhether it is time to perform single stream modulated signaltransmission or time to perform multi-stream multi-modulated-signaltransmission, when multi-stream multi-modulated-signal generator 5402determines that it is time to perform multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission, each signal processor operates, andsignals 5403A, 5403B are generated and output.

Inserter 5405 receives inputs of mapped signal 5401A, preamble andcontrol symbol signal 5404, and control signal 5400, and based oninformation included in control signal 5400 relating to whether it istime to perform single stream modulated signal transmission or time toperform multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission, when inserter5405 determines that it is time to perform single stream modulatedsignal transmission, for example, inserter 5405 generates and outputssingle-carrier scheme signal 5406 in accordance with the frameconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 52, based on mapped signal 5401A andpreamble and control symbol signal 5404.

Note that in FIG. 54, inserter 5405 is illustrated as receiving an inputof mapped signal 5401A, but when generating a signal in accordance withthe frame configuration illustrated in FIG. 52, mapped signal 5401A isnot used.

CDD/CSD processor 5407 receives inputs of single-carrier scheme signal5406 in accordance with the frame configuration and control signal 5400,and when control signal 5400 indicates that it is time to perform singlestream modulated signal transmission, performs CDD/CSD processing onsingle-carrier scheme signal 5406 in accordance with the frameconfiguration and outputs CDD/CSD processed signal 5408 in accordancewith the frame configuration.

Selector 5409A receives inputs of signal 5403A signal 5406 in accordancewith the frame configuration, and control signal 5400, and based oncontrol signal 5400, selects either signal 5403A or signal 5406 inaccordance with frame configuration, and outputs selected signal 5410A.

For example, in single stream modulated signal transmission 5101 in FIG.51, selector 5409A outputs signal 5406 in accordance with the frameconfiguration as selected signal 5410A, and in multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission 5102 in FIG. 51, selector 5409Aoutputs signal 5403A as selected signal 5410A.

Selector 5409B receives inputs of signal 5403B, CDD/CSD processed signal5408 in accordance with the frame configuration, and control signal5400, and based on control signal 5400, selects either signal 5403B orCDD/CSD processed signal 5408 in accordance with the frameconfiguration, and outputs selected signal 5410B.

For example, in single stream modulated signal transmission 5101 in FIG.51, selector 5409B outputs CDD/CSD processed signal 5408 in accordancewith the frame configuration as selected signal 5410B, and inmulti-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102 in FIG. 51,selector 5409B outputs signal 5403B as selected signal 5410B.

Note that selected signal 5410A corresponds to processed signal 106_A inFIG. 1, FIG. 44, and selected signal 5410B corresponds to processedsignal 106_B in FIG. 1, FIG. 44.

FIG. 55 illustrates one example of a configuration of radio units 107_A,107_B in FIG. 1, FIG. 44.

OFDM scheme radio unit 5502 receives inputs of processed signal 5501 andcontrol signal 5500, and when information included in control signal5500 relating to whether either OFDM scheme or single-carrier scheme hasbeen selected indicates that OFDM scheme has been selected, processesprocessed signal 5501 and outputs OFDM scheme modulated signal 5503.

Note that OFDM is presented as an example, but another multi-carrierscheme may be used.

Single-carrier scheme radio unit 5504 receives inputs of processedsignal 5501 and control signal 5500, and when information included incontrol signal 5500 relating to whether either OFDM scheme orsingle-carrier scheme has been selected indicates that single-carrierscheme has been selected, processes processed signal 5501 and outputssingle-carrier scheme modulated signal 5505.

Selector 5506 receives inputs of OFDM scheme modulated signal 5503,single-carrier scheme modulated signal 5505, and control signal 5500,and when information included in control signal 5500 relating to whethereither OFDM scheme or single-carrier scheme has been selected indicatesthat OFDM scheme has been selected, outputs OFDM scheme modulated signal5503 as selected signal 5507, and when information included in controlsignal 5500 relating to whether either OFDM scheme or single-carrierscheme has been selected indicates that single-carrier scheme has beenselected, outputs single-carrier scheme modulated signal 5505 asselected signal 5507.

Note that when radio unit 107_A has the configuration illustrated inFIG. 55, processed signal 5501 corresponds to signal 106_A, controlsignal 5500 corresponds to control signal 100, and selected signal 5507corresponds to 108_A. Moreover, when radio unit 107_B has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 55, processed signal 5501 correspondsto signal 106_B, control signal 5500 corresponds to control signal 100,and selected signal 5507 corresponds to 108_B.

Hereinafter, the operations described above will be described furtherwith reference to the description of Embodiment 7.

Example 1-1

In FIG. 51, in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”,CDD/CSD processing is not performed, and in “multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, a single-carrier scheme orOFDM scheme can be selected.

Accordingly, for example, phase changer 209A and/or 209B in, forexample, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28,FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, or FIG. 33 do not implement a phasechange. Accordingly, control information (u11) for controlling ON/OFF ofcyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) described in Embodiment 7 is ignored in“multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”. Note that insuch cases, phase changer 209A and/or 209B need not be included inmulti-stream multi-modulated-signal generator 5402 illustrated in FIG.54.

In “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, theswitching between ON/OFF of operation for cyclically/regularly changingthe phase change value on a per-symbol basis is possible. Accordingly,phase changer 205A and/or 205B in, for example, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG.19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG.32, or FIG. 33 can control the ON/OFF of a phase change operation.Accordingly, the ON/OFF of the phase change operation by phase changer205A and/or phase changer 205B is controlled via the control information(u10) for switching between ON/OFF of operation for cyclically/regularlychanging the phase change value on a per-symbol basis described inEmbodiment 7.

Moreover, in FIG. 51, in “single stream modulated signal transmission5101”, cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) processing is always performed.In such cases, control information (u11) for controlling ON/OFF ofcyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) described in Embodiment 7 is notnecessary.

Example 1-2

In FIG. 51, in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”,CDD/CSD processing is not performed, and in “multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, a single-carrier scheme orOFDM scheme can be selected.

Accordingly, for example, phase changer 209A and/or phase changer 209Bin, for example, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22,FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, or FIG. 33 do not implementa phase change. Accordingly, control information (u11) for controllingON/OFF of cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) described in Embodiment 7 isignored in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”. Notethat in such cases, phase changer 209A and/or phase changer 209B neednot be included in multi-stream multi-modulated-signal generator 5402illustrated in FIG. 54.

In “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, theswitching between ON/OFF of operation for cyclically/regularly changingthe phase change value on a per-symbol basis is possible. Accordingly,phase changer 205A and/or 205B in, for example, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG.19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG.32, or FIG. 33 can control the ON/OFF of a phase change operation.Accordingly, the ON/OFF of the phase change operation by phase changer205A and/or phase changer 205B is controlled via the control information(u10) for switching between ON/OFF of operation for cyclically/regularlychanging the phase change value on a per-symbol basis described inEmbodiment 7.

Moreover, in “single stream modulated signal transmission”, cyclic delaydiversity (CDD/CSD) processing is controlled via control information(u11) for controlling ON/OFF of cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD)described in Embodiment 7. However, as described above, when the basestation or AP transmits a modulated signal in accordance with FIG. 51,FIG. 52, and/or FIG. 53, in “single stream modulated signal transmission5101” in FIG. 51, control information (u11) for controlling ON/OFF ofcyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) indicates “ON”, and in “single streammodulated signal transmission 5101” in FIG. 51, CDD/CSD processing isperformed.

Example 1-3

In FIG. 51, in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”.CDD/CSD processing is performed, and in “multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, a single-carrier scheme orOFDM scheme can be selected.

Accordingly, for example, phase changer 209A and/or phase changer 209Bin, for example, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22,FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, or FIG. 33 implements aphase change or performs CDD/CSD processing. Accordingly controlinformation (u11) for controlling ON/OFF of cyclic delay diversity(CDD/CSD) described in Embodiment 7 is ignored in “multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission 5102”.

In “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, theswitching between ON/OFF of operation for cyclically/regularly changingthe phase change value on a per-symbol basis is possible. Accordingly,phase changer 205A and/or 205B in, for example, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG.19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG.32, or FIG. 33 can control the ON/OFF of a phase change operation.Accordingly the ON/OFF of the phase change operation by phase changer205A and/or 205B is controlled via the control information (u10) forswitching between ON/OFF of operation for cyclically/regularly changingthe phase change value on a per-symbol basis described in Embodiment 7.

Moreover, in FIG. 51, in “single stream modulated signal transmission5101”, cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) processing is always performed.In such cases, control information (u11) for controlling ON/OFF ofcyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) described in Embodiment 7 is notnecessary.

Example 1-4

In FIG. 51, in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”,CDD/CSD processing is performed, and in “multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, a single-carrier scheme orOFDM scheme can be selected.

Accordingly, for example, phase changer 209A and/or 209B in, forexample, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28,FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, or FIG. 33 implements a phase changeor performs CDD/CSD processing. Accordingly, control information (u11)for controlling ON/OFF of cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) described inEmbodiment 7 is ignored in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signaltransmission 5102”.

In “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, theswitching between ON/OFF of operation for cyclically/regularly changingthe phase change value on a per-symbol basis is possible. Accordingly,phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B in, for example, FIG. 2,FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30,FIG. 31, FIG. 32, or FIG. 33 can control the ON/OFF of a phase changeoperation. Accordingly, the ON/OFF of the phase change operation byphase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B is controlled via thecontrol information (u10) for switching between ON/OFF of operation forcyclically/regularly changing the phase change value on a per-symbolbasis described in Embodiment 7.

Moreover, in “single stream modulated signal transmission”, cyclic delaydiversity (CDD/CSD) processing is controlled via control information(u11) for controlling ON/OFF of cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD)described in Embodiment 7. However, as described above, when the basestation or AP transmits a modulated signal in accordance with FIG. 51,FIG. 52, and/or FIG. 53, in “single stream modulated signal transmission5101” in FIG. 51, control information (u11) for controlling ON/OFF ofcyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) indicates “ON”, and in “single streammodulated signal transmission 5101” in FIG. 51, CDD/CSD processing isperformed.

Example 1-5

In FIG. 51, in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”,whether CDD/CSD processing is performed or not is selectable, and in“multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, asingle-carrier scheme or OFDM scheme can be selected.

Accordingly, based on control information (u11) for controlling ON/OFFof cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) described in Embodiment 7, phasechanger 209A and/or 209B in, for example, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG.20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31. FIG. 32, orFIG. 33 selects whether to (i) implement a phase change or performCDD/CSD or (i) do not implement a phase change or do not performCDD/CSD.

In “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, theswitching between ON/OFF of operation for cyclically/regularly changingthe phase change value on a per-symbol basis is possible. Accordingly,phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B in, for example, FIG. 2,FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30,FIG. 31, FIG. 32, or FIG. 33 can control the ON/OFF of a phase changeoperation. Accordingly, the ON/OFF of the phase change operation byphase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B is controlled via thecontrol information (u10) for switching between ON/OFF of operation forcyclically/regularly changing the phase change value on a per-symbolbasis described in Embodiment 7.

Moreover, in FIG. 51, in “single stream modulated signal transmission5101”, cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) processing is always performed.In such cases, control information (u11) for controlling ON/OFF ofcyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) described in Embodiment 7 is notnecessary.

Example 1-6

In FIG. 51, in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”,whether CDD/CSD processing is performed or not is selectable, and in“multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, asingle-carrier scheme or OFDM scheme can be selected.

Accordingly, based on control information (u11) for controlling ON/OFFof cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) described in Embodiment 7, phasechanger 209A and/or 209B in, for example, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG.20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, orFIG. 33 selects whether to (i) implement a phase change or performCDD/CSD or (i) do not implement a phase change or do not performCDD/CSD.

In “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, theswitching between ON/OFF of operation for cyclically/regularly changingthe phase change value on a per-symbol basis is possible. Accordinglyphase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B in, for example, FIG. 2,FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30,FIG. 31, FIG. 32, or FIG. 33 can control the ON/OFF of a phase changeoperation. Accordingly, the ON/OFF of the phase change operation byphase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B is controlled via thecontrol information (u10) for switching between ON/OFF of operation forcyclically/regularly changing the phase change value on a per-symbolbasis described in Embodiment 7.

Moreover, in “single stream modulated signal transmission”, cyclic delaydiversity (CDD/CSD) processing is controlled via control information(u11) for controlling ON/OFF of cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD)described in Embodiment 7. However, as described above, when the basestation or AP transmits a modulated signal in accordance with FIG. 51,FIG. 52, and/or FIG. 53, in “single stream modulated signal transmission5101” in FIG. 51, control information (u11) for controlling ON/OFF ofcyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) indicates “ON”, and in “single streammodulated signal transmission 5101” in FIG. 51, CDD/CSD processing isperformed.

Second Example

FIG. 51 illustrates one example of a configuration of a modulated signaltransmitted by a base station or AP according to this embodiment. AsFIG. 51 has already been described, repeated description will beomitted.

FIG. 52 illustrates one example of a frame configuration when singlestream modulated signal transmission 5101 in FIG. 51 is performed. AsFIG. 52 has already been described, repeated description will beomitted.

FIG. 53 illustrates one example of a frame configuration whenmulti-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102 in FIG. 51 isperformed. As FIG. 53 has already been described, repeated descriptionwill be omitted.

Note that hereinafter, the scheme used for “single stream modulatedsignal transmission 5101” in FIG. 51 may be a single-carrier scheme, andthe scheme used for “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission5102” in FIG. 51 may be a single-carrier scheme or a multi-carrierscheme. Note that in the following description, the multi-carrier schemeis exemplified as the OFDM scheme. However, note that the multi-carrierscheme used is not limited to the OFDM scheme.

One characteristic of this embodiment is that CDD/CSD as described inSupplemental Information 1 is implemented upon performing single streammodulated signal transmission 5101 using a single-carrier scheme in FIG.51.

Then, upon performing multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission5102 in FIG. 51, phase change is switched between implementation andnon-implementation.

Next, operations performed by the transmission device in the basestation will be described with reference to FIG. 56.

FIG. 56 illustrates one example of a configuration of signal processor106 in, for example, the transmission device in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 1 or FIG. 44. In FIG. 56, components that operatethe same as in FIG. 54 share like reference marks. Accordingly, repeateddescription will be omitted.

CDD/CSD processor 5601 receives inputs of single-carrier scheme signal5406 in accordance with the frame configuration and control signal 5400,and when control signal 5400 indicates that it is time to perform singlestream modulated signal transmission, performs CDD/CSD processing onsingle-carrier scheme signal 5406 in accordance with the frameconfiguration and outputs CDD/CSD processed signal 5602 in accordancewith the frame configuration.

Selector 5409A receives inputs of signal 5403A, CDD/CSD processed signal5602 in accordance with the frame configuration, and control signal5400, and based on control signal 5400, selects either signal 5403A orCDD/CSD processed signal 5602 in accordance with the frame configurationin accordance with frame configuration, and outputs selected signal5410A.

For example, in single stream modulated signal transmission 5101 in FIG.51, selector 5409A outputs CDD/CSD processed signal 5602 in accordancewith the frame configuration as selected signal 5410A, and inmulti-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102 in FIG. 51,selector 5409A outputs signal 5403A as selected signal 5410A.

FIG. 55 illustrates one example of a configuration of radio units 107_A,107_B in FIG. 1, FIG. 44. As FIG. 55 has already been described,repeated description will be omitted

Example 2-1

In FIG. 51, in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”.CDD/CSD processing is not performed, and in “multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, a single-carrier scheme orOFDM scheme can be selected.

Accordingly, for example, phase changer 209A and/or 209B in, forexample, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28,FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, or FIG. 33 do not implement a phasechange. Accordingly, control information (u11) for controlling ON/OFF ofcyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) described in Embodiment 7 is ignored in“multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”. Note that insuch cases, phase changer 209A and/or phase changer 209B need not beincluded in multi-stream multi-modulated-signal generator 5402illustrated in FIG. 56.

In “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, theswitching between ON/OFF of operation for cyclically/regularly changingthe phase change value on a per-symbol basis is possible. Accordinglyphase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B in, for example, FIG. 2,FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30,FIG. 31, FIG. 32, or FIG. 33 can control the ON/OFF of a phase changeoperation. Accordingly, the ON/OFF of the phase change operation byphase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B is controlled via thecontrol information (u10) for switching between ON/OFF of operation forcyclically/regularly changing the phase change value on a per-symbolbasis described in Embodiment 7.

Moreover, in FIG. 51, in “single stream modulated signal transmission5101”, cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) processing is always performed.In such cases, control information (u11) for controlling ON/OFF ofcyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) described in Embodiment 7 is notnecessary.

Example 2-2

In FIG. 51, in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”,CDD/CSD processing is not performed, and in “multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, a single-carrier scheme orOFDM scheme can be selected.

Accordingly, for example, phase changer 209A and/or 209B in, forexample, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28,FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, or FIG. 33 do not implement a phasechange. Accordingly, control information (u11) for controlling ON/OFF ofcyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) described in Embodiment 7 is ignored in“multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”. Note that insuch cases, phase changer 209A and/or phase changer 209B need not beincluded in multi-stream multi-modulated-signal generator 5402illustrated in FIG. 54.

In “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, theswitching between ON/OFF of operation for cyclically/regularly changingthe phase change value on a per-symbol basis is possible. Accordingly,phase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B in, for example, FIG. 2,FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30,FIG. 31, FIG. 32, or FIG. 33 can control the ON/OFF of a phase changeoperation. Accordingly, the ON/OFF of the phase change operation byphase changer 205A and/or phase changer 205B is controlled via thecontrol information (u10) for switching between ON/OFF of operation forcyclically/regularly changing the phase change value on a per-symbolbasis described in Embodiment 7.

Moreover, in “single stream modulated signal transmission”, cyclic delaydiversity (CDD/CSD) processing is controlled via control information(u11) for controlling ON/OFF of cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD)described in Embodiment 7. However, as described above, when the basestation or AP transmits a modulated signal in accordance with FIG. 51,FIG. 52, and/or FIG. 53, in “single stream modulated signal transmission5101” in FIG. 51, control information (u11) for controlling ON/OFF ofcyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) indicates “ON”, and in “single streammodulated signal transmission 5101” in FIG. 51, CDD/CSD processing isperformed.

Example 2-3

In FIG. 51, in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”.CDD/CSD processing is performed, and in “multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, a single-carrier scheme orOFDM scheme can be selected.

Accordingly, for example, phase changer 209A and/or 209B in, forexample, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28,FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, or FIG. 33 implements a phase changeor performs CDD/CSD processing. Accordingly, control information (u11)for controlling ON/OFF of cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) described inEmbodiment 7 is ignored in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signaltransmission 5102”.

In “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, theswitching between ON/OFF of operation for cyclically/regularly changingthe phase change value on a per-symbol basis is possible. Accordingly,phase changer 205A and/or 205B in, for example, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG.19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG.32, or FIG. 33 can control the ON/OFF of a phase change operation.Accordingly, the ON/OFF of the phase change operation by phase changer205A and/or phase changer 205B is controlled via the control information(u10) for switching between ON/OFF of operation for cyclically/regularlychanging the phase change value on a per-symbol basis described inEmbodiment 7.

Moreover, in FIG. 51, in “single stream modulated signal transmission5101”, cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) processing is always performed.In such cases, control information (u11) for controlling ON/OFF ofcyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) described in Embodiment 7 is notnecessary.

Example 2-4

In FIG. 51, in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”.CDD/CSD processing is performed, and in “multi-streammulti-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, a single-carrier scheme orOFDM scheme can be selected.

Accordingly, for example, phase changer 209A and/or 209B in, forexample, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28,FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, or FIG. 33 implements a phase changeor performs CDD/CSD processing. Accordingly, control information (u11)for controlling ON/OFF of cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) described inEmbodiment 7 is ignored in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signaltransmission 5102”.

In “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, theswitching between ON/OFF of operation for cyclically/regularly changingthe phase change value on a per-symbol basis is possible. Accordingly,phase changer 205A and/or 205B in, for example, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG.19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG.32, or FIG. 33 can control the ON/OFF of a phase change operation.Accordingly the ON/OFF of the phase change operation by phase changer205A and/or phase changer 205B is controlled via the control information(u10) for switching between ON/OFF of operation for cyclically/regularlychanging the phase change value on a per-symbol basis described inEmbodiment 7.

Moreover, in “single stream modulated signal transmission”, cyclic delaydiversity (CDD/CSD) processing is controlled via control information(u11) for controlling ON/OFF of cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD)described in Embodiment 7. However, as described above, when the basestation or AP transmits a modulated signal in accordance with FIG. 51,FIG. 52, and/or FIG. 53, in “single stream modulated signal transmission5101” in FIG. 51, control information (u11) for controlling ON/OFF ofcyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) indicates “ON”, and in “single streammodulated signal transmission 5101” in FIG. 51, CDD/CSD processing isperformed.

Example 2-5

In FIG. 51, in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”,whether CDD/CSD processing is performed or not is selectable, and in“multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, asingle-carrier scheme or OFDM scheme can be selected.

Accordingly, based on control information (u11) for controlling ON/OFFof cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) described in Embodiment 7, phasechanger 209A and/or 209B in, for example, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG.20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, orFIG. 33 selects whether to (i) implement a phase change or performCDD/CSD or (i) do not implement a phase change or do not performCDD/CSD.

In “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, theswitching between ON/OFF of operation for cyclically/regularly changingthe phase change value on a per-symbol basis is possible. Accordingly,phase changer 205A and/or 205B in, for example, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG.19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG.32, or FIG. 33 can control the ON/OFF of a phase change operation.Accordingly, the ON/OFF of the phase change operation by phase changer205A and/or 205B is controlled via the control information (u10) forswitching between ON/OFF of operation for cyclically/regularly changingthe phase change value on a per-symbol basis described in Embodiment 7.

Moreover, in FIG. 51, in “single stream modulated signal transmission5101”, cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) processing is always performed.In such cases, control information (u11) for controlling ON/OFF ofcyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) described in Embodiment 7 is notnecessary.

Example 2-6

In FIG. 51, in “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”,whether CDD/CSD processing is performed or not is selectable, and in“multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, asingle-carrier scheme or OFDM scheme can be selected.

Accordingly, based on control information (u11) for controlling ON/OFFof cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) described in Embodiment 7, phasechanger 209A and/or 209B in, for example, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG.20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, orFIG. 33 selects whether to (i) implement a phase change or performCDD/CSD or (i) do not implement a phase change or do not performCDD/CSD.

In “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission 5102”, theswitching between ON/OFF of operation for cyclically/regularly changingthe phase change value on a per-symbol basis is possible. Accordingly,phase changer 205A and/or 205B in, for example, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG.19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG.32, or FIG. 33 can control the ON/OFF of a phase change operation.Accordingly, the ON/OFF of the phase change operation by phase changer205A and/or 205B is controlled via the control information (u10) forswitching between ON/OFF of operation for cyclically/regularly changingthe phase change value on a per-symbol basis described in Embodiment 7.

Moreover, in “single stream modulated signal transmission”, cyclic delaydiversity (CDD/CSD) processing is controlled via control information(u11) for controlling ON/OFF of cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD)described in Embodiment 7. However, as described above, when the basestation or AP transmits a modulated signal in accordance with FIG. 51,FIG. 52, and/or FIG. 53, in “single stream modulated signal transmission5101” in FIG. 51, control information (u11) for controlling ON/OFF ofcyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) indicates “ON”, and in “single streammodulated signal transmission 5101” in FIG. 51, CDD/CSD processing isperformed.

Third Example

FIG. 57 illustrates one example of a configuration of a modulated signaltransmitted by a base station or AP according to this embodiment.

In FIG. 57, time is represented on the horizontal axis. Operations thatare the same as in FIG. 51 share like reference marks. As illustrated inFIG. 57, the transmission device in the base station or AP performs“single stream modulated signal transmission 5101” and subsequentlyperforms “single stream modulated signal transmission 5701”.

FIG. 52 illustrates one example of a frame configuration when singlestream modulated signal transmission 5101 in FIG. 57 is performed. AsFIG. 52 has already been described, repeated description will beomitted.

FIG. 58 illustrates one example of a frame configuration when singlestream modulated signal transmission 5701 in FIG. 57 is performed.

In FIG. 58, time is represented on the horizontal axis. As illustratedin FIG. 58, the base station or AP transmits preamble 5801 andsubsequently transmits control information symbol 5802, and subsequentlytransmits, for example, data symbol 5803. Note that preamble 5801,control information symbol, 5802, and, for example, data symbol 5803 areeach transmitted via a single stream.

Preamble 5801 conceivably includes a symbol for the terminal, which isthe communication partner of the base station or AP, to perform signaldetection, time synchronization, frequency synchronization, frequencyoffset estimation, channel estimation, and/or frame synchronization. Forexample, preamble 5801 is conceivably a PSK scheme symbol.

Control information symbol 5802 is a symbol including, for example,information relating to the communications method of the modulatedsignal transmitted by the base station and AP and/or informationrequired by the terminal to demodulate a data symbol. However, theinformation included in control information symbol 5802 is not limitedto this example; control information symbol 5802 may include othercontrol information.

Note that hereinafter, the scheme used for “single stream modulatedsignal transmission 5101” in FIG. 57 may be a single-carrier scheme, andthe scheme used for “single stream modulated signal transmission 5701”in FIG. 57 may be a single-carrier scheme or a multi-carrier scheme.Note that in the following description, the multi-carrier scheme isexemplified as the OFDM scheme. However, note that the multi-carrierscheme used is not limited to the OFDM scheme.

In this embodiment, CDD/CSD as described in Supplemental Information 1is implemented upon performing single stream modulated signaltransmission 5101 using a single-carrier scheme in FIG. 51.

Example 3-1

In FIG. 57, in “single stream modulated signal transmission 5701”,CDD/CSD processing is not performed, and in “single stream modulatedsignal transmission 5701”, a single-carrier scheme or OFDM scheme can beselected.

When “single stream modulated signal transmission 5701” is performed, itis possible to select “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission”instead of “single stream modulated signal transmission”. Note thatsince “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission” has alreadybeen described, repeated description will be omitted.

Next, operations performed by the transmission device in the basestation will be described with reference to FIG. 54.

FIG. 54 illustrates one example of a configuration of signal processor106 in, for example, the transmission device in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 1 or FIG. 44. As the general operations illustratedin FIG. 54 have already been described, repeated description will beomitted.

In this example, in FIG. 57, when “single stream modulated signaltransmission 5101” is performed, CDD/CSD processing is performed, andwhen “single stream modulated signal transmission 5701” is performed,CDD/CSD processing is not performed.

As the operations performed by inserter 5405 have already beendescribed, repeated description will be omitted.

CDD/CSD unit 5407 switches the CDD/CSD processing ON and OFF based oncontrol signal 5400. CDD/CSD unit 5407 knows the timing of the “singlestream modulated signal transmission 5101” in FIG. 57 from informationincluded in control signal 5400 indicating whether it is time totransmit a plurality of modulated signals for a plurality of streams ortime to transmit a single stream modulated signal.

In such cases, CDD/CSD unit 5407 determines to perform cyclic delaydiversity based on control information (u11) included in control signal5400 for controlling ON/OFF of cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD)described in Embodiment 7. Accordingly, when “single stream modulatedsignal transmission 5101” in FIG. 57 is performed, CDD/CSD unit 5407performs signal processing for cyclic delay diversity, and outputsCDD/CSD processed signal 5408 in accordance with the frameconfiguration.

CDD/CSD unit 5407 knows the timing of the “single stream modulatedsignal transmission 5701” in FIG. 57 from information included in thecontrol signal indicating whether it is time to transmit a plurality ofmodulated signals for a plurality of streams or time to transmit asingle stream modulated signal.

CDD/CSD unit 5407 determines to not perform cyclic delay diversity basedon control information (u11) included in control signal 5400 forcontrolling ON/OFF of cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) described inEmbodiment 7. Accordingly, when “single stream modulated signaltransmission 5701” in FIG. 57 is performed, CDD/CSD unit 5407 does notperform signal processing for cyclic delay diversity, and, for example,does not output a signal.

Selector 5409A receives inputs of signal 5403A, signal 5406 inaccordance with the frame configuration, and control signal 5400, andbased on control signal 5400, selects either signal 5403A or signal 5406in accordance with frame configuration, and outputs selected signal5410A. Accordingly, when “single stream modulated signal transmission5101” is performed and when “single stream modulated signal transmission5701” is performed, in either case, selector 5409A outputs signal 5406in accordance with the frame configuration as selected signal 5410A.

When “single stream modulated signal transmission 5101” is performed,selector 5409B outputs CDD/CSD processed signal 5408 in accordance withthe frame configuration as selected signal 5410B, and when “singlestream modulated signal transmission 5701” is performed, for example,does not output selected signal 5410B.

As the operations performed by radio units 107A, 107_B in the basestation illustrated in FIG. 1, FIG. 44 have already been described,repeated description will be omitted.

Example 3-2

In FIG. 57, in “single stream modulated signal transmission 5701”,whether CDD/CSD processing is performed or not is selectable, and in“single stream modulated signal transmission 5701”, a single-carrierscheme or OFDM scheme can be selected.

When “single stream modulated signal transmission 5701” is performed, itis possible to select “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission”instead of “single stream modulated signal transmission”. Note thatsince “multi-stream multi-modulated-signal transmission” has alreadybeen described, repeated description will be omitted.

Next, operations performed by the transmission device in the basestation will be described with reference to FIG. 54.

FIG. 54 illustrates one example of a configuration of signal processor106 in, for example, the transmission device in the base stationillustrated in FIG. 1 or FIG. 44. As the general operations illustratedin FIG. 54 have already been described, repeated description will beomitted.

In this example, in FIG. 57, when “single stream modulated signaltransmission 5101” is performed, CDD/CSD processing is performed, andwhen “single stream modulated signal transmission 5701” is performed,whether to perform CDD/CSD processing or not is selectable.

As the operations performed by inserter 5405 have already beendescribed, repeated description will be omitted.

CDD/CSD unit 5407 switches the CDD/CSD processing ON and OFF based oncontrol signal 5400. CDD/CSD unit 5407 knows the timing of the “singlestream modulated signal transmission 5101” in FIG. 57 from informationincluded in control signal 5400 indicating whether it is time totransmit a plurality of modulated signals for a plurality of streams ortime to transmit a single stream modulated signal.

In such cases, CDD/CSD unit 5407 determines to perform cyclic delaydiversity based on control information (u11) included in control signal5400 for controlling ON/OFF of cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD)described in Embodiment 7. Accordingly, when “single stream modulatedsignal transmission 5101” in FIG. 57 is performed, CDD/CSD unit 5407performs signal processing for cyclic delay diversity, and outputsCDD/CSD processed signal 5408 in accordance with the frameconfiguration.

CDD/CSD unit 5407 knows the timing of the “single stream modulatedsignal transmission 5701” in FIG. 57 from information included in thecontrol signal indicating whether it is time to transmit a plurality ofmodulated signals for a plurality of streams or time to transmit asingle stream modulated signal.

When “single stream modulated signal transmission 5701” is performed,CDD/CSD unit 5407 determines to not perform cyclic delay diversity basedon control information (u11) included in control signal 5400 forcontrolling ON/OFF of cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) described inEmbodiment 7.

Accordingly, when “single stream modulated signal transmission 5701” inFIG. 57 is performed, CDD/CSD unit 5407 does not perform signalprocessing for cyclic delay diversity, and, for example, does not outputa signal.

Next, operations different from this example will be described.

CDD/CSD unit 5407 knows the timing of the “single stream modulatedsignal transmission 5701” in FIG. 57 from information included in thecontrol signal indicating whether it is time to transmit a plurality ofmodulated signals for a plurality of streams or time to transmit asingle stream modulated signal.

When “single stream modulated signal transmission 5701” is performed,CDD/CSD unit 5407 determines to perform cyclic delay diversity based oncontrol information (u11) included in control signal 5400 forcontrolling (the ON/OFF of cyclic delay diversity (CDD/CSD) described inEmbodiment 7.

Accordingly, when “single stream modulated signal transmission 5701” inFIG. 57 is performed, CDD/CSD unit 5407 performs signal processing forcyclic delay diversity, and outputs CDD/CSD processed signal 5408 inaccordance with the frame configuration.

Selector 5409A receives inputs of signal 5403A, signal 5406A inaccordance with the frame configuration, and control signal 5400, andbased on control signal 5400, selects either signal 5403A or signal 5406in accordance with frame configuration, and outputs selected signal5410A.

Accordingly, when “single stream modulated signal transmission 5101” isperformed and when “single stream modulated signal transmission 5701” isperformed, in either case, selector 5409A outputs signal 5406 inaccordance with the frame configuration as selected signal 5410A.

When “single stream modulated signal transmission 5101” is performed,selector 5409B outputs CDD/CSD processed signal 5408 in accordance withthe frame configuration as selected signal 5410B.

When “single stream modulated signal transmission 5701” is performed,when selector 5409B determines to not perform CDD/CSD processing in“single stream modulated signal transmission 5701”, selector 5409B, forexample, does not output selected signal 5410B.

When “single stream modulated signal transmission 5701” is performed,when selector 5409B determines to perform CDD/CSD processing in “singlestream modulated signal transmission 5701”, selector 5409B outputsCDD/CSD processed signal 5408 in accordance with the frame configurationas selected signal 5410B.

As the operations performed by radio units 107_A, 107_B in the basestation illustrated in FIG. 1, FIG. 44 have already been described,repeated description will be omitted.

As described above, control over whether to implement a phase change ornot and control over whether to perform CDD/CSD or not based on, forexample, the number of transmission streams and/or the transmissionmethod can be done in an appropriate manner. This makes it possible toachieve an advantageous effect in which it is possible to improve datareception quality of the communication partner.

An advantageous characteristic is that, by performing CDD/CSD, theprobability that data reception quality of the communication partnerwill improve increases, and, for example, when single streamtransmission is performed, it is possible to effectively use theplurality of transmitting antennas of the transmission device. Anotheradvantageous characteristic is that, when performing multi-streamtransmission, based the propagation/communications environment and/orphase change support by the communication partner, for example, it ispossible to achieve favorable data reception quality by controllingwhether a phase change is implemented or not.

Note that although FIG. 54 is used as an example of a portion of theconfiguration of signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 1 and/or FIG.44, the configurations illustrated in any one of FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG.19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG.32, and FIG. 33 may be implemented.

For example, in the configurations illustrated in FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG.19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG.32, and FIG. 33, when single stream transmission is performed, mappedsignal 201B of s2(t) is nullified.

In weighting synthesizer 203, as precoding matrix F, for example, any ofthe following can be applied.

$\begin{matrix}\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 149} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}\beta & 0 \\\beta & 0\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(149)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 150} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}0 & \beta \\0 & \beta\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(150)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 151} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}\alpha & 0 \\\beta & 0\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(151)} \\\left\lbrack {{MATH}.\mspace{14mu} 152} \right\rbrack & \; \\{{F(i)} = \begin{pmatrix}0 & \alpha \\0 & \beta\end{pmatrix}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu}(152)}\end{matrix}$

Note that α may be an actual number, and, alternatively, may be animaginary number. Note that β may be an actual number, and,alternatively, may be an imaginary number. However, α is not zero, and βis not zero.

The above was described in terms of expressions, the signal may be splitinstead of implementing the weighting synthesis (calculation using amatrix) as per the expressions above.

In single stream cases, phase changers 205A, 205B do not implement aphase change. In other words, input signals are output as-is.

Moreover, in single stream cases, phase changers 209A, 209B may performsignal processing for CDD/CSD instead of implementing a phase change.

Embodiment A9

In Supplemental Information 4, for example, it is stated that phasechangers may be included before and after weighting synthesizer 203 inthe configurations illustrated in, for example, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG.19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG.32, and FIG. 33.

In this embodiment, supplemental information regarding this point willbe given.

A first example of how phase changers are arranged before and afterweighting synthesizer 203 is illustrated in FIG. 59. In FIG. 59,components that operate the same as in, for example, FIG. 2 share likereference marks. Accordingly, descriptions that overlap with, forexample, FIG. 2 will be omitted. As illustrated in FIG. 59, phasechanger 5901A receives inputs of mapped signal s1(t)201A and controlsignal 200, and, for example, based information on the phase changemethod included in control signal 200, implements a phase change onmapped signal s1(t)201A and outputs phase-changed signal 5902A.

Similarly phase changer 5901B receives inputs of mapped signal s2(t)201Band control signal 200, and, for example, based information on the phasechange method included in control signal 200, implements a phase changeon mapped signal s2(t)201B and outputs phase-changed signal 5902B.

Then, phase-changed signal 206A is input into inserter 207A illustratedin, for example, FIG. 2, and phase-changed signal 206B is input intoinserter 207B illustrated in, for example, FIG. 2.

A second example of how phase changers are arranged before and afterweighting synthesizer 203 is illustrated in FIG. 60. In FIG. 60,components that operate the same as in, for example, FIG. 2 share likereference marks. Accordingly, descriptions that overlap with, forexample, FIG. 2 will be omitted. Moreover, components that operate thesame as in FIG. 59 share like reference marks. Accordingly, descriptionsthat overlap with FIG. 59 will be omitted.

Unlike FIG. 59, in FIG. 60, phase changer 205A is not inserted afterweighting synthesizer 203; only phase changer 205B is inserted afterweighting synthesizer 203.

Then, weighting synthesized signal 204A is input into inserter 207Aillustrated in, for example, FIG. 2, and phase-changed signal 206B isinput into inserter 207B illustrated in, for example, FIG. 2.

A third example of how phase changers are arranged before and afterweighting synthesizer 203 is illustrated in FIG. 61. In FIG. 61,components that operate the same as in, for example, FIG. 2 share likereference marks. Accordingly, descriptions that overlap with, forexample, FIG. 2 will be omitted. Moreover, components that operate thesame as in FIG. 59 share like reference marks. Accordingly, descriptionsthat overlap with FIG. 59 will be omitted.

Unlike FIG. 60, in FIG. 61, phase changer 205A is inserted afterweighting synthesizer 203 on the top line, but phase changer 205A is notpresent on the bottom line.

Then, phase-changed signal 206A is input into inserter 207A illustratedin, for example, FIG. 2, and weighting synthesized signal 204B is inputinto inserter 207B illustrated in, for example, FIG. 2.

A fourth example of how phase changers are arranged before and afterweighting synthesizer 203 is illustrated in FIG. 62. In FIG. 62,components that operate the same as in, for example, FIG. 2 share likereference marks. Accordingly, descriptions that overlap with, forexample, FIG. 2 will be omitted. Moreover, components that operate thesame as in FIG. 59 share like reference marks. Accordingly, descriptionsthat overlap with FIG. 59 will be omitted.

Unlike FIG. 59, in FIG. 62, phase changer 5901B is inserted before theweighting synthesizer, but phase changer 5901A is not provided.

Then, phase-changed signal 206A is input into inserter 207A illustratedin, for example, FIG. 2, and phase-changed signal 206B is input intoinserter 207B illustrated in, for example, FIG. 2.

A fifth example of how phase changers are arranged before and afterweighting synthesizer 203 is illustrated in FIG. 63. In FIG. 63,components that operate the same as in, for example, FIG. 2 share likereference marks. Accordingly, descriptions that overlap with, forexample, FIG. 2 will be omitted. Moreover, components that operate thesame as in FIG. 59 share like reference marks. Accordingly, descriptionsthat overlap with FIG. 59 will be omitted.

Unlike FIG. 62, in FIG. 63, phase changer 5901A is inserted afterweighting synthesizer 203 on the top line, but phase changer 5901B isnot present on the bottom line.

Then, phase-changed signal 206A is input into inserter 207A illustratedin, for example, FIG. 2, and phase-changed signal 206B is input intoinserter 207B illustrated in, for example, FIG. 2.

A sixth example of how phase changers are arranged before and afterweighting synthesizer 203 is illustrated in FIG. 64. In FIG. 64,components that operate the same as in, for example, FIG. 2 share likereference marks. Accordingly, descriptions that overlap with, forexample, FIG. 2 will be omitted. Moreover, components that operate thesame as in FIG. 59 share like reference marks. Accordingly, descriptionsthat overlap with FIG. 59 will be omitted.

In FIG. 64, phase changers 5901B, 205B are present before and afterweighting synthesizer 203, on the bottom line, and phase changers 5901A,205A are present before and after weighting synthesizer 203, on the topline.

Then, weighting synthesized signal 204A is input into inserter 207Aillustrated in, for example, FIG. 2, and phase-changed signal 206B isinput into inserter 207B illustrated in, for example, FIG. 2.

A seventh example of how phase changers are arranged before and afterweighting synthesizer 203 is illustrated in FIG. 65. In FIG. 65,components that operate the same as in, for example, FIG. 2 share likereference marks. Accordingly, descriptions that overlap with, forexample, FIG. 2 will be omitted. Moreover, components that operate thesame as in FIG. 59 share like reference marks. Accordingly, descriptionsthat overlap with FIG. 59 will be omitted.

In FIG. 65, phase changers 5901B, 205A are present before and afterweighting synthesizer 203, on the bottom and top lines, respectively,and phase changers 5901A, 205B are not present before and afterweighting synthesizer 203, on the top and bottom lines, respectively.

Then, phase-changed signal 206A is input into inserter 207A illustratedin, for example, FIG. 2, and weighting synthesized signal 204B is inputinto inserter 207B illustrated in, for example, FIG. 2.

An eighth example of how phase changers are arranged before and afterweighting synthesizer 203 is illustrated in FIG. 66. In FIG. 66,components that operate the same as in, for example, FIG. 2 share likereference marks. Accordingly, descriptions that overlap with, forexample, FIG. 2 will be omitted. Moreover, components that operate thesame as in FIG. 59 share like reference marks. Accordingly, descriptionsthat overlap with FIG. 59 will be omitted.

In FIG. 66, phase changers 5901A, 205B are present before and afterweighting synthesizer 203, on the top and bottom lines, respectively,and phase changers 5901B, 205A are not present before and afterweighting synthesizer 203, on the bottom and top lines, respectively.

Then, weighting synthesized signal 204B is input into inserter 207Aillustrated in, for example, FIG. 2, and phase-changed signal 206B isinput into inserter 207B illustrated in, for example, FIG. 2.

A ninth example of how phase changers are arranged before and afterweighting synthesizer 203 is illustrated in FIG. 67. In FIG. 67,components that operate the same as in, for example, FIG. 2 share likereference marks. Accordingly, descriptions that overlap with, forexample, FIG. 2 will be omitted. Moreover, components that operate thesame as in FIG. 59 share like reference marks. Accordingly, descriptionsthat overlap with FIG. 59 will be omitted.

In FIG. 67, phase changers 5901A, 205A are present before and afterweighting synthesizer 203, on the top and bottom lines, respectively,and phase changers 5901B, 205B are not present before and afterweighting synthesizer 203, on the bottom and top lines, respectively.

Then, phase-changed signal 206A is input into inserter 207A illustratedin, for example, FIG. 2, and weighting synthesized signal 204B is inputinto inserter 207B illustrated in, for example, FIG. 2.

The embodiments described in the present disclosure may be implementedusing these configurations.

The phase change method used by phase changers 5901A, 5901B, 205A, and205B in FIG. 59, FIG. 60, FIG. 61, FIG. 62, FIG. 63, FIG. 64, FIG. 65,FIG. 66, and FIG. 67 is, for example, set according to control signal200.

Embodiment A10

In this embodiment, an example of a robust communications method will begiven.

First Example

FIG. 68 illustrates operations performed by mapper 104 in FIG. 1 of abase station or AP.

Mapper 6802 receives inputs of encoded data 6801 and control signal6800, and when a robust transmission method is specified by controlsignal 6800, performs mapping processes such as those described below,and outputs mapped signals 6803A, 6803B.

Note that control signal 6800 corresponds to control signal 100 in FIG.1, encoded data 6801 corresponds to encoded data 103 in FIG. 1, mapper6802 corresponds to mapper 104 in FIG. 1, mapped signal 6803Acorresponds to baseband signal 105_1, which is a mapped signal, in FIG.1, and mapped signal 6801B corresponds to baseband signal 105_2, whichis a mapped signal, in FIG. 1.

For example, mapper 6802 receives inputs of bit c0(k), bit c1(k), bitc2(k), and bit c3(k) as encoded data 6801. Note that k is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 0.

For example, mapper 6802 performs QPSK modulation on the following bits,so as to obtain mapped signal a(k) from bit c0(k) and bit c1(k), obtainmapped signal b(k) from bit c2(k) and bit c3(k), obtain mapped signala′(k) from bit c0(k) and bit c1(k), and obtain mapped signal b′(k) frombit c2(k) and bit c3(k).

Mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k is represented as s1(i=2k),mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k is represented as s2(i=2k),mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k+1 is represented ass1(i=2k+1), and mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k+1 isrepresented as s2(i=2k+1).

s1(i=2k) is expressed as a(k), s2(i=2k) is expressed as b(k), s1(i=2k+1)is expressed as b′(k), and s2(i=2k+1) is expressed as a′(k).

Next, the relationship between “a(k) and a′(k)” and “b(k) and b′(k)”will be described.

FIG. 69 illustrates an example of an distribution of signal points in anin-phase I-orthogonal Q plane when QPSK is used, and illustrates therelationship between signal points for the values for bit x0 and bit x1.

When bits [x0 x1]=[0 0] (i.e., when x0 is 0 and x1 is 0), in-phasecomponent I is set to z and orthogonal component Q is set to z, whichmatches signal point 6901. Note that z is an actual number that isgreater than 0.

When bits [x0 x1]=[0 1] (i.e., when x0 is 0 and x1 is 1), in-phasecomponent I is set to −z and orthogonal component Q is set to z, whichmatches signal point 6902.

When bits [x0 x1]=[1 0] (i.e., when x0 is 1 and x1 is 0), in-phasecomponent I is set to z and orthogonal component Q is set to −z, whichmatches signal point 6903.

When bits [x0 x1]=[1 1] (i.e., when x0 is 1 and x1 is 1), in-phasecomponent I is set to −z and orthogonal component Q is set to −z, whichmatches signal point 6904.

FIG. 70 illustrates an example of an distribution of signal points in anin-phase I-orthogonal Q plane when QPSK is used, and illustrates therelationship between signal points for the values for bit x0 and bit x1.However, “the relationship between signal points for the values for bitx0 and bit x1” in FIG. 69 and “the relationship between signal pointsfor the values for bit x0 and bit x1” in FIG. 70 are different.

When bits [x0 x1]=[0 0] (i.e., when x0 is 0 and x1 is 0), in-phasecomponent I is set to z and orthogonal component Q is set to −z, whichmatches signal point 7003. Note that z is an actual number that isgreater than 0.

When bits [x0 x1]=[0 1] (i.e., when x0 is 1 and x1 is 1), in-phasecomponent I is set to −z and orthogonal component Q is set to −z, whichmatches signal point 7004.

When bits [x0 x1]=[1 0] (i.e., when x0 is 0 and x1 is 0), in-phasecomponent I is set to z and orthogonal component Q is set to z, whichmatches signal point 7001.

When bits [x0 x1]=[1 1] (i.e., when x0 is 1 and x1 is 1), in-phasecomponent I is set to −z and orthogonal component Q is set to z, whichmatches signal point 7002.

FIG. 71 illustrates an example of an distribution of signal points in anin-phase I-orthogonal Q plane when QPSK is used, and illustrates therelationship between signal points for the values for bit x0 and bit x1.However, “the relationship between signal points for the values for bitx0 and bit x1” in FIG. 71 is different from “the relationship betweensignal points for the values for bit x0 and bit x1” in FIG. 69 and “therelationship between signal points for the values for bit x0 and bit x1”in FIG. 70.

When bits [x0 x1]=[0 0] (i.e., when x0 is 0 and x1 is 0), in-phasecomponent I is set to −z and orthogonal component Q is set to z, whichmatches signal point 7102. Note that z is an actual number that isgreater than 0.

When bits [x0 x1]=[0 1] (i.e., when x0 is 0 and x1 is 1), in-phasecomponent I is set to z and orthogonal component Q is set to z, whichmatches signal point 7101.

When bits [x0 x1]=[1 0] (i.e., when x0 is 1 and x1 is 0), in-phasecomponent I is set to −z and orthogonal component Q is set to −z, whichmatches signal point 7104.

When bits [x0 x1]=[1 1] (i.e., when x0 is 1 and x1 is 1), in-phasecomponent I is set to z and orthogonal component Q is set to −z, whichmatches signal point 7103.

FIG. 72 illustrates an example of an distribution of signal points in anin-phase I-orthogonal Q plane when QPSK is used, and illustrates therelationship between signal points for the values for bit x0 and bit x1.However, “the relationship between signal points for the values for bitx0 and bit x1” in FIG. 72 is different from “the relationship betweensignal points for the values for bit x0 and bit x1” in FIG. 69, “therelationship between signal points for the values for bit x0 and bit x1”in FIG. 70, and “the relationship between signal points for the valuesfor bit x0 and bit x1” in FIG. 71.

When bits [x0 x1]=[0 0] (i.e., when x0 is 0 and x1 is 0), in-phasecomponent I is set to −z and orthogonal component Q is set to −z, whichmatches signal point 7204. Note that z is an actual number that isgreater than 0.

When bits [x0 x1]=[0 1] (i.e., when x0 is 1 and x1 is 1), in-phasecomponent I is set to z and orthogonal component Q is set to −z, whichmatches signal point 7203.

When bits [x0 x1]=[1 0] (i.e., when x0 is 1 and x1 is 0), in-phasecomponent I is set to −z and orthogonal component Q is set to z, whichmatches signal point 7202.

When bits [x0 x1]=[1 1] (i.e., when x0 is 1 and x1 is 1), in-phasecomponent I is set to z and orthogonal component Q is set to z, whichmatches signal point 7201.

For example, in order to generate a(k), the mapping illustrated in FIG.69 is used. For example, c0(k)=0 and c1(k)=0, signal point 6901 ismapped using the mapping illustrated in FIG. 69, and signal point 6901corresponds to a(k).

In order to generate a′(k), the mapping to be used is set to any one ofthe mapping illustrated in FIG. 69, the mapping illustrated in FIG. 70,the mapping illustrated in FIG. 71, or the mapping illustrated in FIG.72.

<1>

In order to generate a′(k) when the mapping to be used is set to themapping illustrated in FIG. 69, since c0(k)=0 and c1(k)=0, signal point6901 is mapped using the mapping illustrated in FIG. 69, and signalpoint 6901 corresponds to a′(k).

<2>

In order to generate a′(k) when the mapping to be used is set to themapping illustrated in FIG. 70, since c0(k)=0 and c1(k)=0, signal point7003 is mapped using the mapping illustrated in FIG. 70, and signalpoint 7003 corresponds to a′(k).

<3>

In order to generate a′(k) when the mapping to be used is set to themapping illustrated in FIG. 71, since c0(k)=0 and c1(k)=0, signal point7102 is mapped using the mapping illustrated in FIG. 71, and signalpoint 7102 corresponds to a′(k).

<4>

In order to generate a′(k) when the mapping to be used is set to themapping illustrated in FIG. 72, since c0(k)=0 and c1(k)=0, signal point7204 is mapped using the mapping illustrated in FIG. 72, and signalpoint 7204 corresponds to a′(k).

As described above, the relationship between “bits (for example x0, x1)to be transmitted for generation of a(k) and the distribution of signalpoints” and the relationship between “bits (for example x0, x1) to betransmitted for generation of a′(k) and the distribution of signalpoints” may be the same, and, alternatively, may be different.

An example of a case in which the relationships are the same is one inwhich FIG. 69 is used to generate a(k) and FIG. 69 is used to generatea′(k) as described above.

Examples of cases in which the relationships are different include thosein which FIG. 69 is used to generate a(k) and FIG. 70 is used togenerate a′(k), FIG. 69 is used to generate a(k) and FIG. 71 is used togenerate a′(k), and FIG. 69 is used to generate a(k) and FIG. 72 is usedto generate a′(k), as described above.

Other examples include “the modulation scheme for generating a(k) andthe modulation scheme for generating a′(k) are different” and “thesignal point distribution in the in-phase I-orthogonal Q plane forgenerating a(k) and the signal point distribution in the in-phaseI-orthogonal Q plane for generating a′(k) are different”.

For example, as described above, QPSK may be used as the modulationscheme for generating a(k), and a signal point distribution modulationscheme other than QPSK may be used as the modulation scheme forgenerating a′(k). Moreover, the signal point distribution in thein-phase I-orthogonal Q plane for generating a(k) may be thedistribution illustrated in FIG. 69, and the signal point distributionin the in-phase I-orthogonal Q plane for generating a′(k) may be adistribution different from that illustrated in FIG. 69.

Note that “different signal point distributions in the in-phaseI-orthogonal Q plane” means, for example, when the coordinates of foursignal points in the in-phase I-orthogonal Q plane for generating a(k)are distributed as illustrated in FIG. 69, at least one of the foursignal points in the in-phase I-orthogonal Q plane for generating a′(k)does not overlap with any one of the four signal points in FIG. 69.

For example, in order to generate b(k), the mapping illustrated in FIG.69 is used. For example, c2(k)=0 and c3(k)=0, signal point 6901 ismapped using the mapping illustrated in FIG. 69, and signal point 6901corresponds to b(k).

In order to generate b′(k), the mapping to be used is set to any one ofthe mapping illustrated in FIG. 69, the mapping illustrated in FIG. 70,the mapping illustrated in FIG. 71, or the mapping illustrated in FIG.72.

<5>

In order to generate b′(k) when the mapping to be used is set to themapping illustrated in FIG. 69, since c2(k)=0 and c3(k)=0, signal point6901 is mapped using the mapping illustrated in FIG. 69, and signalpoint 6901 corresponds to b′(k).

<6>

In order to generate b′(k) when the mapping to be used is set to themapping illustrated in FIG. 70, since c2(k)=0 and c3(k)=0, signal point7003 is mapped using the mapping illustrated in FIG. 70, and signalpoint 7003 corresponds to b′(k).

<7>

In order to generate b′(k) when the mapping to be used is set to themapping illustrated in FIG. 71, since c2(k)=0 and c3(k)=0, signal point7102 is mapped using the mapping illustrated in FIG. 71, and signalpoint 7102 corresponds to b′(k).

<8>

In order to generate b′(k) when the mapping to be used is set to themapping illustrated in FIG. 72, since c2(k)=0 and c3(k)=0, signal point7204 is mapped using the mapping illustrated in FIG. 72, and signalpoint 7204 corresponds to b′(k).

As described above, the relationship between “bits (for example x0, x1)to be transmitted for generation of b(k) and the distribution of signalpoints” and the relationship between “bits (for example x0, x1) to betransmitted for generation of b′(k) and the distribution of signalpoints” may be the same, and, alternatively, may be different.

An example of a case in which the relationships are the same is one inwhich FIG. 69 is used to generate b(k) and FIG. 69 is used to generateb′(k) as described above.

Examples of cases in which the relationships are different include thosein which FIG. 69 is used to generate b(k) and FIG. 70 is used togenerate b′(k), FIG. 69 is used to generate b(k) and FIG. 71 is used togenerate b′(k), and FIG. 69 is used to generate b(k) and FIG. 72 is usedto generate b′(k), as described above.

Other examples include “the modulation scheme for generating b(k) andthe modulation scheme for generating b′(k) are different” and “thesignal point distribution in the in-phase I-orthogonal Q plane forgenerating b(k) and the signal point distribution in the in-phaseI-orthogonal Q plane for generating b′(k) are different”.

For example, as described above, QPSK may be used as the modulationscheme for generating b(k), and a signal point distribution modulationscheme other than QPSK may be used as the modulation scheme forgenerating b′(k). Moreover, the signal point distribution in thein-phase I-orthogonal Q plane for generating b(k) may be thedistribution illustrated in FIG. 69, and the signal point distributionin the in-phase I-orthogonal Q plane for generating b′(k) may be adistribution different from that illustrated in FIG. 69.

Note that “different signal point distributions in the in-phaseI-orthogonal Q plane” means, for example, when the coordinates of foursignal points in the in-phase I-orthogonal Q plane for generating b(k)are distributed as illustrated in FIG. 69, at least one of the foursignal points in the in-phase I-orthogonal Q plane for generating b′(k)does not overlap with any one of the four signal points in FIG. 69.

As described above, since mapped signal 6803A corresponds to mappedsignal 105_1 in FIG. 1 and mapped signal 6803B corresponds to mappedsignal 105_2 FIG. 1, mapped signal 6803A and mapped signal 6803B areapplied with a phase change and/or weighting synthesis processing basedon, for example, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22,FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, FIG. 33, FIG. 59, FIG. 60,FIG. 61, FIG. 62, FIG. 63, FIG. 64, FIG. 65, FIG. 66, and FIG. 67, whichcorrespond to signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 1.

Second Example

Hereinbefore, the transmission device included in the base station or APwas exemplified as having the configuration in FIG. 1, but hereoperations for when the transmission device in the base station or APhas the configuration illustrated in FIG. 73, which differs from FIG. 1,will be described.

In FIG. 73, components that operate the same as in FIG. 1, FIG. 44 sharelike reference marks. Accordingly, repeated description thereof will beomitted.

Mapper 7301 illustrated in FIG. 73 receives inputs of encoded data103_1, 103_2, and control signal 100, performs mapping based oninformation relating to a mapping method included in control signal 100,and outputs mapped signals 105_1, 105_2.

FIG. 74 illustrates operations performed by mapper 7301 illustrated inFIG. 73. In FIG. 74, components that operate the same as in FIG. 68share like reference marks. Accordingly, repeated description thereofwill be omitted.

Mapper 6802 receives inputs of encoded data 7401_1, 7401_2, and controlsignal 6800, and when a robust transmission method is specified bycontrol signal 6800, performs mapping processes such as those describedbelow, and outputs mapped signals 6803A, 6803B.

Note that control signal 6800 corresponds to control signal 100 in FIG.73, encoded data 7401_1 corresponds to encoded data 103_1 in FIG. 73,encoded data 7401_2 corresponds to encoded data 103_2 in FIG. 73, mapper6802 corresponds to mapper 7301 in FIG. 73, mapped signal 6803Acorresponds to mapped signal 105_1 in FIG. 73, and mapped signal 6801Bcorresponds to mapped signal 105_2 in FIG. 73.

For example, mapper 6802 receives inputs of bit c0(k) and bit c1(k) asencoded data 7401_1, and bit c2(k), and bit c3(k) as encoded data7401_2. Note that k is an integer that is greater than or equal to 0.

Mapper 6802 performs QPSK modulation on the following bits, so as toobtain mapped signal a(k) from bit c0(k) and bit c1(k), obtain mappedsignal b(k) from bit c2(k) and bit c3(k), obtain mapped signal a′(k)from bit c0(k) and bit c1(k), and obtain mapped signal b′(k) from bitc2(k) and bit c3(k).

Mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k is represented as s1(i=2k),mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k is represented as s2(i=2k),mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k+1 is represented ass1(i=2k+1), and mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k+1 isrepresented as s2(i=2k+1).

s1(i=2k) is expressed as a(k), s2(i=2k) is expressed as b(k), s1(i=2k+1)is expressed as b′(k), and s2(i=2k+1) is expressed as a′(k).

Next, the relationship between “a(k) and a′(k)” and “b(k) and b′(k)”will be described with reference to FIG. 69, FIG. 70, FIG. 71, and FIG.72.

As described above, since mapped signal 6803A corresponds to mappedsignal 105_1 in FIG. 73 and mapped signal 6803B corresponds to mappedsignal 105_2 FIG. 73, mapped signal 6803A and mapped signal 6803B areapplied with a phase change and/or weighting synthesis processing basedon, for example, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22,FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, FIG. 33, FIG. 59, FIG. 60,FIG. 61, FIG. 62, FIG. 63, FIG. 64, FIG. 65, FIG. 66, and FIG. 67, whichcorrespond to signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 73.

Third Example

Hereinbefore, the transmission device included in the base station or APwas exemplified as having the configuration in FIG. 1, but hereoperations for when the transmission device in the base station or APhas the configuration illustrated in FIG. 73, which differs from FIG. 1,will be described.

In FIG. 73, components that operate the same as in FIG. 1, FIG. 44 sharelike reference marks. Accordingly, repeated description thereof will beomitted.

Mapper 7301 illustrated in FIG. 73 receives inputs of encoded data103_1, 103_2, and control signal 100, performs mapping based oninformation relating to a mapping method included in control signal 100,and outputs mapped signals 105_1, 105_2.

FIG. 75 illustrates operations performed by mapper 7301 illustrated inFIG. 73. In FIG. 75, components that operate the same as in FIG. 68,FIG. 74 share like reference marks. Accordingly, repeated descriptionthereof will be omitted.

Mapper 6802 receives inputs of encoded data 7401_1, 7401_2, and controlsignal 6800, and when a robust transmission method is specified bycontrol signal 6800, performs mapping processes such as those describedbelow, and outputs mapped signals 6803A, 6803B.

Note that control signal 6800 corresponds to control signal 100 in FIG.73, encoded data 7401_1 corresponds to encoded data 103_1 in FIG. 73,encoded data 7401_2 corresponds to encoded data 103_2 in FIG. 73, mapper6802 corresponds to mapper 7301 in FIG. 73, mapped signal 6803Acorresponds to mapped signal 105_1 in FIG. 73, and mapped signal 6801Bcorresponds to mapped signal 105_2 in FIG. 73.

For example, mapper 6802 receives inputs of bit c0(k) and bit c2(k) asencoded data 7401_1, and bit c1(k), and bit c3(k) as encoded data7401_2. Note that k is an integer that is greater than or equal to 0.

Mapper 6802 performs QPSK modulation on the following bits, so as toobtain mapped signal a(k) from bit c0(k) and bit c1(k), obtain mappedsignal b(k) from bit c2(k) and bit c3(k), obtain mapped signal a′(k)from bit c0(k) and bit c1(k), and obtain mapped signal b′(k) from bitc2(k) and bit c3(k).

Mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k is represented as s1(i=2k),mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k is represented as s2(i=2k),mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k+1 is represented ass1(i=2k+1), and mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k+1 isrepresented as s2(i=2k+1).

s1(i=2k) is expressed as a(k), s2(i=2k) is expressed as b(k), s1(i=2k+1)is expressed as b′(k), and s2(i=2k+1) is expressed as a′(k).

Next, the relationship between “a(k) and a′(k)” and “b(k) and b′(k)”will be described with reference to FIG. 69, FIG. 70, FIG. 71, and FIG.72.

As described above, since mapped signal 6803A corresponds to mappedsignal 105_1 in FIG. 73 and mapped signal 6803B corresponds to mappedsignal 105_2 FIG. 73, mapped signal 6803A and mapped signal 6803B areapplied with a phase change and/or weighting synthesis processing basedon, for example, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22,FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, FIG. 33, FIG. 59, FIG. 60,FIG. 61, FIG. 62, FIG. 63, FIG. 64, FIG. 65, FIG. 66, and FIG. 67, whichcorrespond to signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 73.

Fourth Example

FIG. 76 illustrates operations performed by mapper 104 in FIG. 1 of abase station or AP. In FIG. 76, components that operate the same as inFIG. 68 share like reference marks.

Mapper 6802 receives inputs of encoded data 6801 and control signal6800, and when a robust transmission method is specified by controlsignal 6800, performs mapping processes such as those described below,and outputs mapped signals 6803A, 6803B.

Note that control signal 6800 corresponds to control signal 100 in FIG.1, encoded data 6801 corresponds to encoded data 103 in FIG. 1, mapper6802 corresponds to mapper 104 in FIG. 1, mapped signal 6803Acorresponds to mapped signal 105_1 in FIG. 1, and mapped signal 6801Bcorresponds to mapped signal 105_2 in FIG. 1.

For example, mapper 6802 receives inputs of bit c0(k), bit c1(k), bitc2(k), bit c3(k), bit c4(k), bit c5(k), bit c6(k), and bit c7(k) asencoded data 6801. Note that k is an integer that is greater than orequal to 0.

Mapper 6802 performs a modulation using a modulation scheme having 16signal points, such as 16QAM, on the following bits, so as to obtainmapped signal a(k) from bit c0(k), bit c1(k), bit c2(k), and bit c3(k),obtain mapped signal b(k) from bit c4(k), bit c5(k), bit c6(k), and bitc7(k), obtain mapped signal a′(k) from bit c0(k), bit c1(k), bit c2(k),and bit c3(k), and obtain mapped signal b′(k) from bit c4(k), bit c5(k),bit c6(k), and bit c7(k).

Mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k is represented as s1(i=2k),mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k is represented as s2(i=2k),mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k+1 is represented ass1(i=2k+1), and mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k+1 isrepresented as s2(i=2k+1).

s1(i=2k) is expressed as a(k), s2(i=2k) is expressed as b(k), s1(i=2k+1)is expressed as b′(k), and s2(i=2k+1) is expressed as a′(k).

Regarding the relationship between “a(k) and a′(k)” and “b(k) andb′(k)”, as described above, for example, the relationship between “bits(for example x0, x1, x2, x3, since there are 16 signal points) to betransmitted for generation of a(k) and the distribution of signalpoints” and the relationship between “bits (for example x0 x1, x2, x3)to be transmitted for generation of a′(k) and the distribution of signalpoints” may be the same, and, alternatively, may be different.

Other examples include “the modulation scheme for generating a(k) andthe modulation scheme for generating a′(k) are different” and “thesignal point distribution in the in-phase I-orthogonal Q plane forgenerating a(k) and the signal point distribution in the in-phaseI-orthogonal Q plane for generating a′(k) are different”.

Note that “different signal point distributions in the in-phaseI-orthogonal Q plane” means, for example, when the coordinates of 16signal points in the in-phase I-orthogonal Q plane for generating a(k),at least one of the 16 signal points in the in-phase I-orthogonal Qplane for generating a′(k) does not overlap with any one of the 16signal points in the in-phase I-orthogonal Q plane for generating a(k).

Regarding the relationship between “a(k) and a′(k)” and “b(k) andb′(k)”, as described above, for example, the relationship between “bits(for example x0, x1, x2, x3, since there are 16 signal points) to betransmitted for generation of b(k) and the distribution of signalpoints” and the relationship between “bits (for example x0 x1, x2, x3)to be transmitted for generation of b′(k) and the distribution of signalpoints” may be the same, and, alternatively, may be different.

Other examples include “the modulation scheme for generating b(k) andthe modulation scheme for generating b′(k) are different” and “thesignal point distribution in the in-phase I-orthogonal Q plane forgenerating b(k) and the signal point distribution in the in-phaseI-orthogonal Q plane for generating b′(k) are different”.

Note that “different signal point distributions in the in-phaseI-orthogonal Q plane” means, for example, when the coordinates of 16signal points in the in-phase I-orthogonal Q plane for generating b(k),at least one of the 16 signal points in the in-phase I-orthogonal Qplane for generating b′(k) does not overlap with any one of the 16signal points in the in-phase I-orthogonal Q plane for generating b(k).

As described above, since mapped signal 6803A corresponds to mappedsignal 105_1 in FIG. 1 and mapped signal 6803B corresponds to mappedsignal 105_2 FIG. 1, mapped signal 6803A and mapped signal 6803B areapplied with a phase change and/or weighting synthesis processing basedon, for example, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22,FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, FIG. 33, FIG. 59, FIG. 60,FIG. 61, FIG. 62, FIG. 63, FIG. 64, FIG. 65, FIG. 66, and FIG. 67, whichcorrespond to signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 1.

Fifth Example

Hereinbefore, the transmission device included in the base station or APwas exemplified as having the configuration in FIG. 1, but hereoperations for when the transmission device in the base station or APhas the configuration illustrated in FIG. 73, which differs from FIG. 1,will be described.

In FIG. 73, components that operate the same as in FIG. 1, FIG. 44 sharelike reference marks. Accordingly, repeated description thereof will beomitted.

Mapper 7301 illustrated in FIG. 73 receives inputs of encoded data103_1, 103_2, and control signal 100, performs mapping based oninformation relating to a mapping method included in control signal 100,and outputs mapped signals 105_1, 105_2.

FIG. 77 illustrates operations performed by mapper 7301 illustrated inFIG. 73. In FIG. 77, components that operate the same as in FIG. 68,FIG. 74 share like reference marks. Accordingly, repeated descriptionthereof will be omitted.

Mapper 6802 receives inputs of encoded data 7401_1, 7401_2, and controlsignal 6800, and when a robust transmission method is specified bycontrol signal 6800, performs mapping processes such as those describedbelow, and outputs mapped signals 6803A, 6803B.

Note that control signal 6800 corresponds to control signal 100 in FIG.73, encoded data 7401_1 corresponds to encoded data 103_1 in FIG. 73,encoded data 7401_2 corresponds to encoded data 103_2 in FIG. 73, mapper6802 corresponds to mapper 7301 in FIG. 73, mapped signal 6803Acorresponds to mapped signal 105_1 in FIG. 73, and mapped signal 6801Bcorresponds to mapped signal 105_2 in FIG. 73.

For example, mapper 6802 receives inputs of bit c0(k), bit c1(k), bitc2(k), and bit c3(k) as encoded data 7401_1, and receives inputs of bitc4(k), bit c5(k), bit c6(k), and bit c7(k) as encoded data 7401_2. Notethat k is an integer that is greater than or equal to 0.

Mapper 6802 performs a modulation using a modulation scheme having 16signal points, such as 16QAM, on the following bits, so as to obtainmapped signal a(k) from bit c0(k), bit c1(k), bit c2(k), and bit c3(k),obtain mapped signal b(k) from bit c4(k), bit c5(k), bit c6(k), and bitc7(k), obtain mapped signal a′(k) from bit c0(k), bit c1(k), bit c2(k),and bit c3(k), and obtain mapped signal b′(k) from bit c4(k), bit c5(k),bit c6(k), and bit c7(k).

Mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k is represented as s1(i=2k),mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k is represented as s2(i=2k),mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k+1 is represented ass1(i=2k+1), and mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k+1 isrepresented as s2(i=2k+1).

s1(i=2k) is expressed as a(k), s2(i=2k) is expressed as b(k), s1(i=2k+1)is expressed as b′(k), and s2(i=2k+1) is expressed as a′(k).

Next, the relationship between “a(k) and a′(k)” and “b(k) and b′(k)”will be described with reference to the fourth example.

As described above, since mapped signal 6803A corresponds to mappedsignal 105_1 in FIG. 73 and mapped signal 6803B corresponds to mappedsignal 105_2 FIG. 73, mapped signal 6803A and mapped signal 6803B areapplied with a phase change and/or weighting synthesis processing basedon, for example, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22,FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, FIG. 33, FIG. 59, FIG. 60,FIG. 61, FIG. 62, FIG. 63, FIG. 64, FIG. 65, FIG. 66, and FIG. 67, whichcorrespond to signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 73.

Sixth Example

Hereinbefore, the transmission device included in the base station or APwas exemplified as having the configuration in FIG. 1, but hereoperations for when the transmission device in the base station or APhas the configuration illustrated in FIG. 73, which differs from FIG. 1,will be described.

In FIG. 73, components that operate the same as in FIG. 1, FIG. 44 sharelike reference marks. Accordingly, repeated description thereof will beomitted.

Mapper 7301 illustrated in FIG. 73 receives inputs of encoded data103_1, 103_2, and control signal 100, performs mapping based oninformation relating to a mapping method included in control signal 100,and outputs mapped signals 105_1, 105_2.

FIG. 78 illustrates operations performed by mapper 7301 illustrated inFIG. 73. In FIG. 78, components that operate the same as in FIG. 68,FIG. 74 share like reference marks. Accordingly, repeated descriptionthereof will be omitted.

Mapper 6802 receives inputs of encoded data 7401_1, 7401_2, and controlsignal 6800, and when a robust transmission method is specified bycontrol signal 6800, performs mapping processes such as those describedbelow, and outputs mapped signals 6803A, 6803B.

Note that control signal 6800 corresponds to 100 in FIG. 73, encodeddata 7401_1 corresponds to encoded data 103_1 in FIG. 73, encoded data7401_2 corresponds to encoded data 103_2 in FIG. 73, mapper 6802corresponds to mapper 7301 in FIG. 73, mapped signal 6803A correspondsto mapped signal 105_1 in FIG. 73, and mapped signal 6801B correspondsto mapped signal 105_2 in FIG. 73.

For example, mapper 6802 receives inputs of bit c0(k), bit c1(k), bitc4(k), and bit c5(k) as encoded data 7401_1, and receives inputs of bitc2(k), bit c3(k), bit c6(k), and bit c7(k) as encoded data 7401_2. Notethat k is an integer that is greater than or equal to 0.

Mapper 6802 performs modulation using a modulation scheme that uses 16signal points, such as 16QAM, on, for example, bit c0(k), bit c1(k), bitc2(k), and bit c3(k), to obtain mapped signal a(k).

Mapper 6802 performs modulation using a modulation scheme that uses 16signal points, such as 16QAM, on, for example, bit c4(k), bit c5(k), bitc6(k), and bit c7(k), to obtain mapped signal b(k), on bit c0(k), bitc1(k), bit c2(k), and bit c3(k) to obtain mapped signal a′(k), and onbit c4(k), bit c5(k), bit c6(k), and bit c7(k) to obtain mapped signalb′(k).

Mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k is represented as s1(i=2k),mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k is represented as s2(i=2k),mapped signal 6803A whose symbol number i=2k+1 is represented ass1(i=2k+1), and mapped signal 6803B whose symbol number i=2k+1 isrepresented as s2(i=2k+1).

s1(i=2k) is expressed as a(k), s2(i=2k) is expressed as b(k), s1(i=2k+1)is expressed as b′(k), and s2(i=2k+1) is expressed as a′(k).

Next, the relationship between “a(k) and a′(k)” and “b(k) and b′(k)”will be described with reference to the fourth example.

As described above, since mapped signal 6803A corresponds to mappedsignal 105_1 in FIG. 73 and mapped signal 6803B corresponds to mappedsignal 105_2 FIG. 73, mapped signal 6803A and mapped signal 6803B areapplied with a phase change and/or weighting synthesis processing basedon, for example, FIG. 2, FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. 20, FIG. 21, FIG. 22,FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, FIG. 33, FIG. 59, FIG. 60,FIG. 61, FIG. 62, FIG. 63, FIG. 64, FIG. 65, FIG. 66, and FIG. 67, whichcorrespond to signal processor 106 illustrated in FIG. 73.

As described above, as a result of the transmission device transmittinga modulated signal, advantageous effects such as the reception devicebeing able to achieve high data reception quality, and, for example, inenvironments in which direct waves are dominant, favorable datareception quality can be realized are achievable.

Note that a configuration in which the communications method(transmission method) described in this embodiment is selectable by thebase station or AP and a configuration in which the terminal describedin Embodiments A1, A2, and A4 transmit a reception capabilitynotification symbol may be combined.

For example, when the terminal notifies the base station or AP that itsupports phase change demodulated via information 3601 relating to phasechange demodulation support in FIG. 38, or notifies the base station orAP that it supports the transmission method (communications method)described in this embodiment via information 3702 relating tocompatibility regarding reception for a plurality of streams, the basestation or AP can determine to transmit a plurality of modulated signalsfor a plurality of streams via the transmission method (communicationsmethod) described in this embodiment and then transmit the modulatedsignals. Accordingly, the terminal can achieve high data receptionquality, and the base station or AP takes into consideration thecommunications method supported by the terminal and the communicationsenvironment, for example, and accurately generates and transmits amodulated signal receivable by the terminal to achieve an advantageouseffect of an improvement in data transmission efficiency in the systemincluding the base station or AP and terminal.

Various aspects of the embodiments according to the present disclosurealso include the following.

A transmission device according to a first aspect of the presentdisclosure includes: a weighting synthesizer that generates a firstprecoded signal and a second precoded signal by performing a precodingprocess on a first baseband signal and a second baseband signal; a firstpilot inserter that outputs a third signal by inserting a pilot signalinto the first precoded signal; a first phase changer that outputs afourth signal by applying a first phase change to the second precodedsignal; a second pilot inserter that outputs a fifth signal by insertinga pilot signal into the fourth signal; and a second phase changer thatoutputs a sixth signal by applying a second phase change to the fifthsignal.

A transmission method according to a second aspect of the presentdisclosure includes: generating a first precoded signal and a secondprecoded signal by performing a precoding process on a first basebandsignal and a second baseband signal; outputting a third signal byinserting a pilot signal into the first precoded signal; outputting afourth signal by applying a first phase change to the second precodedsignal; outputting a fifth signal by inserting a pilot signal into thefourth signal; and outputting a sixth signal by applying a second phasechange to the fifth signal.

Hereinbefore, various embodiments have been described with reference tothe drawings, but it goes without saying that the present disclosure isnot limited to these examples. One skilled in the art would recognizethat various modifications or corrections may be made within the scopeof the claims, and that the resulting embodiments would also fall withinthe technical concept of the present disclosure. Moreover, variouscomponents in the above embodiments may be arbitrarily combined withoutmaterially departing from the scope of the present disclosure.

The above embodiments present examples in which the present disclosureis implemented via hardware, but the present disclosure may beimplemented via software in connection with hardware.

Moreover, functional blocks used in the descriptions of the embodimentsare typically implemented as LSI circuits, which are integrated circuitshaving input and output terminals. These functional blocks may each beimplemented as a separate chip, and, alternatively, two or more or allof the functional blocks may be collectively implemented as a singlechip. Here, the circuit integration is exemplified as LSI, but dependingon the degree of integration, the integration may be referred to as IC,system LSI, super LSI, or ultra LSI.

Moreover, the circuit integration technique is not limited to LSI,implementation may be realized via a dedicated circuit or a generalpurpose processor. After manufacturing of the LSI circuit, aprogrammable field programmable gate array (FPGA) or a reconfigurableprocessor which is reconfigurable in connection or settings of circuitcells inside the LSI circuit may be used.

Furthermore, if an integrated circuit technology that replaces LSIemerges as semiconductor technology advances or when a derivativetechnology is established, it goes without saying that the functionalblocks may be integrated by using such technology. Implementation ofbiotechnology, for example, is a possibility.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY

The present disclosure can be widely applied to communications systemsthat transmit modulated signals from a plurality of antennas.

REFERENCE MARKS IN THE DRAWINGS

-   -   102 error correction encoder    -   104 mapper    -   106 signal processor    -   107A. 107B radio unit    -   109A, 109B antenna unit

The invention claimed is:
 1. A transmission apparatus comprising: asignal processing circuit that, in operation, generates control symbolsand data streams, data symbols included in the data streams having beengenerated by performing a first phase change process on modulatedsymbols; and a transmitter that, in operation, transmits the controlsymbols and the data streams through multiple antennas in a singlecarrier mode, the data streams being transmitted simultaneously, acyclic shift diversity scheme having been performed for the transmissionof the control symbols, a second phase change process having beenperformed for the transmission of the data streams, wherein first phasechange amounts of the first phase change process vary by symbol, andsecond phase change amounts of the second phase change process areprovided for the respective data streams and each of the second phasechange amounts are constant in time.
 2. The transmission apparatusaccording to claim 1, wherein the first phase change amount of each datastream varies periodically with a period common to the data streams. 3.The transmission apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the first phasechange amounts of data streams vary periodically with respectiveperiods.
 4. A transmission method executed by a transmission apparatus,comprising: generating control symbols and data streams, data symbolsincluded in the data streams having been generated by performing a firstphase change process on modulated symbols; and transmitting the controlsymbols and the data streams through multiple antennas in a singlecarrier mode, the data streams being transmitted simultaneously, acyclic shift diversity scheme having been performed for the transmissionof the control symbols, a second phase change process having beenperformed for the transmission of the data streams, wherein first phasechange amounts of the first phase change process vary by symbol, andsecond phase change amounts of the second phase change process areprovided for the respective data streams and each of the second phasechange amounts are constant in time.
 5. The transmission methodaccording to claim 4, wherein the first phase change amount of each datastream varies periodically with a period common to the data streams. 6.The transmission method according to claim 4, wherein the first phasechange amounts of data streams vary periodically with respectiveperiods.